Western Telematic CAS-81 Specifications

Western Telematic CAS-81 Specifications
EASYLABEL Printed Documentation
Table Of Contents
What Can the Software Do?............................................................................................................................................... 3
What Can the Software Do? ........................................................................................................................................... 3
Software Licensing Agreement ....................................................................................................................................... 4
Getting and Using Help ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
Online Help .................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Visit Our Website ........................................................................................................................................................ 7
Technical Support and Knowledgebase ...................................................................................................................... 7
Getting Started .................................................................................................................................................................. 9
How to get started .......................................................................................................................................................... 9
Before You Begin........................................................................................................................................................ 9
Passwords .................................................................................................................................................................. 9
Hot Keys ................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Installation .................................................................................................................................................................... 12
Software Installation ................................................................................................................................................. 12
Software Key Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 12
Multi-User Key Installation ........................................................................................................................................ 13
Running the Software ............................................................................................................................................... 13
Running Windows Terminal Server ........................................................................................................................... 14
Program Options.............................................................................................................................................................. 15
General ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15
Language ..................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Search Path ................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Processing ................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Appearance.................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Security ........................................................................................................................................................................ 20
Logging ........................................................................................................................................................................ 21
iii
Printed Documentation
History.......................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Users ........................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Opening and Saving ........................................................................................................................................................ 29
Opening ....................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Opening a File .......................................................................................................................................................... 29
Recent Batch Formats .............................................................................................................................................. 29
Recent Edited Formats ............................................................................................................................................. 29
Recent Database Files .............................................................................................................................................. 30
Recent Reports ......................................................................................................................................................... 30
Recent Serial Files .................................................................................................................................................... 30
Saving .......................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Saving a Format ....................................................................................................................................................... 30
Save As .................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Save Label Image ..................................................................................................................................................... 31
Format Browser............................................................................................................................................................ 31
Designing Formats........................................................................................................................................................... 33
Format Specifications ................................................................................................................................................... 33
General..................................................................................................................................................................... 33
Printer Settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Cutter ....................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Cut Options............................................................................................................................................................... 40
Page Header ............................................................................................................................................................ 41
RFID Tag Selection .................................................................................................................................................. 42
Creating Labels ............................................................................................................................................................ 43
Entering Specification Data ....................................................................................................................................... 43
Label Setup .............................................................................................................................................................. 45
Creating Formats ...................................................................................................................................................... 45
Changing an Existing Format .................................................................................................................................... 46
iv
Table Of Contents
Moving on the Format ............................................................................................................................................... 46
Maximum Fields on a Format .................................................................................................................................... 47
Erasing a Format ...................................................................................................................................................... 47
Viewing/Changing Format Size ................................................................................................................................. 47
Rotating a Label........................................................................................................................................................ 48
Adding a New field .................................................................................................................................................... 48
Placing a Field on the Format ................................................................................................................................... 48
Selecting a Field on the Format Display .................................................................................................................... 49
Edit .................................................................................................................................................................................. 51
Viewing/Changing a Field ............................................................................................................................................. 51
Undo ............................................................................................................................................................................ 51
Cut ............................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Copy ............................................................................................................................................................................ 51
Paste............................................................................................................................................................................ 51
Resizing Fields ............................................................................................................................................................. 52
Lock Field..................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Choosing a Group of Fields .......................................................................................................................................... 52
Choose All Fields ......................................................................................................................................................... 53
Erasing a Field ............................................................................................................................................................. 53
Moving a Field .............................................................................................................................................................. 53
View ................................................................................................................................................................................ 55
Print Queue .................................................................................................................................................................. 55
Log Reader .................................................................................................................................................................. 55
Position Grid ................................................................................................................................................................ 56
Snap to Grid ................................................................................................................................................................. 56
Display Grid ................................................................................................................................................................. 56
Tool Bars...................................................................................................................................................................... 56
Standard Tool Bar..................................................................................................................................................... 56
v
Printed Documentation
Drawing .................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Function.................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Tools ........................................................................................................................................................................ 58
Navigator .................................................................................................................................................................. 58
Field List ................................................................................................................................................................... 59
Zoom............................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Zoom Out ................................................................................................................................................................. 59
Zoom In .................................................................................................................................................................... 59
Zoom Level ............................................................................................................................................................... 59
Insert ............................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Bar Code Field ............................................................................................................................................................. 61
Adding a Bar Code Field ........................................................................................................................................... 61
Create a Bar Code Using the Wizard ........................................................................................................................ 70
Adding a Multi-Source Bar Code Field ...................................................................................................................... 71
Source Data.............................................................................................................................................................. 72
Box Field ...................................................................................................................................................................... 79
Adding a Box Field .................................................................................................................................................... 79
Circle or Ellipse Field.................................................................................................................................................... 83
Adding a Circle or Ellipse Field ................................................................................................................................. 83
Line Field ..................................................................................................................................................................... 86
Adding a Line Field ................................................................................................................................................... 86
Picture Field ................................................................................................................................................................. 88
Adding a Picture Field ............................................................................................................................................... 88
Source of Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 91
Text Field ..................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Adding a Text or Paragraph Field.............................................................................................................................. 97
Adding a Multi-Source Text field ............................................................................................................................. 114
Source Data............................................................................................................................................................ 115
vi
Table Of Contents
VoiceCode ................................................................................................................................................................. 125
VoiceCode .............................................................................................................................................................. 125
RFID .......................................................................................................................................................................... 126
Programming EPC Tags ......................................................................................................................................... 126
Programming Non-EPC Tags ................................................................................................................................. 127
Tools ............................................................................................................................................................................. 129
Print Format Definition ................................................................................................................................................ 129
Cross Hairs ................................................................................................................................................................ 130
Align ........................................................................................................................................................................... 130
Align Left ................................................................................................................................................................ 130
Center Horizontally ................................................................................................................................................. 130
Align Right .............................................................................................................................................................. 130
Space Horizontally .................................................................................................................................................. 130
Align Up .................................................................................................................................................................. 130
Center Vertically ..................................................................................................................................................... 130
Align Down ............................................................................................................................................................. 131
Space Vertically ...................................................................................................................................................... 131
Printing .......................................................................................................................................................................... 133
Printers ...................................................................................................................................................................... 133
Adding a Printer ...................................................................................................................................................... 133
Deleting a Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 133
Changing an Existing Printer ................................................................................................................................... 133
Avery Dennison ...................................................................................................................................................... 133
cab ......................................................................................................................................................................... 137
C.Itoh...................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Citizen .................................................................................................................................................................... 163
Datamax ................................................................................................................................................................. 171
Fargo ...................................................................................................................................................................... 182
vii
Printed Documentation
HP .......................................................................................................................................................................... 192
Intermec ................................................................................................................................................................. 196
Novexx ................................................................................................................................................................... 203
Printronix ................................................................................................................................................................ 207
RJS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 215
Sato ........................................................................................................................................................................ 223
Synergystex ............................................................................................................................................................ 240
TEC ........................................................................................................................................................................ 242
Tharo H-Series and V-Series .................................................................................................................................. 246
Tharo (Legacy Printers) .......................................................................................................................................... 250
TSC ........................................................................................................................................................................ 260
Windows ................................................................................................................................................................. 263
Zebra ...................................................................................................................................................................... 266
Print Batch of Formats ................................................................................................................................................ 276
Printing a Batch of Formats ..................................................................................................................................... 276
Printing a New Format ............................................................................................................................................ 280
Print Request .......................................................................................................................................................... 280
Changing Format Data............................................................................................................................................ 282
Test Print ................................................................................................................................................................ 283
Print Queue ................................................................................................................................................................ 284
View/Changing the Print Queue .............................................................................................................................. 284
Change Single Job Status....................................................................................................................................... 284
Change all jobs associated with Printer ................................................................................................................... 286
Status Window ........................................................................................................................................................ 286
Job List Files .............................................................................................................................................................. 288
Print Format Definition ................................................................................................................................................ 290
Advanced Printing ...................................................................................................................................................... 291
IP Printing ............................................................................................................................................................... 291
viii
Table Of Contents
USB Printing ........................................................................................................................................................... 292
Network Printing - UNC (Universal Naming Convention) ......................................................................................... 293
Multi - Port Serial Printing ....................................................................................................................................... 294
Internal dBase Database ............................................................................................................................................... 295
Database Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 295
Adding a Database ..................................................................................................................................................... 295
Modifying a Database Field ........................................................................................................................................ 299
Erasing a Database Field ........................................................................................................................................... 299
Indexing a Database .................................................................................................................................................. 299
Adding an Index File................................................................................................................................................... 300
Erasing an Index File .................................................................................................................................................. 301
Updating a Database.................................................................................................................................................. 301
Changing a Database Structure ................................................................................................................................. 301
Editing a Database ..................................................................................................................................................... 301
Form View .................................................................................................................................................................. 303
Datasheet View .......................................................................................................................................................... 304
Printing the Database Records ................................................................................................................................... 304
Compressing the Database ........................................................................................................................................ 305
Sorting the Database.................................................................................................................................................. 306
Writing Database Records to a Text File .................................................................................................................... 306
Appending Records to a Database ............................................................................................................................. 307
Erase ALL Records .................................................................................................................................................... 308
Databaseview ................................................................................................................................................................ 309
Databaseview Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 309
Data Sources ............................................................................................................................................................. 309
Cross Reference Wizard ............................................................................................................................................ 310
Adding an Access Database....................................................................................................................................... 313
Opening a Table ......................................................................................................................................................... 316
ix
Printed Documentation
Create a New Table ................................................................................................................................................... 316
Modifying a Field ........................................................................................................................................................ 319
Deleting a Field .......................................................................................................................................................... 320
Adding a Field ............................................................................................................................................................ 320
Adding a Record ........................................................................................................................................................ 320
Deleting a Record ...................................................................................................................................................... 320
Changing Fonts .......................................................................................................................................................... 320
Navigating a Database Table ..................................................................................................................................... 321
Editing Table Records ................................................................................................................................................ 321
To edit database records, click the 'Form View' icon or the 'Datasheet View' icon on the Edit menu. You can also select
View | Form View or View | Datasheet View from the menu bar. ................................................................................. 321
Design View ............................................................................................................................................................... 322
Form View .................................................................................................................................................................. 322
Datasheet View .......................................................................................................................................................... 323
Printing the Entire Table of Records ........................................................................................................................... 323
Sorting the Table ........................................................................................................................................................ 324
Writing Database Records to a Text File .................................................................................................................... 324
Appending Records to a Table ................................................................................................................................... 324
Refresh Record .......................................................................................................................................................... 325
Tool Bars.................................................................................................................................................................... 325
Window ...................................................................................................................................................................... 326
Serial Files ..................................................................................................................................................................... 329
Serial File Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 329
Creating a Serial File .................................................................................................................................................. 329
Recent Serial Files ..................................................................................................................................................... 329
Viewing/Changing a Serial File ................................................................................................................................... 329
Erasing a Serial File ................................................................................................................................................... 329
Reports .......................................................................................................................................................................... 331
Creating a Report ....................................................................................................................................................... 331
x
Table Of Contents
Recent Reports .......................................................................................................................................................... 331
Printing the Format Tracking Report ........................................................................................................................... 331
Test Printing the Format Tracking Report ................................................................................................................... 333
Changing the Report Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 333
Writing the Report to a Text File ................................................................................................................................. 334
Erasing Format Tracking Data .................................................................................................................................... 334
Erasing ALL Tracking Data ......................................................................................................................................... 335
Advanced ...................................................................................................................................................................... 337
ActiveX....................................................................................................................................................................... 337
Application Programming Interface (API) .................................................................................................................... 338
Command Files .......................................................................................................................................................... 340
Creating a Connection to an External Database ......................................................................................................... 352
Scanning Bar Codes .................................................................................................................................................. 353
Bar Code Information ..................................................................................................................................................... 355
Linear ......................................................................................................................................................................... 355
Linear Bar Code...................................................................................................................................................... 355
Codabar.................................................................................................................................................................. 355
Code 39 .................................................................................................................................................................. 356
Code 93 .................................................................................................................................................................. 358
Code 128 ................................................................................................................................................................ 360
EAN/UCC 8 ............................................................................................................................................................ 361
EAN/UCC 13 .......................................................................................................................................................... 362
FIM ......................................................................................................................................................................... 364
GS1-128 (EAN/UCC-128 SSCC-18/SCC-14) ......................................................................................................... 364
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I2of5) ......................................................................................................................................... 369
MSI ......................................................................................................................................................................... 371
Plessy ..................................................................................................................................................................... 371
POSTNET .............................................................................................................................................................. 372
xi
Printed Documentation
UPC-A .................................................................................................................................................................... 372
UPC-E0 .................................................................................................................................................................. 374
UPC-E1 .................................................................................................................................................................. 375
2D .............................................................................................................................................................................. 376
2D Bar Code ........................................................................................................................................................... 376
Aztec Code ............................................................................................................................................................. 376
CODABLOCK ......................................................................................................................................................... 378
Code 49 .................................................................................................................................................................. 379
DataMatrix .............................................................................................................................................................. 381
MicroPDF ............................................................................................................................................................... 383
MaxiCode ............................................................................................................................................................... 383
PDF417 .................................................................................................................................................................. 384
QR Code ................................................................................................................................................................ 386
Composite .................................................................................................................................................................. 388
Composite Bar Code............................................................................................................................................... 388
Aztec Mesa ............................................................................................................................................................. 389
EAN/UCC Composite.............................................................................................................................................. 391
GS1 DataBar .......................................................................................................................................................... 393
Formally known as RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) ........................................................................................... 393
Appendices .................................................................................................................................................................... 403
Appendix A: Error Status Messages ........................................................................................................................... 403
Appendix B: Application Notes ................................................................................................................................... 407
Appendix C: $ALL Function and Tutorial .................................................................................................................... 411
Appendix D: File Types .............................................................................................................................................. 413
Appendix E: Installing Code Page 850........................................................................................................................ 415
Appendix F: Hexadecimal Codes ............................................................................................................................... 415
Appendix G: Labelcom Utility ..................................................................................................................................... 416
Appendix H: Advanced Programming Functions ......................................................................................................... 422
xii
Table Of Contents
Appendix I: Creation of a Connection String ............................................................................................................... 426
Index ............................................................................................................................................................................. 429
xiii
2866 Nationwide Parkway
P.O. Box 798
Brunswick, OH 44212 USA
TEL: 330.273.4408
FAX: 330.225.0099
www.tharo.com
General Information: [email protected]
Sales: [email protected]
Software Support: [email protected]
Support: [email protected]
Printer
1
What Can the Software Do?
What Can the Software Do?
What is it?
For fast, on-site labels with bar codes, this software is the time-tested industry
standard. The software is a product identification and bar code labeling software
package, that enables you to custom design your own labels, on demand, quickly
and easily. Combining a database for storage of variable information and a
separate capability for serialized fields, this software has been designed to meet
the requirements of a wide variety of users.
What can it do?
Offering a user friendly interface, it's easy to print bar codes, graphics, text, lines
and boxes to any number of supported bar code thermal/thermal transfer printers,
as well as, dot matrix, laser, ink jet printers and any Windows Printer Driver,
including color printers.
With its WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) interface, designing labels
is extremely fast and accurate, saving you time and money in label production.
Once the label is designed, you have the flexibility to print thousands of the same
label. You can also print individual, unique labels by reading information from a
database, an external text file, serial file, operator entered variable data, or data
from an external input device.
Database capabilities provide a powerful and flexible system for handling many
different types of variable data, such as text, graphics and external text files. It
comes complete with its own dBASE® compatible database. It provides complete
connectivity to all 32-bit ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant
databases, including Access®, Oracle®, Paradox®, Btrieve®, AS/400® and
Sybase®.
The software allows a specific incrementing serial number to be embedded into a
database field; and this allows each record to have a unique serial number. When
printing a format, this serial number is automatically updated in the serial file.
Command files can be used to trigger the software from within other applications.
With ActiveX® object controls, you can easily interact with any 32-bit Windows
application making integration a snap!
Accompanied with a utility program called LABELCOM®, communications with
external accessories, such as a scale or bar code scanner, are made easy.
3
Printed Documentation
By allowing you to preview your selection, you will save time with the thumbnail
feature available for fonts, graphics and label formats.
The ability to use variable graphics allow you to define a single format and bring
in the correct graphic along with other database information.
Pictures can be created using Microsoft Paintbrush®, Adobe Photoshop®, Paint
Shop Pro® and many other graphics applications. Files with the .EPS extension
can only be included on formats designed for a Postscript printer.
Not only are linear bar codes such as UPC-A, Code 128 and Code 39 supported,
but also two-dimensional bar codes such as PDF417, MaxiCode, DataMatrix and
QR Code, based on the printer in use. With its variety of supported bar codes, the
software complies with automotive, government, health care, shipping container
standards, FDA, Department of Transportation and OSHA labeling requirements.
Powerful features like enhanced arithmetic functions, format specific serial
numbers, user defined consecutive numbering, date/time stamping, and the
ability to calculate sell by dates, will meet all of your demanding labeling needs.
Included is support for UNC (Universal Naming Convention) which allows you to
use the assigned name for a network printer instead of the specific path to access
the printer. While saving you time and money, a multiple-seat license is available
for easy network use.
Print to any printer in the world that is either connected to a print or device server
or one that has an internal Ethernet card using IP Printing.
Customized Reports provide tighter control over your label production by printing reports that display
information specific to label formats that have been edited or printed.
With Data Validation you can increase label accuracy, reduce human errors,
labor costs and label waste by controlling operator-entered data. Data can be
verified before it is placed on the label.
By using the software, you can connect to MRP II (Manufacturing Resource
Planning), ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) systems such as SAP, Oracle,
PeopleSoft, JD Edwards and BAAN, as well as MES (Manufacturing Execution
Systems).
With its unique print queue, you have the ability to manage over 200 print jobs at
the same time, while addressing up to 255 printers from only one PC.
BACK to TOP
Software Licensing Agreement
4
What Can the Software Do?
IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: The software in this package is sold on
condition of your agreement with the terms and conditions of this licensing
agreement. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT BY INSTALLING, COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE
SOFTWARE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR USE
THE SOFTWARE; RETURN THE PACKAGE FOR A FULL REFUND, IF
APPLICABLE.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE
The various software products are licensed in similar ways with a few exceptions.
The Multi-User product comes standard with a certain number of client seats. The
number of authorized concurrent users covered by the license for the software
will be visually displayed to you by pressing F3 while the software is running. You
may add additional clients to your license at any time.
The Terminal Server product is licensed on per server basis. Any number of
users may use the software on a single Terminal Server machine.
The Platinum, Gold, Silver, Print Only and Start products are to be used only on a
single computer.
2. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS
NOT FOR RESALE SOFTWARE. Software identified as "Not For Resale" or
"NFR," may not be sold or otherwise transferred for value, or used for any
purpose other than demonstration.
NO RENTAL/COMMERCIAL HOSTING. You may not rent, lease, lend or provide
commercial hosting services with the Software.
You may modify or make backup copies of this software only in support of your
use of the software on the single computer. You may transfer this software and
license to another party only if the other party agrees to accept the terms and
conditions of this license and only if you do the following: you must transfer all
copies, in printed or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, to the same party
or, at the time of the transfer, you must destroy any copies, in printed or machinereadable form, in whole or in part, not transferred. At the time you transfer
possession, your license is automatically terminated.
On any copy, you must retain and reproduce any copyright notices contained in
the software. You may not use, copy or transfer the software or any copies, in
printed or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, except as expressly
provided in this agreement
3. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES
5
Printed Documentation
The author has taken due care in preparing this software. The author makes no
warranties either expressed or implied in regard to this software. The author does
not warrant that the software will meet your specific requirements or that the
software will be error free. In no event shall the author be liable to you for any
damages, incidental or consequential, arising out of the use or performance of
this software.
6
Getting and Using Help
Online Help
Visit Our Website
Visit us at www.tharo.com for Products, Technical Support, Downloadable
Software and Drivers, News and much more.
For helpful video and interactive tutorials, please
visit www.tharo.com/interactive.php
Technical Support and Knowledgebase
If you need additional help visit the Technical support page of our website at:
http://www.tharo.com/support_easylabel.php
For helpful video and interactive tutorials, please
visit www.tharo.com/interactive.php
You can also search our extensive Knowledgebase at:
http://www.tharo.com/kb/
7
Getting
Getting Started
How to get started
Before You Begin
Your software disk will contain a file called README. The README file contains
important information concerning any changes to the program or special
instructions.
It would also be beneficial for all users to work through the tutorial supplied with
the software. EasyTutor is available in English on the CD.
• Inserting the CD into your CD-ROM drive. Follow the on-screen installation
instructions.
• If Autorun is not enabled, choose Start | Run
• Type d:\setup (where d:\ is your CD-ROM drive), click OK.
• Follow the on-screen installation instructions.
The EasyTutor video and interactive tutorials are also available online if no CD is
available.
Please visit www.tharo.com/interactive.php
Passwords
Each User Identifier can be up to 16 characters long and passwords can be as
many as 16 characters long. To enter the software, the correct User ID and
Password must be entered. If the correct password is not entered within several
attempts, the software will be terminated and you will be taken back to Windows.
For security purposes, when entering a password, a * will be displayed for each
character in the password. Individual users have the ability to change their own
passwords, however, only the program manager may view or change all user
passwords.
9
Printed Documentation
Passwords can be assigned to each user who will be permitted access to the
software. Each user can also be granted permission to use any or all
subfunctions.
Users and passwords are assigned by selecting Settings | Users from the menu
bar or by selecting the User icon
more information
on the Function Toolbar. See Users for
Hot Keys
Several keys have special meanings in the software. A short description of their
functions follows:
Left Mouse Button
Allows you to choose menu options, icons, etc. by pointing and clicking once on
the selected item. A fields parameter can be displayed by double clicking on the
field once that field has been selected.
Right Mouse Button
Displays a short cut menu which allows you to Cut, Copy, Paste, Erase, or view
the Field Specifications of the selected field.
CTRL + Left Mouse Button
Allow you to select multiple fields to view and edit similar field parameter settings.
F2
Displays the Print Queue screen.
F3
Displays the WIBU-KEY Control Panel.
F4
Opens the Windows Character Map
CTRL + Z
Undo Function - will undo the most recent editing or formatting action and return
to its previous setting.
CTRL + ENTER
10
Getting Started
Tells the software to start a new line. This key combination can be used when
entering paragraph information.
ESC
Generally means to terminate the current function. When a menu is displayed,
the ESC key has the same function as Alt + Q for quit.
ARROW Keys/ARROW Keys + SHIFT
When moving on the format display, the four arrow keys move the format pointer,
the box representing a field or the corner of a box being expanded. The field or
cursor will move .01 inches or .1mm. If the arrow keys are used while the SHIFT
key is depressed, the movement will be in .1 inch or 1.0 mm increments. The
arrow keys also allow you to make a selection among a given option. When
selecting a file name, the Up or Down, Right or Left arrow keys move the
highlighted bar to the next or previous file name.
TAB / TAB + SHIFT / TAB + CTRL
When entering data on specification input screens, the TAB key moves the
highlighted bar to the next item, the SHIFT+TAB key combination moves the
highlighted bar to the previous item. However, the arrow keys allow you to make
a selection among the given option. When selecting a file name, the Up or Down,
Right or Left arrow keys move the highlighted bar to the next or previous file
name. Using the CTRL+TAB key combination moves through the TABS on the
field parameter dialog box.
ENTER
Means that the information currently being entered is complete.
PgUp/PgDn
When asked to enter a file name, the software presents an alphabetized directory,
across the screen, of the available files. If there are more file names than can be
viewed at once, PgDn moves to the next screen and PgUp will move back to the
previous screen.
HOME/END
When moving on the format display, HOME will move the format pointer to the
upper left corner of the format. END will move the format pointer to the lower right
corner of the format.
H/V
11
Printed Documentation
Allows you to center a field horizontally, vertically or both. While a field is
highlighted to be moved, pressing the H key will place it horizontally, the V key
will place it vertically and pressing the H key followed by the V key will center the
field on the format.
ALT
ALT + number
Some font options have International Characters available. They are accessed by
holding down the Alt key and typing the corresponding numbers on the Numeric
Keypad for the character of choice. These numbers can be found in the Windows
Character Map. Character options will vary depending on the printer in use. If
your keyboard is supplied with International Characters, you may access them
directly by typing the appropriate keys. Refer to Appendix E for more information
on producing extended characters.
ALT + letter
All Menu functions and Specification Screen items can be accessed using the
ALT key and typing the corresponding underlined letter. For Specification Screen
items, some letters are used more than once. If a letter is used more than once,
press ALT + the letter again to get to the correct screen item.
BACK to TOP
Installation
Software Installation
To install the software follow these steps:
• Insert the CD into your CD-ROM drive. Follow the on-screen installation
instructions.
• If Autorun is not enabled, choose Start | Run
• Type d:\
d:\setup (where d:\ is your CD-ROM drive), click OK.
• Follow the on-screen installation instructions.
See Software Key Installation for more information.
Software Key Installation
12
Getting Started
To use all the capabilities of the software, you will need to install a special
software enabling device called a Software Key. A Software Key is supplied when
you purchase the software. To install the Software Key, do the following:
1) Remove any cable from a parallel printer port of your choice on the back of
your PC. If you have a USB Software Key you can skip this step
2) Plug the Software Key into the parallel printer port and secure with the
attached screws. Or, if you have a USB Software Key, do NOT plug in the key
until you are prompted to do so by the installation software!.
WARNING: Do not plug the Key into a SERIAL port.
3) If a printer is to be attached to the port, plug the printer cable into the open end
of the Software Key and secure with the attached screws.
NOTE: It is not necessary to attach a cable to the open end of the Key if the
parallel port is not being used by a printer. However, the Key MUST be attached
to a parallel port even though you may be doing serial printing.
4) The Software Key Drivers are automatically and transparently installed during
the normal software installation. If you receive an error message stating that
there was a problem installing the Software Key Drivers, you must manually
install them from the \WIBU folder on the CD.
You must have "Administrator" privileges in order for the Software Key Drivers to
install correctly. Contact your network administrator for more information.
Multi-User Key Installation
For information regarding the installation and troubleshooting of the Multi-User
version and the Multi-User Key, please refer to the NetRead.pdf document on the
CD.
You can also refer to the WIBU-Key Guide for installation instructions and
troubleshooting.
Running the Software
NOTE: Printers should always be on and in the ON-LINE/READY mode to
receive data prior to starting the software.
To start, double-click on the program icon.
In order to have full print functions, you must have the software protection key
connected to the PC's USB or parallel port. Without it, you may be able to print
13
Printed Documentation
one or a couple of labels at a time. The word "Demo" may also appear on the
label.
Running Windows Terminal Server
Only the Platinum version of software will run under Windows Terminal Server.
The special Terminal Server Key indicated by a round "T" coded label applied to
it is required.
14
Program Options
General
Measurement
Save Data
Save Data Within
Session
ISO Week of the
Year
Tab on CR
Auto Submit
IBM/NEC
Duplicate Serial
Number
Index Case
Sensitive
Searches
All or Marked
Records
Show Field List
User Sign on
Required
Auto
Auto-Size Input
Field
Measurement
Indicate whether measurements will be based on inches (I) or millimeters (M).
Tab on CR
This applies when inputting data into when-printed fields. Select Yes to allow a
carriage return or the Enter key to work like the Tab key. By selecting Yes, the
cursor will move from one input prompt to the next when the Enter key is pressed.
When all input prompts are filled, pressing Enter will advance to the print screen.
Select No to use the Tab key to move the cursor from one input prompt to the
next.
Auto Submit
Select No to display label preview after entering variable data for printing.
Select Yes to skip preview and submit print job immediately when variable data is
entered or changed.
Save Data
Select Yes to have the last previously entered variable data for when printed
fields to be remembered for the next printing session.
Save Data Within Session
Select Yes to have the last previously entered variable data for when printed
fields to be remembered within the current printing session.
Duplicate Serial Number
Select Yes to allow multiple labels to be printed with the same serial number.
Select No to prevent printing duplicate serial numbers.
Index Case Sensitive Database Searches
15
Printed Documentation
Select Yes to make internal database index searches case sensitive (the same
lower and upper case character are not equal).
Select No to make index searches case insensitive (the same lower and upper
case characters are considered equal)
All or Marked Records
Sets the default database selection in the print request screen when printing a
group of records.
Select All Records to print all the records in the database.
Select Marked Records to print a series of previously chosen records.
ISO Week of the Year
Select Yes to calculate the week of the year according to the ISO 8601 standard.
Show Field List
Select 'Yes' to always show a list of available field names on the screen during
label design.
User Sign on Required
Select 'Yes" to require user identification and password to be entered when the
program is started.
AutoAuto-size input field
Selecting this option will automatically resize input boxes as text is entered. This
applies to When Printed fields at print time.
IBM/NEC
Choose IBM for all IBM compatible computers.
NEC is only relevant for NEC computers sold in Japan.
BACK to TOP
16
Program Options
Language
Help Language
Choose the language that you wish to display the help system in.
Language
Choose the language that you wish the application to display in.
BACK to TOP
Search Path
Define Search Path
Search Path
Path
Default Paths
Image Path
Database Path
Format Path
Serial Path
Report Path
Text Path
Command Path
Define Search Path
Select 'Yes' to define the search path for all picture files, database files, text files,
and serial files which are used by the format.
NOTE: Existing formats MUST be rere-saved in order for the new path to be used in
place of the old path.
Search Path
Enter the path to the files in the corresponding text box or browse to location by
selecting the 'Browse' button.
NOTE: Existing formats
formats MUST be rere-saved in order for the new path to be used in
place of the old path.
Default Paths
Default paths can be set for all of the file types: images,databases, formats, serial
files, reports, text files, and
command files. Enter one or more directory or folder names separated by ';'to be
searched when a file cannot be found in the location stored in the label format.
The paths for each file type are searched in the order that they are entered.
Image Path -- Default Path(s) for Images
Database Path -- Default Path(s) for Databases (EASYLABEL non SQL
structure)
Format Path -- Default Path(s) for Formats
Serial Path -- Default Path(s) for Serial files
Report Path -- Default Path(s) for Reports
Text Path -- Default Path(s) for Text files
17
Printed Documentation
Command Path -- Default Path(s) for Command files
NOTE: Default Paths are Program options. The Paths are NOT stored in the label
format when the label is saved.
BACK to TOP
Processing
Error Processing
ReRe-Send
Downloaded
Data
Use Slashed
Zero
Delete Command
File
Disable Test Print
Cent Substitute
International
Image
Command File
Characters
Processing
Monitor
Default
Command File
Error Processing
Processing
This option affects the processing of command files when a database record
cannot be found. Select Yes if you want database field values set to 0 and the
label printed. Select No if you want to stop printing when a record cannot be
found in the database.
Re - Send Downloaded Data
Select Yes, if you want a clear signal to be sent to the printer at the beginning of
each job, and all downloaded data (graphics, fonts, etc.) will be re-sent, otherwise
select No.
Disable Test Print
Select Yes to disable the Test Print function from the print screen. It will still be
available while editing a format.
Cent Substitute
Select Yes to print the tilde (~) as a cent symbol (¢).
International Characters
Select ANSI if Text Files (command, data, etc.) are created under Windows
using ANSI characters.
Select OEM if created under DOS.
Use Slashed Zero
Select No to use Unslashed zero.
Select Yes to use Slashed zero (if available)
Image Processing
18
Program Options
Indicate the type of processing to be used. Enhanced Image Processing will allow
you to open many more types of images. To display and print in color, you must
use Enhanced Image Processing.
Command File Monitor
Select Yes to enable continuous automatic checking for the existence of a
command file whenever the application window is minimized.
Select No to disable monitoring.
Default Command File
When command file monitoring is selected, enter the path/name of the command
file.
Delete Command File
Select Yes to delete the default command file after processing. This is useful
when an external program needs to know that the command file has been
processed. Select No to retain the default command file after processing.
Command files that are processed by "drag-and-drop" onto the EASYLABEL
window are NEVER deleted, regardless of the setting of the "Delete Command
File" program option.
BACK to TOP
Appearance
Appearance
Normal Text
Highlighted Text
Alternate
Background
Tabbed Dialog
Boxes
Format
Background
Disable 'Erase
All'
Phantom Fields
Primary
Background
Placement Grid
Large Tool Icons
Hide Phantom
Fields
Thumbnail Size
Normal Text
Select the predefined color or create your own color, by selecting the 'Custom'
button, for all Normal Text
Highlighted Text
Select the predefined color or create your own color, by selecting the 'Custom'
button, for all Highlighted Text
Phantom Fields
Select the predefined color or create your own color, by selecting the 'Custom'
button, for all Phantom Fields.
Primary Background
19
Printed Documentation
Select the predefined color or create your own color, by selecting the 'Custom'
button, for the Primary Background.
Alternate Background
Select the predefined color or create your own color, by selecting the 'Custom'
button, for the Alternate Background.
Format Background
Select the predefined color or create your own color, by selecting the 'Custom'
button, for the Format Background.
Placement Grid
Grid
Select the predefined color or create your own color, by selecting the 'Custom'
button, for the Placement Grid.
Large Toolbar Icons
Select Yes to show large icons in all of the toolbars. Select No to show the
standard size (small) icons.
Tabbed Dialog
Dialog Boxes
Select Yes to show dialog boxes in standard tabbed format where items are
grouped by function. Select No to use single page dialog boxes where all items
are presented in a single list.
Thumbnail Size
Select the size of the thumbnail image used in the Format Browser.
Disable 'Erase All'
Select Yes to disable the "Erase All Records" button in EASYLABEL's non-SQL
Database Editor, otherwise select No to keep this button active.
Hide Phantom Fields
Set this option to Yes to keep phantom fields from being displayed on the print
preview screen.
BACK to TOP
Security
Minimum User ID Length
Enter the number of characters to be used as the minimum length for a User
ID. The Software will not allow a user to be added unless the length of the User
ID is equal to or greater than this number. Leaving this option set to '0' means
there is no Minimum User ID Length.
Minimum Password Length
20
Program Options
Enter the number of characters to be used as the minimum length for a
Password. The Software will not accept password unless the length of the
password is equal to or greater than this number. Leaving this option set to '0'
means there is no Minimum Password Length.
Complex Password
Select 'Yes' to force passwords to contain at least one numeric (0-9) or special
([email protected]#$% etc.) character.
Select 'No' to allow simple passwords composed of letters only.
Password Reuse Times
Enter the number which defines the password reuse policy. The number entered
here will be the number of passwords the software 'remembers'. The software
will not allow a user to re-use one of these passwords. Leaving this option set to
'0' means no passwords are remembered and the user would be able to keep
using the same password.
For example: entering a 3 here will prohibit users from re-using their 3 last used
passwords.
Password Expiration Days
Enter the number of days after which the password will expire. The next time the
user logs on with the old password, they will be prompted to enter a new
password before being able to use the software.
Username/password
Username/password is required for saved changes
Select 'Yes' to require the user to enter a username and password for any
changes that get saved for formats, serial files, database files, job lists,
etc. Select 'No' for the user to NOT be prompted to enter a username and
password when saving these files.
NOTE: This option is only available when the 'User
User Signon Required'
Required option is set
to 'Yes'.
BACK to TOP
Logging
NOTE: The Logging options here are provided for Legacy Support. It is
recommended that new users who want to log events and changes use the
features on the History tab instead.
Log User Actions
Log Add Event
Log Failed Login
Event
Format History
User Log
Pathname
Log Change
Event
Log Logout
Logout Event
Log File
Maximum User
Log Size
User Log
Overwrite
Log Delete Event
Log Login Event
Log Password
Change Event
Delete Log
Format Change
History
Prompt for
21
Printed Documentation
Path
Create Print
Images
Deletions
Print Image Path
Pathname
Database
Change Log
Change Reason
Database Log
Path
Log User Actions
Selecting 'Yes' enables logging of user actions, such as changes to the user
configuration or users logging in or out of the program.
User Log Pathname
Enter or browse to the path where you would like the user logs stored. This path
should also include the name of the log file. The default name for the user log is
'user.log'. The User Log that is created is an encrypted file and the Log Reader
must be used to view its contents.
Maximum User Log Size
Enter the size limit of the user log file, in Kilobyte (1000 byte) increments.
For example, enter 2000 to set the maximum log size to 2MB (2
megabytes). The log file will then grow up to 2MB in size.
A value of 0 means that the size of the log file is not limited.
User Log Overwrite
Select an option for processing user events in the case of the user log reaching
its maximum size. Overwrite Events as Needed means to replace the oldest
events with the newest events. Do Not Overwrite Events means none of the
events will be overwritten.
NOTE: The Do Not Overwrite Events option is designed to be used when there is
no Maximum User Log Size. In fact, when User Log Overwrite is set to 'Do Not
Overwrite Events' any value that is entered in for Maximum User Log Size is
ignored. The User Log file will keep getting larger regardless of the maximum
size. This is done so that there is no loss of data.
Log Add Event
Select 'Yes' to log the addition of a new user. These events will then be stored in
the User log.
Log Change Event
Select 'Yes' to log any changes that are made to a user's information. These
events will then be stored in the User log.
Log Delete Event
Select 'Yes' to log the deletion of a user. These events will then be stored in the
User log.
Log Login Event
22
Program Options
Select 'Yes' to log all successful user logins. These events will then be stored in
the User log.
Log Failed Login Event
Select 'Yes' to log all failed login attempts. These events will then be stored in
the User log.
Log Logout Event
Select 'Yes' to log all program shutdown (logout) events. These events will then
be stored in the User log.
Log Password Change Event
Select 'Yes' to log all occurrences of when a user changed their password during
program sign-on in the User log.
Format Change History
Select 'Yes' to keep a history of all changes made to label format files. This will
create a backup format file anytime a format is saved. The format must have
its 'Save Backup Format' option enabled.
Format History Path
Enter the path of the directory where the label format backup files will be stored.
Leave this option blank to store backup files in the same directory as the label
format file.
Log File Deletions
This option will keep track of file deletions. The ‘delete log’ will record the user,
date, time, and pathname of any files that were deleted by using the File | Erase
selection from the menu bar. This makes tracing unauthorized deletions as easy
as looking at the log file.
Delete Log Pathname
Enter or browse to the path where you would like the delete logs stored. This
path should also include the name of the log file.
Prompt for Change Reason
Select 'Yes' to require users to enter text describing the reason for changing a
label format. This text is displayed when opening the format along with a
thumbnail preview of the format at the bottom of the Open box.
Create Print Images
Selecting 'Yes' will create an image file of each print job for any format that has
'Save Print Image' option enabled.
Print Image Path
Enter the path of the directory where the format print image files are to be stored.
23
Printed Documentation
Database Change Log
Select 'Yes' to create a log of changes made to .MDB databases. This log is only
updated when using the supplied database editor. A different editor (Microsoft
Access for example) will not log the changes.
NOTE: If database logging is turned on and the database structure is changed,
the old log is saved and a new log is created. This can cause a lot of log files to
be created if you frequently change the database structure.
Database Log Path
Enter the path where the database change logs should be written.
BACK to TOP
History
EASYLABEL features an extensive reporting, logging and label reprint
application called the Print History Console. The Print History Console provides
a central location for your EASYLABEL reports and logs. Multiple copies of
EASYLABEL can connect to one Print History Database allowing for centralized
logging and reporting.
NOTE:
NOTE The Print History Console must be installed before data can be
logged. For information on setting up the Print History Console see
EASYLABEL6_SQL.pdf in the Documents folder. The Documents folder is in the
same directory that EASYLABEL was installed into.
The History tab has options for: enabling history logging in the Print History
Console, selection of the database to be used for logging, and several options
that control the types of information that is logged. The logging selections are
stored so that if history logging is disabled and then later re-enabled, all of the
previous settings remain and do not have to be reentered.
The following options are available:
Enable History Logging
If this option is set to “No” then no history is logged. Nothing will be written to the
selected SQL database. Set this option to “Yes” to enable history logging. Then
use the following options to control the types of history you want to be logged.
Primary History Database
24
Program Options
Enter a connection string that points to the database containing the EASYLABEL
history tables. If the Primary History Database is unavailable (because of server
outage or network errors) then EASYLABEL will log history to the backup history
database if one is defined. Use the “Prompt” button to bring up the database
connection dialog. Follow the database connection dialog to select a database
server, database name, and user name and password. Test the connection to
make sure all of the information is correct.
NOTE:
NOTE To make future connections easier, so that you do not have to reenter the
password, select the “Allow saving password” option.
Backup History Database
Enter a connection string that points to a secondary database containing the
EASYLABEL history tables. If a Backup History Database is defined then
EASYLABEL will log history data here when the Primary History Database is not
available. If the primary database is on a network server it may make sense to
have the backup database local on the computer running EASYLABEL. See the
“Backup Server Settings” section below for an explanation of how to set this up.
Log Job Details
Set this option to “Yes” to log the information for all print jobs. This includes
information such as: format name, date, time, user name, computer name, etc.
This option is required before setting other print job logging options.
Log Job Status
Set this option to “Yes” to log the status updates for print jobs. This will log when
the job is queued, when printing is started and ended, and any errors that may
occur during the printing process.
Log Label Data
Set this option to “Yes” to log the label data for every printed batch of every print
job. When this is used in conjunction with the “Log Label Format” option, it is
possible to view and reprint any batch of any print job.
25
Printed Documentation
Log Label Format
Set this option to “Yes” to save a copy of the label format file for each print job.
This will allow the Print History Console to display an image for a printed label.
The label format file can also be saved if the original version is accidentally lost.
Log Saving of Formats
Set this option to “Yes” to log information about every save of a label format file.
This allows for viewing the history of all changes to the label format.
Log User Changes
Set this option to “Yes” to log changes to EASYLABEL user profiles, such as the
user description, access rights, etc.
BACK to TOP
Users
User SignSignOn/Password
Protection
Adding a User
User Identifier
Password
User Name
User Description
Controlled
Access Areas
User can change
Password
Password Never
User Account
Changing Users
Deleting User
Expires
Disabled
User SignSign-On/Password Protection
Protection
In order to prevent unauthorized use of the software, the program is supplied with
user sign-on requirements and user password protection. Each user may be
assigned a separate password and individual access to Menu Functions.
The Manager Functions allows the person responsible for maintaining security to
view or change any or all passwords, as well as program configuration options
and printer configuration.
Adding a User
To add a user, choose Settings | Users from the main screen, click the Add a
User icon
26
or choose Edit | Add from the menu bar.
Program Options
User Identifier
Up to 16 characters to identify a user of the software. This is the name the user
will log into (sign in) the software under. May contain a space, digits, letters or a
period.
Password
Enter the initial password to be used by the user, must be 16 characters or less.
User Name
This is an optional field where the user's real name can be entered.
User Description
This is an optional field where a description of the user can be entered.
Controlled Access Areas
You may select Yes to allow or No to disallow access to the following functions:
• Update Format
• Edit in Print Format Mode
• Print Format
• Print Report
• Database Functions
• Manager Functions
In order to prevent unauthorized changes to data on the print screen, user
passwords should be established and user rights be assigned by management. A
user that does not have editing rights, can not make changes to data on any
screen including the print screen. In this manner data security can be controlled.
User can change password
Select 'Yes' if you want user to be able to change their password. Select 'No' if
you do not want user to change their password. If the user's password expires
and they are not permitted to change their password they will be prompted to
contact the administrator for a new password when they try to log in.
Password Never Expires
Select 'Yes' to set this user so that their password never expires.
User Account Disabled
Select 'Yes' to disable this user account. If the account is disabled, the user
cannot access the program until the account is enabled. Select 'No' to enable
user to access the program.
Changing an Existing User
To change an existing user, choose Settings | Users from the main screen,
highlight the correct user, then click the Change User Definition icon
choose Edit | Change from the menu bar.
or
27
Printed Documentation
The user definition screen will be displayed and is ready for editing. Click Change
to change any data for this user. Click Cancel to leave data unchanged. If any
changes are made, choose OK to save any changes for this user or choose
Cancel to abort changes.
Deleting a User
To delete an existing user, choose Settings | Users from the main screen,
highlight the correct user, then click the Delete a User icon
or choose Edit |
Delete from the menu bar.
A Dialog Box will appear asking you to confirm this action. Click OK or press
ENTER to delete the user. Click Cancel or press ESC to reconsider.
BACK to TOP
28
Opening and Saving
Opening
Opening a File
To open an existing File click the Open icon
from the toolbar or choose File |
Open from the menu bar. A submenu will appear allowing you to choose which
type of file you would like to open; label format (*.fmt), database (*.dbf), report
(*.rpt) or a serial file (*.ser). Select which type of file you wish to open.
You are prompted for the name of an existing file. The last file used is the default
name displayed. At the same time, an alphabetized listing of the present files in
your directory will be displayed across the screen in the Open Dialog box. To
display information regarding a file, highlight the filename and a description,
along with a thumbnail preview of the format will be shown at the bottom of the
Open box.
From the File Menu you also have the ability to open:
•Recent Batch Formats
•Recent Edited Formats
•Recent Database Files
•Recent Reports
•Recent Serial Files
It is also possible to open a format for editing by Double-Clicking on it, or RightClicking on the format file and selecting "Open" from the pop-up menu. Formats
can be printed by Right-Clicking on the format and selecting "Print" from the popup menu.
Recent Batch Formats
Choose File | Recent Batch Formats from the menu bar to display a list of recently
saved Formats, which can then be opened.
Recent Edited Formats
29
Printed Documentation
Choose File | Recent Edited Formats
Formats from the menu bar to display a list of
recently created/edited Formats, which can then be opened.
Recent Database Files
Choose File | Recent Database Files from the menu bar to display a list of
recently Edited Databases, which can then be opened.
Recent Reports
Choose File | Recent Reports from the menu bar to display a list of recently
created/edited reports, which can then be opened.
Recent Serial Files
Choose File | Recent Serial Files from the menu bar to display a list of recently
created/edited Serial Files, which can then be opened.
Saving
Saving a Format
To save a format, click on the Save icon or choose File | Save from the menu bar.
This function causes all the information which defines the format to be stored on
your hard disk. The saved format will have the file name consisting of the format
name with the extension of .FMT. For example, if the format is named TEST, then
the file name for the saved format will be TEST.FMT. Also, if any fields were
specified with the report data option, a tracking data file will be created. This file
will have the extension .RPT.
Enter a filename for the format. Long filenames are supported therefore, they can
be up to 255 characters long. Click Save.
If an error occurs, you will hear a beep and a message describing the error will be
displayed.
After the format is saved, the following message appears:
The format formatname HAS BEEN SAVED.
You may now continue and make additional changes to the format or quit.
NOTE: If you want to keep a newly created format or make any changes you
made permanent, you must save the format. If you forget to save the format and
try to quit after making changes, you will be warned and given a chance to save
30
Opening and Saving
before you quit. However, it is recommended that you make a point of using the
Save function frequently while designing the format and especially before quitting.
NOTE: If a format produces a Format Tracking Report, every time that format is
saved a new tracking report is created. If there was any data in the file, it will be
erased. The data previously contained in the file will no longer be available.
Therefore, before changing a format it is a good idea to print out any Tracking
Report that is associated with this format.
BACK to TOP
Save As
To use the Save As function, choose File | Save As from the menu bar.
The Save As function is very similar to the Save function. The only difference is
that you will be prompted to enter a new name for the format before it is saved.
The Save As function is useful for making several copies of a format or for
creating several versions of a format by changing a format and then re-saving it
under a new name. With this function, you also have the ability to save the format
to a floppy disk. You need to specify a drive designator and the filename.
NOTE: You may use the save as function as many times as necessary to make
as many versions of the format as required. The end result is that the original
format, previously saved, remains intact, and a new format, identical or amended,
is created with a different file name.
Save Label Image
The Save Label Image function is used to save an image file of a label format.
To use the Save Label Image function, open a label format and then choose File |
Save Label Image from the menu bar. You will then be prompted for the Name of
the image, the type of image, the resolution (DPI) of the image and the location
where the image should be saved.
Save Label Image represents the label as seen from the format editing
menu. The image created contains NO variable data. For saving graphics of
labels with variable data see the Save Print Image function.
Format Browser
The Format Browser provides a graphical method to select formats for printing or
editing. To start the Format Browser, select File | Format Browser from the main
menu bar.
31
Printed Documentation
You will then be presented with a window. Click on the Browse button to select a
directory where label formats are stored and then click 'OK' . You will then see a
label preview of every format in the directory.
Left-Click the format preview to open the format in printing mode.
Right-Clicking the format preview allows you to choose to print, edit, or view the
properties of the format.
32
Designing Formats
Format Specifications
General
Entering a
Format Name
Display
Orientation
Save Print Image
Printer
Printer Model
Fields Currently
Defined
Tracking Report
by Batch
Default Printer
Description
Auto Field Name
Save Backup
Format
Entering a Format Name
Select File | New from the menu bar. A dialog box will appear. Click on Save as
Type to choose the file type, such as format, database, serial file. You will be
prompted for the name of the new Format File. At the same time an alphabetized
listing of the present files in your default directory will be displayed across the
screen. If there are more format names than can be shown on one screen, the
PgUp and PgDn keys will move to your next screen(s) or back to your previous
screen(s).
The file information box will display the Last Update and Description information
of any of the presently defined formats. Press the arrow keys to select a specific
format name. The description of the format will appear at the bottom of the dialog
box.
To enter the New Format Name, place the cursor in the data entry box below this
prompt.
The software supports long file names as supported under Windows 95b and
higher.
You will now be presented with the Format Specification Screen. The information
you enter controls specific aspects of the format.
The following describes the items that appear on your Format Specification
Screen:
Printer Model
Enter a choice in order to specify which model of printer is to be used.
Default Printer
Select the default printer. When this format is printed, the selected printer will be
selected as the default destination printer. This is useful when more than one
33
Printed Documentation
printer of the same type is installed to ensure that the job gets sent to the correct
printer.
Description
Allows for a short sentence describing the format being created.
Display Orientation
The orientation used to view and edit the format on the display screen. The arrow
in the upper left corner of the format will display indicating the direction of the
label stock as it comes out of the printer.
Fields Currently Defined
This field is for informational purposes only. The number of defined fields on the
format is given.
Auto Field Name
Select Yes to have the field names for barcodes, text and graphics to be
automatically generated. Select No to leave the field names blank when fields
are generated.
Save Backup Format
Selecting 'Yes' will save a backup copy of the format any time it is changed. This
option should not be turned on until the label format is in its final form. In order
for this to work, 'Format Change History' in the Program Options must also be
enabled because the 'Format Change History' option allows the administrator of
the Software to disable the creation of backup formats globally without having to
turn the option off in each individual format.
Save Print Image
Selecting 'Yes' will save an image file of print jobs for tracking or auditing
purposes. This option should not be turned on until the label format is in its final
form. The 'Create Print Images' option in the Program Options must also be
enabled for the Print Image to get created because the 'Create Print Images'
option allows the administrator of the Software to disable the creation of print
images globally without having to turn the option off in each individual format.
Tracking Report by Batch
Selecting 'Yes' will update the format tracking report for each batch of labels
printed. This can be used to record the data of RFID tags, increment/decrement
fields and database printing. Note that this will slow down the printing process.
The default setting of 'No' will update the tracking report only at the end of the job.
BACK to TOP
Printer Settings
Print Mode
34
Print Darkness
Use Ribbon Saver
Designing Formats
Presentation Position
Print Speed
Bar/Space Adjustment
Label Sensor
Backfeed Speed
Resolution
Dot Expansion
Label Offset
Direct Thermal
Print Mode
•
•
•
•
Batch Mode
Demand Mode
Tear-Off Mode
Applicator Mode
Print Darkness
A number to set the desired print darkness (the print head temperature setting).
Heat control allows you to enhance quality on some formats. Choosing a higher
number increases the darkness of the print.
Use Ribbon Saver
Select Yes to enable the ribbon saver feature on the printer. Select No to deactivate the Ribbon Saver.
Presentation Position
Use this function to advance the label past the print head for easier removal. This
function is mainly intended for "on demand" and "tear off" modes of printing. After
the label has been removed, the printer will back feed the label stock, lining up
the leading edge of the label for the printing of the next format.
Label Sensor
Indicate which type of gap sensing is appropriate for the label stock being used.
Choices vary based on the printer being used and may be any of the following:
• See Through Sensor
• Reflective Sensor (Top)
• Reflective Sensor (Bottom)
On Printronix printers ONLY these last two selections are also available
• Advanced Gap Used when using media that has liner gaps between
die cut labels with black background on Printronix printers
• Advanced Notch Used when using media with notches or holes that
interrupt a black vertical line on the underside of the media on Printronix
printers.
TEC Printers Provide ONLY the following selections
selections for Label Sensor:
• Transmissive Sensor (Using Normal Labels)
• Reflective Sensor (Using Normal Labels)
• Transmissive Sensor (Using Preprinted Labels)
• Reflective Sensor (Using a manual threshold value)
Dot Expansion
When adding a new format, select 1, 2 or 3 to specify the dot size expansion to
35
Printed Documentation
be used. The higher the number, the greater the potential print speed and the
lower the character resolution.
Print Speed
Different values will allow for printing at different speeds. Speed control allows
you to enhance print quality on some formats. Expect some degradation in print
quality at the higher speeds.
Backfeed Speed
If the firmware level of the printer supports it, this option will set the Backfeed
Speed. Backfeed Speed refers to the speed that the label stock returns back to
printing position after a presented label is removed. Select the desired Backfeed
Speed from the list. Depending on the specific printer in use, values may range
from 2"(50mm) per second up to 7.9"(200mm) per second.
If DEFAULT is selected the command is not sent. Select DEFAULT if the
printer's firmware does not support it. Selecting Backfeed Speed on a printer that
does not support it may cause a protocol error.
Label Offset
The starting print position of the label. Negative numbers move the start position
down the label and positive numbers move the start position up the label.
Bar/Space Adjustment
Adjusts the bars and spaces in a bar code. Used for Windows printer drivers only.
Under most printing conditions, if you are using a laser printer, an ink jet or a dot
matrix printer, a "Bar/Space Adjustment" selection of 2.0 prints the bar codes
within specification. If ink or toner spreading causes bars to print too wide,
INCREASE this number until you have achieved an acceptable bar code. If you
are using a Thermal/Thermal Transfer bar code label printer, a "Bar/Space
Adjustment" selection of 1.0 should be used.
Resolution
Specifies the dots per inch (dpi) that will be used. Some printers allow for
example 300, 600 or 1200 dpi.
Direct Thermal
Select Yes for Direct Thermal Printing or Select No for Thermal Transfer printing.
BACK to TOP
Options
36
Pass Through
Download Fonts
Flip Format
Mirror Image
Job Separator
Pause Option
Reverse Image
Create Replace
Replace
File
Designing Formats
Void and Reprint
Image Bands
Job Separator
Format File
Memory Card
Download
Pass Through
Enter the data that should be sent to the printer before sending the format. The
data contained within <...> like <ESC>is treated as special unprintable characters.
Download Fonts
Select Yes to download TrueType text fields as fonts. If using TrueType fonts that
require certain spacing characteristics, such as Thai, Chinese, or Japanese
characters, Select No to print text fields as graphics.
The Download Fonts option will vary depending on the printer used. Instead of a
simple yes or no, some printers have the option to select between Graphic Image,
Bitmap Font and TrueType Font. The 'Graphic Image' option will cause all
TrueType fields to be sent as graphic images. It works just like when Download
fonts is set to 'No'. The 'Bitmap Font' option will cause a Bitmap font to be
created and downloaded to the printer for each typeface/size/attribute used on
the format. The 'TrueType Font' option downloads the entire TrueType file (*.ttf)
to the printer.
Flip Format
Select Yes to flip the format 180 degrees. Enter N not to flip the format.
For example, if the label can be read while the label is printing, changing Flip
Format to Yes will cause the label to print upside down.
Reverse Image
The format can be printed normal (black print on white background) or reverse
(white print on black background). Selecting this option will print the entire format
in reverse image.
Mirror Image
Select Yes for Mirror Image if you would like all fields on the format to be printed
in mirror mode. Select No to print all fields as normal.
This screen item appears based on the printer chosen.
Job Separator
Enter the number of labels or label rows to feed between jobs.
Job Separator Format
Format File
Enter the path and name of the label format to be used as the Job Separator. If
the path and name are not entered, then blank labels will be used as the Job
Separator.
37
Printed Documentation
Pause Option
You may define pauses in the print cycle with this option. This will allow you to
tear off labels as needed.
Create Replace File
A Replace File is an ASCII text file that contains instructions that will load a
format into the printer's memory and temporarily replace field values with new
data on a format that was previously loaded on the memory card. This is
available only on cab A Series, cab M Series, cab Mach, Apollo and Tharo H and
V series printers.
Selecting Yes for this option will automatically create the ASCII Replace file for
the label when it is selected for download. The Replace file will be a template for
use on SAP, UNIX, AS/400 or PC based systems. The .rpl file will be saved in the
same directory as the label format.
Void and Reprint
This option is relevant only for the RJS printer. The RJS printer is designed to
verify up to 15 bar codes as they are printed. The printer will verify bar codes in
orientations 1 and 3, Picket Fence only. Bar codes in orientations 2 and 4, Step
Ladder, will not verify.
The Void and Reprint option will enable or disable bar code verification. This
option appears on the Format Specification Screen. Select Yes to enable
verification and No to disable it.
If Yes is chosen, any labels with invalid bar codes will have a checkerboard
pattern printed over the invalid bar code. The printer will then try to reprint the
label up to 3 times. If more than 3 invalid labels are printed, the printer will lock up
and must be reset by turning the printer off and then on again or by pressing the
Red Reset button located inside the printer.
Imaging
Imaging Bands
Used for Intermec printers. The print speed and image bands determine the rate
at which the printer processes the images of your labels. In the printer, label
printing and image processing occur simultaneously. For this reason, it is very
important that these settings be synchronized. If the Image Band command is too
low, the imaging process is unable to keep up with the print speed. In this case,
the printer stops printing and starts again at the lowest print speed. If the Image
Band command is set too high, the printer spends too much time imaging, which
slows down label production.
To optimize the number of image bands for your print speed, set the image bands
at the lowest number and then print a label at the desired speed. If the label prints,
the Image Band setting is correctly optimized.
38
Designing Formats
To optimize the number of image bands for batch printing, you must select
enough image memory to allow the printer to retain the entire label image PLUS
ONE INCH (one image band is equal to 1 inch). Therefore, if the printed image
stops at a distance of 4 inches from the beginning of the label, you must select
five image bands to prevent re-imaging.
Memory Card Download
Set this option to Yes before creating the label format to allow downloading label
formats to the printer’s memory to recalled and printed at a later time. Supported
on Tharo H Series, cab, and Zebra printers.
BACK to TOP
Page Layout
Gaps Between
Labels
Vertical
Separation
Print Area Height
Horizontal
Separation
Set Background
Color
Print Area Width
Number Across
Left Margin
Top Margin
Format
Background
Background
Image
Gaps Between Labels
The type of label stock in the printer. Select Yes if you are using media with gaps.
Select No if you are using continuous media with no gaps.
Print Area Height
The height of the actual printable area on the format in inches and hundredths of
inches, or in millimeters, if the ruler is set to millimeters
Print Area Width
The width of the actual printable area on the format in inches and hundredths of
inches, or in millimeters, if the ruler is set to millimeters.
Number Across
Indicates the number of labels across the web/page width.
Vertical Separation
Enter the vertical distance between the top of one format and the top of the next
format in inches and hundredths of inches. This value must be at least 1/10th of
an inch (.10) greater than the Print Area Height.
Horizontal Separation
39
Printed Documentation
The distance from the left edge of the first format to the left edge of the next
format.
Left Margin
Enter the horizontal offset of the print image area from the left edge of the paper
in inches and hundredths of inches or tenths of millimeters.
Top Margin
Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in
hundredths of inches or tenths of millimeters.
Set Background Color
Select 'Yes' if you wish to set a label background color and then select the color
you wish to use in the 'Format Background' prompt below. This option only
appears for Windows printer drivers.
Format Background
Select a color to be used as the color for the label background. When printing the
label, the background of the label will be printed this color. This option only
appears for Windows printer drivers.
Background Image
A non-printable image can be selected to help with field alignment when using
pre-printed label stock. The background image can be any size (up to label
width/height) and can be positioned anywhere on the label format. The image can
also be embedded in the label format file.
BACK to TOP
Cutter
Cut Options
Cut Offset
Cut Options
You may define where in a print cycle the cutter actuates, allowing you to cut
after each format, each batch, each job, or Double Cut each format.
Cut Offset
Enter the distance from the point at which the label stops printing and the point at
which the label is to be cut in inches or millimeters.
40
Designing Formats
This value should be approximately .06". To make TWO cuts per label, enter two
offsets separated by a comma. For example, to cut a reflective marking out of a
label, the first offset should be approximately .06" and the second offset should
the amount of space between the end of the first label and the start of the second
label.
BACK to TOP
Page Header
Page Header
Prompt Number
Database System
Source of Data
Maximum Field
Length
Database File
Trim Trailing
Blanks
Data
Operator Prompt
Line
Decimal Places
Calculation
Table Name
Search Fields
Page Breaks
Page Header
Indicates where the page header will print. The selections are None, Top, or Side
Source of Data
Indicates the source of data for the page header.
Data
The data to be used for the page header when the source of data is fixed.
Operator Prompt Line
Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing. The prompt will be
displayed above the data entry area for the field.
Prompt Number
The numerical position that the page header will appear in relation to all other
operator prompted fields. Used only when the page header has a source of data
of when printed.
Maximum Field Length
The maximum number of characters allowed for the page header when the
source of data is when printed.
Decimal Places
The number of decimal places to be used in a page header when the source of
data is arithmetic.
41
Printed Documentation
Calculation
The calculation to be used for the page header when the source of data is
arithmetic.
Database System
Enter the name of the Database System to use for accessing a database file.
You can choose 'the software's (non-SQL) database' to connect to an internal
dBase database.
Database File
If the field is defined as being from 'the software's (non-SQL) database', then the
name of that database must be entered. A list of the currently available
databases will be displayed in the dialog box. If you have previously entered a
database name, you can use the same name by pressing TAB.
Table Name
Enter the name of the TABLE containing the data to be printed. This item allows
you to select the appropriate database file table.
Search Fields
The number of fields used to search for a specific record.
Trim Trailing Blanks
Used to suppress trailing blanks in an extracted database field.
Page Breaks
Includes page breaks in the page header.
BACK to TOP
RFID Tag Selection
Select Tag Type
Tag Width
Width
Vertical Position
Default RFID Tag
Position
Tag Height
Horizontal
Position
Select Tag Type
Select the RFID tag type embedded in your labels.
Tag Width
Enter the width of the embedded RFID tag in inches and hundredths of inches, or
in millimeters, if the ruler is set to millimeters.
42
Designing Formats
Tag Height
Enter the height of the embedded RFID tag in inches and hundredths of inches,
or in millimeters, if the ruler is set to millimeters.
Horizontal Position
Enter the horizontal position of the embedded RFID tag in inches and hundredths
of inches, or in millimeters, if the ruler is set to millimeters. The horizontal
position is the distance from the label's left edge to the RFID tag's left edge.
Vertical Position
Enter the vertical position of the embedded RFID tag in inches and hundredths of
inches, or in millimeters, if the ruler is set to millimeters. The vertical position is
the distance from the label's top edge to the RFID tag's top edge.
Default RFID Tag Position
Select 'No' to use the horizontal and vertical position that you entered. Select
'Yes' to use the printer's default position for the RFID Tag.
The Default RFID Tag Position option should only be used when the smart labels
being used are made to the specifications of the printer's manufacturer.
Creating Labels
Entering Specification Data
To define a bar code or text field, or to specify the format size, there are various
items that must be specified such as: size, type, source of data for the field, etc.
43
Printed Documentation
You have the option to display the specification screen in tabbed dialog boxes or
single sheets. The following describes the steps you will take to input this
information, assuming the specification screen is displayed on a single sheet.
The dialog box will show a list of prompts. There is one prompt for each data item
needed to define the field.
A highlighted bar appears on each item in turn. When the highlighted bar is
moved to a particular item, the value for that item should be entered.
The highlighted bar starts at the topmost item on the screen. After you have typed
the value for an item and then pressed TAB, the highlighted bar moves to the
next item. You may also click with the left mouse button on any item if you need
to change the value entered or use the SHIFT-TAB keys to move to any previous
item.
For each item, directions for entering the item appear in a text box at the bottom
of the dialog box. Some items require a number, with or without a fractional part.
Some require one letter or number to indicate your choice from a set of options.
Others require a group of letters or numbers.
If the value you entered is incorrect or if you have not entered information for a
mandatory field, you will hear a beep and see an error message displayed just
below the Directions Box. The message should help you in correcting the error.
The highlighted bar will remain on the incorrect field. You may correct the value
entered and then proceed or you may use the TAB key to proceed without
correcting the item.
You will see that some items have predefined or default values already displayed.
These are values from a previously defined field. If you want that value, you do
not have to retype it. Simply move on to the next item. If you press TAB, the value
will stay the same.
WHEN DATA ITEMS ARE COMPLETED
You have completed entering data when you finish the last item.
At this point, the highlighted bar disappears. All the data items are checked. If
any error is found, you will see a specific error message displayed just below the
Directions Box for the item in error. The Directions Box itself will display a
message asking you to re-enter the item.
To correct the error, enter a correct value for the item. In some cases, the
highlight bar will go to the item which is most likely the cause of the error. For
other errors, there will be several ways to correct it. When you have made the
necessary changes, click OK or press ENTER to signal that you have completed
correcting the data.
44
Designing Formats
If you choose not to correct the error, press ESC. The field will not be added to
the format or when entering format size data, the new format will not be added.
If you are satisfied that the values entered are what you want, click OK or press
ENTER to continue the placement of the bar code or text fields on the format
display.
If you want to make additional changes to any data item, press any key (besides
the ENTER key). The highlighted bar will reappear at the first item. You can now
move the bar to the proper item and change it. Click OK or press ENTER to
accept the changes. Choose Cancel to abandon changes. If you decide that you
do not want to add the new field or the new format, press ESC. The field will not
be added and you will return to the Edit screen or when entering format size data,
the new format will not be added.
BACK to Top
Label Setup
See Format Specifications for information on defining the properties of your
format.
Creating Formats
To convert formats created under older versions that used the file extension .lbf,
see Converting Formats.
To create a new format, click on the New icon
Format from the menu bar.
or select File | New | Label
Enter a filename for the format. Long filenames are supported therefore, they can
be up to 255 characters long. Click Add.
Next, enter all information into the parameters screen. See Label Setup.
At this point, you are presented with a blank area on the screen called the format
display area. You are now ready to begin adding fields. A field is one of the
pieces that make up the format. A field can be any one of the following: text in
many sizes, bar codes in a variety of symbologies with or without human
readable interpretation, lines, boxes, circles and custom pictures or logos.
45
Printed Documentation
Each field is defined one at a time and positioned on the format display screen.
Each field can be moved, erased, changed or copied at any time while building
your format.
One of the powerful features of the software is the ability to define variable (when
printed) or operator-entry fields. This means that the field's data is typed in at the
time that the format is printed. The operator is given the ability to compose a
short prompt to be used when the data is requested prior to printing. You may
also extract a field's data from a database containing stored information. In this
case, the database will be searched for the desired record. All fields that use this
information will be filled with the proper data.
When the format has been completed, the format should be saved. The Save
function stores the format.
When invoked, the software also has the ability to store a record of each set of
formats printed along with the date and time it was printed and any data on the
format. This data is stored in a report (.RPT) file.
BACK to TOP
Changing an Existing Format
To change an existing format, click the Open icon
from the toolbar or
choose File | Open from the menu bar. A submenu will appear allowing you to
choose which type of file you would like to open; label format (*.fmt), database
(*.dbf), report (*.rpt) or a serial file (*.ser). Choose label format (*.fmt) to open an
existing format.
You are prompted for the name of an existing format. The last format used is the
default name displayed. At the same time, an alphabetized listing of the present
format files in your directory will be displayed across the screen in the Open
Dialog box. To display information regarding a file, highlight the filename and a
description, along with a thumbnail preview of the format will be shown at the
bottom of the Open box.
NOTE: If you are updating from an older version, see converting formats.
Formats created under an older version will not have thumbnail previews until
they are saved under the new version.
Moving on the Format
To move the pointer you can click on the field, holding down the left mouse button
and drag the field to the desired position, or you can use the arrow keys or the
HOME and END keys. Each arrow key moves the pointer in the direction
indicated by the arrow printed on the key. Each keystroke represents a
46
Designing Formats
movement of .01 inches or .1mm. To make larger movements, hold the SHIFT
key down while using the arrow keys. This will cause each keystroke to move the
pointer .10 inches or 1.0mm.
The HOME key will move the pointer to the upper left corner of the format display
area and the END key will move to the lower right corner.
The coordinates of the pointer are shown on the lower right side of the format
display screen. The horizontal or X coordinate shows the distance from the left
edge of the format print area. The vertical or Y coordinate shows the distance
from the top edge of the format print area.
Maximum Fields on a Format
The maximum number of fields per format is usually more than 100, or the
number of characters allowed in your printer's buffer, whichever comes first. This
number will vary depending on the printer of choice, the number of printers
attached and the amount of memory available in your PC.
The Silver level of software has a limit of 25 fields on a format, regardless of the
printer's buffer or PC memory.
Erasing a Format
To erase a format, select File | Erase. Locate the file that you wish to erase,
highlight it and click Erase. A warning will be displayed asking whether or not you
want to erase the file. Select the appropriate choice.
NOTE: Files that are erased through the software by using the above procedure
DO NOT get sent to the Windows Recycle Bin. If you select to erase them, they
are permanently erased!
Viewing/Changing Format Size
To view or change the format size specifications, click the Format Specification
icon
or choose View | Change Format Specifications from the menu bar. You
may also right mouse click on any part of the format background and choose
Change Format Specification from the shortcut menu.
This selection allows you to review the specifications for a format. The format
size specification data will be available on the tab labeled Page Layout.
47
Printed Documentation
When you have made the desired changes and have chosen to make the
changes effective, by selecting the OK button, the screen will return to the format
display.
When the format is redisplayed, if the display area has been decreased, any
fields that do not fit due to the size change, are erased.
Rotating a Label
To rotate a label and its fields, select Tools | Rotate from the menu bar or right
mouse click anywhere on the format background and choose Rotate from the
menu.
The label and its fields will rotate in 90 degree increments. However, if the printer
that the label format was created for has a maximum width and it is exceeded by
rotating the label 90 degrees, it will be rotated 180 degrees.
Adding a New field
To add a new field to the format, click on the field icon located on the toolbar or
choose Insert from the menu bar.
There are 9 types of fields you may choose to add: Wizard (EAN/UCC128), Bar
Code, Multi-Source Bar Code, Text or Paragraph, Multi-Source Text, Line, Box,
Circle or Ellipse, or Picture.
Field names will automatically be generated for Text, Bar Code and Picture fields.
For example, TEXT1, BAR1, and PICT1. Field names can be customized by
simply typing over the default name. This feature can be disabled in the Format
Specifications menu by choosing 'No' for Auto Field Name.
Placing a Field on the Format
When you have completed the definition of a bar code or text field, the Edit format
display screen will return, showing your print area. On the display screen is a box
representing the area that will be taken up by the field. To position the field, you
can drag on the box with the mouse, use the arrow keys or the keys marked
HOME and END.
Each arrow key moves the box in the direction indicated by the arrow printed on
the key. Each keystroke represents a movement of .01 inches or .1mm. To make
larger movements, hold the SHIFT key down while using the arrow keys. This will
cause each keystroke to move the box in steps of .10 inches or 1.0mm.
The HOME key will move the box to the upper left corner of the format display
area and the END key will move the box to the lower right corner.
48
Designing Formats
You may move the box to the center of the format by pressing C. By pressing H,
the field will be centered horizontally. By pressing V, the field will be centered
vertically.
The coordinates of the upper left corner of the box are shown on the lower right
side of the format display. The horizontal or H coordinate shows the distance in
inches from the left edge of the format print area. The vertical or V coordinate
shows the distance in inches from the top edge of the format print area.
When you have placed the box at the desired location release the mouse button
or press ENTER. The field will be drawn on the format display. The process of
adding the bar code or text field is now complete. If you later decide to place the
field in a new location, you may do so by using the Move option, or by clicking on
and dragging the field.
Grid
Extended Cross Hairs
Hairs
NOTE: If a text field font selected is too small to be shown on screen, only a
series of unreadable characters will be depicted. This field information can be
viewed by using the Zoom In option.
BACK to TOP
Selecting a Field on the Format Display
Several commands operate on a particular field. Some of these commands are:
Move, View/Change, Erase and Copy a field. To specify which field, the software
prompts you to select the field by moving the pointer on the format display until
the pointer touches the field that you want. When any field is touched, that field
will begin to blink. This confirms which field the pointer is touching.
Therefore, when you are prompted to move the pointer to a field for any function,
move the pointer until the field you want is blinking. Click the right mouse button
or press ENTER.
You may also hold the left mouse button down while dragging a lasso around the
desired fields to highlight them.
To quickly select all fields on the format, choose Edit | Choose All Fields from the
menu bar. You can individually select and deselect fields by holding the CTRL
key on your keyboard and clicking the left mouse button.
49
Edit
Viewing/Changing a Field
To view or change a fields properties, double click the field of interest, select the
field from the Field List tree structure, or you may right mouse click on any field
and select View Field Specifications to view and change its specifications.
This selection allows you to review the properties for a field. You may then make
changes or simply view the properties without making changes. For box and line
fields this will be equivalent to the Move Field option. For pictures, the field may
be resized as well as repositioned.
The screen will now change to show the selected field's Property dialog box.
They will be displayed in the same format as when the field was defined.
When you have made the desired changes and have chosen to make the
changes effective, by selecting the OK button, the screen will return to the format
display and you may re-position the field or leave it in the same position. The
updated field will be re-displayed with its new attributes.
Change Common Properties on Multiple Fields
Field by selecting two or more fields,
you may change all properties that are common to them. Once the fields are
selected, open the properties dialog box using one of the previously mentioned
techniques. Only the properties that are common to all of the chosen fields will be
shown. Once you change any of these properties, the changes will apply to all of
the selected fields.
BACK
BACK to TOP
Undo
This function reverses your last action. To Undo the last editing change, click the
Undo Icon
or choose Edit | Undo from the menu bar or press CTRL-Z.
Cut
Removes the selected object from the active format and places it on the
Clipboard.
Copy
Places an exact copy of the selected object to the Clipboard.
Paste
51
Printed Documentation
Inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point, and replaces any
selection. This command is available only if you have cut or copied an object.
Resizing Fields
Fields can be resized by clicking once on the field and using the mouse to drag it
to the desired size.
•Use the handles on the top and bottom of the field to stretch it vertically.
•Use the handles on the left and right sides to stretch it horizontally.
•The corner handles will simultaneously resize the field vertically and
horizontally to create a proportionally sized field.
NOTE: When a barcode field is stretched vertically, the height of the barcode will
increase. When a barcode field is stretched horizontally, the barcode multiplier
will increase. When a text field contains a True Type font and "0" is entered for
the width, the field will automatically stretch vertically and horizontally regardless
of which handle is used to resize the field.
Lock Field
A locked field cannot be moved or resized and the Field Properties of a locked
field cannot be changed. This is useful when designing labels to avoid accidental
changes to a fields position or size.
Select the field you wish to lock and then click Lock Field icon from the standard
toolbar or choose Edit | Lock Field from the menu bar.
A field can also be locked and unlocked by Right-Clicking on the field and
selecting "Lock Field" from the pop-up menu.
Choosing a Group of Fields
To select more than one field on the format:
Click the left mouse button and drag the mouse around the fields that you wish to
choose.
You may also choose multiple fields one at a time by holding down the CTRL key
and clicking on the fields that you wish to select. Or selecting the Choose group
of fields icon
and dragging over all of the fields that you wish to select. In
order to better identify the selected fields, the selected fields will change color to
blue, by default.
52
Edit
This option allows you to choose more than one field so that you may move a
group of fields, erase a group of fields or copy a group of fields. You may also
Align a Group of fields by choosing the group and then selecting Tools | Align
from the menu bar.
Choose All Fields
To select all fields on a format, select Edit | Choose All Fields from the menu or
right mouse click anywhere on the format background and select Choose All
Fields.
Erasing a Field
To erase a field, Select the field you wish to erase and click the Erase Field icon
from the main toolbar or choose Edit | Erase Field from the menu. You will
be prompted with a message asking you to confirm that you wish to erase the
field.
Copying a Field
To add a copied field, select the field to be copied then click the copy icon
on
the main toolbar. Next, click the paste icon
on the main tool bar. The copied
field will appear on the format. You may also select the field to be copied, choose
Edit | Copy from the menu bar, then choose Edit | Paste from the menu bar. The
copied field will appear on the format.
This selection allows you to make a duplicate of an existing field or fields and
place the field or fields anywhere on the format.
To select more than one field, see Selecting Multiple Fields.
Moving a Field
To move a field to a new location on the format, left-click once to highlight it, then
select the move field icon
from the toolbar. The selected field will now be
outlined in a grey box. You can now drag the field to its desired position using the
mouse. You may also use the arrow keys or use the HOME and END keys to
reposition the field. When the box is in the desired location, release the mouse
button or press ENTER. The field will be displayed in the new location.
While you are moving the field, pressing the H key will center it horizontally,
pressing the V key will center it vertically and pressing the C key will place the
field in the center of the format.
53
Printed Documentation
You can also select Edit | Move Field from the menu bar to move a field or group
of fields.
54
View
Print Queue
To View or Change the Print Queue, click the Print Queue icon
| Print Queue from the menu bar or press F2.
, choose View
The Print Queue is a job staging area for your various printing jobs. The Print Job
files reside on the hard disk. The software manages these files and loads a new
job after each job is completed until it has exhausted the Print Queue. This will
allow you to load an entire day's work at the start of a shift.
The Print Queue can hold up to 220 jobs.
Log Reader
Starting the Log Reader
Printing a User Log
Starting the Log Reader
Opening./Viewing a User Log
About
To Start the Log Reader click the 'Start
Start the User Log Reader'
on the
Reader icon
function toolbar. You will be presented with a log on dialog box. Enter your User
Name and Password and then click 'OK
OK'
OK to start the Log Reader.
Note: Only users that have Manager Functions will be permitted to run the Log
Reader.
Opening/Viewing a User Log
Open a User Log by clicking the 'Open
Open'
or select File | Open from the
Open icon
menu bar and then browse to the desired User Log file. You can also choose
from a list of recently viewed User Logs from the File menu.
Once opened, you will be able to see a list of all of the events with the time, date,
and user or manager involved. Clicking on any of these events will display the
details of the event below the list.
Printing a User Log
To print click the currently opened User Log click the 'Print
Print'
or select
Print Icon
File | Print from the menu bar. You may print the User Log to your ink-jet, laser or
dot matrix printer. Select File | Print Preview from the menu bar for a preview of
the User Log. By Selecting File | Print Setup from the menu bar you will be able
to set up the printer you wish the User Log to Print to.
About
Click the 'About
About'
or select Help | About Log Reader from the menu bar to
About Icon
find the version of Log Reader.
55
Printed Documentation
BACK to TOP
Position Grid
Position Grid allows you to set the grid cell size for the exact placement of fields
on a format.
Snap to Grid
Choosing snap to grid will "snap" the selected field to an anchor point on the label
format. Using snap to grid allows fields to be placed and aligned more precisely
on the label. Display Grid must be activated prior to using Snap to Grid.
Display Grid
Choosing display grid will populate the format with a series of evenly spaced
points that make the precise placement of objects much easier. To ensure better
precision when placing fields on the label, use the Snap to Grid feature.
To enable the Display Grid option select View | Display Grid from the menu bar or
click the Display Grid icon
.
Tool Bars
Standard Tool Bar
The Standard Tool Bar provides the following functions:
• Create a New label format, database, or serial File
• Open an existing label format, database, serial file, or report.
• Save opened file
• Print a batch of formats
• View or change Print Queue
• Test Print the opened format or tracking report
• View or Change Windows Printer Properties
56
View
• Cut
• Copy
• Paste
• Choose group of fields
• Erase Field
• Lock Field
• Move Field
• View and Change Field Specification
• Undo
• Change Format Specification
• Close Program or Cancel Current Function
To display the Standard Tool Bar Select View | Toolbars
Toolba from the menu bar. If a
check mark appears next to its name it is already displayed.
Drawing
The drawing toolbar provides the following functions:
• Create Barcode using Wizard
• Add Barcode Field
• Add Multi-Source Barcode Field
• Add Text Field
• Add Multi-Source Text Field
• Add Line Field
• Add Box Field
• Add Picture Field
• Add Circle or Ellipse Field
• Write to an RFID Tag (EPC or non-EPC)
• Change Mouse Pointer to Magnifying lens
• Restore Mouse Pointer
• Zoom Level
To display the Drawing Tool Bar Select View | Toolbars from the menu bar. If a
check mark appears next to its name it is already displayed.
Function
The Function Toolbar provides the following functions:
• Program Options
• Printer Configuration
• Users
57
Printed Documentation
• Report File
• Start the User Log Viewer
• Database
• Start Databaseview
• Serial File
• Job List File (*.jlf)
To display the Function Tool Bar Select View | Toolbars from the menu bar. If a
check mark appears next to its name it is already displayed.
Tools
The Tools Toolbar provides the following functions:
• Display Grid
• Snap to Grid
• Cross Hairs
• Rotate label format 90 degrees clockwise
• Align Left
• Align Right
• Align Up
• Align Down
• Center Horizontally
• Space Horizontally
• Space Vertically
• Center Vertically
• Open Windows Character Map
To display the Tools Tool Bar Select View | Toolbars from the menu bar. If a
check mark appears next to its name it is already displayed.
Navigator
The Format Navigator shows a thumbnail preview of the entire format. The box
indicates the area of the format that is being viewed. By selecting an area within
the Format Navigator you are able to move to a specific area of a format that may
not be visible on the format display.
58
View
Field List
Displays a list of fields organized in specific categories such Field Type, Source
of Data, and Fonts. This allows you to quickly and easily view the field types and
sources of data being used on a label format.
A specific field can be selected by single clicking on that field's name in the Field
List and its properties sheet can be displayed by double clicking the field name.
Zoom
Zoom Out
Select the magnifying glass icon
from the tool bar. The pointer will change to
a magnifying glass and will Zoom Out by clicking the Right mouse button. To exit
zoom mode, click the pointer icon in the toolbar. The Zoom Out function can also
be selected by choosing View | Zoom Out from the menu bar.
The zoom function will allow you to magnify or minimize a section of the format,
or on smaller labels, the entire format.
Zoom In
Select the magnifying glass icon
from the tool bar. The pointer will change to
a magnifying glass and will Zoom In by clicking the Left mouse button. To exit
zoom mode, click the pointer icon in the toolbar. The Zoom In function can also
be selected by choosing View | Zoom In from the menu bar.
The zoom function will allow you to magnify or minimize a section of the format,
or on smaller labels, the entire format.
Zoom Level
You can choose a specific desired Zoom Level to maximize or minimize a section
or entire format. Choosing a lower percentage causes the format to "Zoom Out"
or minimize. Choosing a higher percentage causes the format to "Zoom In" or
maximize.
The Zoom Level can be changed by selecting View | Zoom Level from the menu
bar, right mouse clicking anywhere on the format background and selecting the
desired zoom level from the menu, or selecting the desired Zoom Level from the
Zoom Level text box on the tool bar.
The zoom level will also be saved within the format.
59
Printed Documentation
60
Insert
Bar Code Field
Adding a Bar Code Field
Adding a Bar Code
Field
Horizontal Position
Vertical
Position
Field Name
Comment
Symbology
Subset
Control and Function
Characters
UPS GroundTrac
Check Digit
Height
Multiplier
Row Size
Error Security Level
Truncate Symbol
Interpretation
Bar Code Height
Symbol Type
Symmetry
Layers
Aztec Error
Correction Level
Added Characters
Bar Code Ratio
Bar Width
Multiplier
Field Direction
Source of Data
Center Data
Report Data
Increment/Decrement
Field
Type of
Increment/Decrement
Increment/Decrement
Sequence
Change
Amount
AddAdd-On Characters
Leading Characters
Print Criterion
Bar Code Width
Magnification
Increment/Decrement
Increment/Decrement
Maximum
Increment/Decrement
Minimum
Trailing
Characters
Random
Weight
Check Digit
Maximum
Field Length
Update Database
Enable Printing
Typical Field Length
Adding a Bar Code Field
To add a new bar code field, click on the Add Barcode Field icon
located on
the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert | Bar Code Field from the menu bar.
You will now be presented with the Create Bar Code screen. Click on entering
specification data for details.
61
Printed Documentation
Once you have entered all items correctly, the format display screen will again be
shown with the box representing the area for the bar code. You should now
position the bar code field.
The available bar code symbologies are listed. Bar code symbology selections
vary by printer.
Horizontal Position
Enter the horizontal position of the field.
Vertical Position
Enter the vertical position of the field.
Field Name
A name to associate with the field. Can be up to 32 characters long. The name is
necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report,
copying data from this field into another field, using this field's data in a Linked
Field or filling this field using the Command File facility.
Comment
Enter a comment for this field.
Symbology
The available bar code symbologies are specific to the printer being used.
NOTE on Composite Bar Codes: Use a pipe symbol '|' to separate the linear data
from the 2D data when creating Composite Bar Codes in the Software
Subset
When using a Code 128 bar code you will be able to choose which Subset to use
for the symbol. Selecting Automatic will let the software choose a Subset to
create the shortest symbol. When it is required, you may also select a specific
Subset to force the symbol to stay in that Subset (Subset A, Subset B, or Subset
C)
Control and Function Characters
The software allows you to embed control codes or function codes into a bar
code when permitted by the symbology. For example Code 128 or PDF417.
62
Insert
A pop-up menu enables easy selection of the correct code. To insert control
codes click on the 'Control Characters' button and select the desired code from
the pop-up list. Control codes are displayed in the user interface as the control
code name surrounded by angle brackets "<>". For example, inserting a carriagereturn in a field is displayed as <CR>.
You may also use the following character sequences to specify control codes:
\xHH
Where:
\x specifies the beginning of a hexadecimal string;
HH represents a 2 digit hexadecimal value.
For example, if a Code 128 or PDF417 bar code requires character data with an
embedded carriage return, type \x0D at the end of your data. The 0D at the end
of the character string is the hexadecimal value for a carriage return. See the
table of hexadecimal values.
For those users that require embedded function characters, the software allows
you to embed the function characters as follows:
\&FN1
Function 1
\&FN2
Function 2
\&FN3
Function 3
\&FN4
Function 4
UPS GroundTrac
When creating a UPS GroundTrac symbology, you can choose to print the bar
code with or without the Human Readable interpretation. If selected, the
interpretation will automatically be formatted to the correct specification based on
the printer chosen. When printing to the Apollo, the human readable
interpretation will need to be created as a special formatted text field to comply
with the UPS Bar Code Specifications. For additional information, please refer to
UPS Bar Code specifications.
Check Digit
Select an optional check digit for the chosen symbology. This option appears for
certain symbologies only.
63
Printed Documentation
Height Multiplier
Calculates the height of the symbology. Available for certain symbologies only.
Row Size
Enter the number of data code words in each row. Each code word represents
about 2 characters.
Error Security Level
Enter a number for the level of security desired. Zero (0) provide error detection
only. Higher numbers increase the symbol size and error correction capability.
Truncate Symbol
Select Yes to omit the right hand row indicators and stop pattern. Select No to
print the full symbol.
Interpretation
The interpretation refers to the human readable characters printed either below a
horizontal bar code or to the side of a vertical bar code. One of several Human
Readable Interpretations is available to you depending on your choice of
symbology and field direction. Typically, human readable interpretation is not
available for 2D codes.
NOTE: Whenever symbology or field direction is changed, this item must be
changed or it will return to its default value.
Bar Code Height
The height of the bars that make up the bar code. This can have a value from .1
inches to 3.9 inches or .1mm to 100mm.
Symbol Type
When creating an Aztec code you may choose one of the following Symbol
Types.
1. Automatic - Specify the Error Correction Level and the software will
choose the appropriate Symbol Type.
2. Compact - Specify the number of Layers used to contain the data. This is
restricted to the range 1 – 4. Error correction data is used to fill otherwise
unused space in the specified number of layers.
64
Insert
3. FullFull-range Symbol - Specify the number of Layers used to contain the data.
The range is 1 – 32. Error correction data is used to fill otherwise unused
space in the specified number of layers.
4. Rune - Is a special Aztec symbol which consist of a single layer and have
no security options. Runes are just the Core Symbol of a compact Aztec
Code with a numerically distinct Mode Message which conveys 8-bits of
data.
Symmetry
The layers of data for an Aztec Mesa may either be attached all on top of its host
barcode ( one sided) or divided between the top and bottom (two sided). The twosided configuration is preferred for larger messages because it locates the linear
"finder" in the middle of the symbol.
Layers
Aztec and Aztec/Mesa barcodes encode data in a series of "layers". Each
additional layer completely surrounds the previous layer thus causing the symbol
to grow in size as more data is encoded.
Layers is a selectable option with Aztec when "Compact" or "Full-range Symbol"
is chosen for Symbol Type..
Layers is a selectable option with Aztec/Mesa when "Full-range Symbol" is
chosen for Symbol Type..
Aztec Error Correction Level
Aztec and Aztec/Mesa allow the user to select the Error Correction Level when
'Automatic' is chosen for Symbol Type. You can select a value from 05-95 for the
percentage of the data region to be used for error correction or you can select 0
for the recommended default error correction level of 23% of symbol capacity
plus 3 codewords.
Added Characters
Following is a list of the additional options available when choosing Code 128 B
or Code 128 C:
•
•
•
•
•
•
No Additional Characters
Function 1 + Mod 43 Check Digit
Function 1 + Mod 10 Check Digit
Function 1 Only
Mod 43 Only
Mod 10 Only
65
Printed Documentation
Bar Code Ratio
This is the ratio of the wide to narrow elements of a bar code.
Bar Width Multiplier
The number of dots used to define the narrow element of a bar code. This allows
you to establish the density of your bar code.
Field Direction
The bar code can be printed in one of 4 directions:
•
•
•
•
Left to right across the format
From bottom to top of format
Right to left (upside down) across the format
From top to bottom of format
Source of Data
The data for the field can be one of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
FIXED
WHEN PRINTED
COPIED
SERIALIZED
LINK
DATABASE
Center Data
This option will cause the bar code to be centered within the defined print area.
That is, if the contents of the field contain fewer characters than the maximum,
the bar code will be moved so it is centered within the field's area.
Report Data
To record the value of this field whenever the format is printed, select Yes.
Otherwise, select No.
This is used to activate the legacy reporting option (*.rpt file). This option is not
needed when using the Print History Console.
Increment/Decrement Field
66
Insert
The following options are available:
•
•
•
Increment
Decrement
Constant
If the field is copied, the increment or decrement specified for the copy field will
apply to the copied field. If the field contains more than 10 numbers, the
increment or decrement will apply only to the last 10 numbers. If the field is linked,
the increment or decrement specified for the source field will apply to the link field.
Type of Increment/Decrement
The choices for the Type of Increment/decrement are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Numeric
Alphabetic
Alphanumeric
Hexadecimal
Octal
Custom
NOTE: Increment or decrement starts from the right side of the field value and
increments or decrements toward the left.
Increment/Decrement Sequence
The custom incrementation option allows you to define a specific sequence of
characters to increment or decrement. Valid characters are the digits 0-9 and the
letters A-Z.
See Examples
NOTE: Incrementing or Decrementing starts from the right side of the field value
and increments or decrements toward the left.
Change Amount
The numerical amount by which to increment or decrement the field.
Update Database
Select Yes to have the database updated after each job. This will reflect the last
value of the incremented/decremented field. Select No to leave the database field
unchanged.
Maximum Field Length
67
Printed Documentation
Enter the maximum number of characters to extract from the database field. A
value of 0 indicates that all of the characters should be used.
Typical Field length
Enter the typical number of characters that are extracted from the database field.
This will allow fields to be displayed during label creation using this length. Note
that if more characters exist than that specified for the typical length, all
characters up to the maximum amount specified will be used. A value of 0
indicates that there is no typical field length.
Increment/Decrement Maximum
Maximum
Enter the maximum value the field can reach before rolling over to the minimum
value. NOTE: This option requires the computer to do the field incrementation
and not the printer. The computer will send the labels one at a time to the printer.
Increment/Decrement
Increment/Decrement Minimum
Enter the value the field should be reset to after reaching the maximum
value. NOTE: This option requires the computer to do the field incrementation
and not the printer. The computer will send the labels one at a time to the printer.
AddAdd-on Characters
You may specify a character string of up to 10 characters to always be appended
to the front and/or end of the bar code. These characters will always be encoded
in the bar code. The following options are available:
•
•
•
•
None
Header
Trailer
BOTH Header and Trailer
Leading Characters
If you choose to attach header characters to the bar code, enter the constant
string of characters for the header.
Trailing Characters
If you choose to attach trailer characters to the bar code, enter the constant string
of characters for the trailer.
Enable Printing
68
Insert
This selection will allow you to define a field from any of the available sources of
data and not have that field printed on the format.
For example: If you want your customer's part number to be printed on the format,
but you do not want your part number printed on the format but you do want it
included in the report that is generated. You will need to generate a field defining
your part number, disable the printing of the field and enable the report data
function.
You could also use this function to put a message on the screen for your operator.
Such as, the color or size stock that this format should be printed on.
Enter Y to print the field on the format. Enter N to display the field on the format,
but do not print the field. Enter C to specify a print criterion for the field.
See Appearance to learn how to change the color of non-printing fields.
Print Criterion
Enter the condition for which this field should be printed. The condition entered is
an expression that can contain currently defined field names, numeric or
alphabetic constants, mathematic operators, comparison operators or logical
operators. Numeric or alphabetic constants need to be enclosed in double quotes
( " ).
For example, you can create a text field that has a fixed value of 'SALE'. You
only want this field to print when the 'PRICE' field is less than 6.99. You can
select Conditional Print for the field named 'SALE' and type the following
expression in for Print Criterion: PRICE < 6.99. Where: PRICE is the field name
you want to compare. < is the comparison operator LESS THAN and 6.99 is the
value to match. The 'SALE' field will now only print when the value of the PRICE
field is less than 6.99.
Another example would be a text field with a fixed value of "Frozen". You only
want this field to print when another field called 'CONDITION' is equal to
"True". Type CONDITION = "True" in for Print Criterion. Any time the
CONDITION field is equal to "True" the "Frozen" field will print. If CONDITION is
empty or equal to something other than "True" then "Frozen" will NOT print.
The LIKE comparison operator allows you to perform pattern matching. You can
substitute a percent ( % ) or an underscore ( _ ) character for a whole word, a
group of characters or a single character. A percent sign ( % ) represents a whole
word or any GROUP of characters in the data. The underscore ( _ ) represents
any SINGLE character in the data.
See Examples
69
Printed Documentation
Bar Code Width Magnification
Allows you to enter a value in the range of 1-99 to magnify the narrow and wide
bar sizes. This option is only available for Datamax I-Class and W-Class printers.
Random Weight Check Digit
Select Yes to enable the random weight check digit. Please note that when
selecting Yes, your screen image will not match your printed output. This option
applies to UPC/EAN and is available for the Apollo/A Series printers only.
BACK to TOP
Create a Bar Code Using the Wizard
To add a new GS1GS1-128 (EAN/UCC 128) bar code field using the Wizard, select
'GS1
GS1GS1-128 (EAN/UCC 128) Wizard' from the Create Barcode Using Wizard
icon's
drop down list on the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert | Bar Code
Wizard -->
--> GS1GS1-128 (EAN/UCC 128) from the menu bar.
To add a new GS1 DataMatrix bar code field using the Wizard, select 'GS1
GS1
DataMatrix Wizard'
drop
Wizard from the Create Barcode Using Wizard icon's
down list on the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert | Bar Code Wizard -->
--> GS1
DataMatrix from the menu bar.
The Wizard will prompt you for the required information and then builds the bar
code automatically!
1. Begin by clicking the 'Add' button to add an Application Identifier (AI).
2. Select the Application Identifier from the list provided. Click 'Next'. If the
Application Identifier requires a check digit, you will be asked if the check
digit should be computed or if it is part of the data. Click 'Next'
3. Provide a source of data for that AI. Click 'Next'
4. If your application only requires one Application Identifier *, click
'Finish'. You can review the other field specification or click 'OK' and you
are done!
*If you require multiple Application Identifiers, simply click 'Next' to work through
the steps 1-3 again until you have added all of the required Application
Identifiers.
To add a new GS1 Databar bar code field using the Wizard, select 'GS1
GS1 Databar
Wizard'
drop down list on the
Wizard from the Create Barcode Using Wizard icon's
Drawing toolbar or choose Insert | Bar Code Wizard -->
--> GS1 Databar from the
menu bar.
70
Insert
The Wizard will prompt you for the required information and then builds the bar
code automatically!
1. Begin by choosing which type of GS1 Databar you want to create. Click
'Next'.
2. Provide a source of data for the GS1 Databar. Click 'Next'.
3. If your selected GS1 Databar type allows for a Composite Component you
will be asked if you wish to add one. Select Yes or No and click 'Next'. If
you opted for a Composite Component you will be prompted to provide a
source of data for it.
4. This completes the Wizard. Click Finish to exit and place the field on the
label.
Adding a Multi-Source Bar Code Field
Adding a MultiMultiSource Bar Code
Field
Field Properties
Button
OK Button
Cancel Button
Field Data
Segments
Literal
Strings/Existing
Fields
Existing Data
Segments
Adding a MultiMulti-Source Bar Code Field
To add a new Multi-Source Bar Code Field, click on the Add MultiMulti-Source Bar
Code Field icon
located on the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert | MultiMultiSource Bar Code Field from the menu bar.
Field Properties Button
Clicking the 'Field Properties' button will allow you to modify the properties of the
final bar code (excluding source of data). Please see Adding a Bar Code Field
for details.
NOTE: You must have at least one segment defined in the field before you are
able to change any of the field properties.
OK Button
Clicking the 'OK
OK'
OK Button will create the Multi-Source Bar Code Field.
Cancel Button
Clicking the 'Cancel
Cancel'
Cancel button will cancel the creation of the Multi-Source Bar Code
Field.
71
Printed Documentation
Field Data Segments
This list shows all of the data segments that will be part of the completed Bar
Code Field. The data segments will be listed in the order that they will appear in
the bar code. You can change this order by selecting a segment and clicking
either the 'Move
Move Up'
Move Down'
Up or 'Move
Down buttons. You can remove any of the
segments by highlighting it and clicking the
Remove'
Remove button.
Literal Strings/Existing Fields
From this list you may add the data from any of the predefined text or bar code
fields on the format as a data segment for this field. You can also add a literal
string enclosed in double quotes (" "). For example "sample string".
Include'
Include button
To add the string or field value to the bar code click the
Existing Data Segments
This list shows all predefined Data Segments that are currently on the format that
you may use as part of the bar code.
If there are no Data Segments listed, you can create one by clicking the 'Add
Add'
Add
button. You may edit a Data Segment already on the format by clicking the 'Edit
Edit'
Edit
button. You may also delete one from the format by clicking the 'Delete
Delete'
Delete button.
BACK to TOP
Source Data
Fixed
Fixed Data
Edit
Control Characters
Fixed Data
Enter the exact data that you wish to be printed in the field.
Edit
Click Edit to display a text editor.
Control Characters
Choose from a list of predefined characters to be included in the data of defined
fields.
When Printed
What is a When Printed field?
72
Insert
The field data is variable. When you print the format, you will be prompted to fill in
the value of the field. It can be changed for each set of formats that are printed.
For a text field, your input may come from the keyboard, a serial port, a
Command File or a wedge type bar code scanner. For a paragraph field, you will
type in the paragraph at the time of printing. With the exception of TAB key usage,
the paragraph will be printed exactly as typed. To force a new line break, press
CTRL-ENTER simultaneously; otherwise, the text will automatically be arranged
into lines when printed (word wrap). The following prompts will apply:
Operator Prompt
Line
Maximum Field
Length
Prompt Repeats
Prompt Number
Allow Blanks
Selection List
Data Checking
Operator Prompt Line
Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing. The prompt will be
displayed above the data entry area for the field.
Prompt Repeats
Select to enable the printer to prompt for this field on every label. This only
applies when downloading to a memory card in the printer, and when the printer
prompts for the label quantity.
Prompt Number
The order in which you wish the prompt to appear on the operator input screen.
This option will appear if there is more than 1 prompted field defined for the
format.
Data Checking
An indication of the type of validation to be done on operator entry for a 'When
Printed' field. The types of Data Checking include:
•No Validation
•Numeric
•Alphabetic
•Alphanumeric
•Upper Case Characters
•Upper Case Alphabetic
•Upper Case Alphanumeric
•Fixed List of Values
Maximum Field Length
73
Printed Documentation
If you define the field as 'When Printed', you must supply the maximum length of
the field in character positions.
Allow Blanks
An indication of the allowable INCOMPLETE operator input for a 'When Printed'
field. The choices are as follows:
•Fully or Partially Blank
•Partially Blank
•Fully Blank
•No Blanks Allowed
Selection List
Enter a list of values which the operator can choose from. The values that you
type in will appear as choices on the Print screen. Each value must be separated
by a space. Short phrases must be enclosed in double quotes. To advance to a
new line, press CTRL+ENTER. For example, choices are RED GREEN BLUE.
To display this selection list, click on the down arrow next to the field input box on
the data input screen within the Print screen.
BACK to TOP
Copied
The data is copied from another field called the copy field. The data in this field
will be the same as the data in the copy field.
Name of Copy Field
If the field is defined as 'Copied', you must select the name of the copy field which
will supply the data for this field. To copy a bar code check digit, choose the bar
code field name with the '@' symbol before it. Available field names are listed in
the dialog box.
@TRUECOUNT
@TRUECOUNT allows you to print the number of batches printed of a label on
that label.. To use @TRUECOUNT, create a Linked or Copied field and select
@TRUECOUNT. The value of @TRUECOUNT is taken from the number of
batches entered by the user on the print request screen.
NOTE: If you later lengthen the copy field, the copied field's length will also
change. If you later erase the copy field, the copied field's data will be changed to
a single 0 bar code.
Serialized
74
Insert
The data is read from a Serial File. If the data is changed by incrementing or
decrementing the field, then the next available serial number will be rewritten to
the Serial File.
Serial File Name
The path/name of the Serial File that contains the serial number.
Link
What is a Linked Field?
Link data from 2-12 fields. This function will allow you to tie together data from
different fields on a format to be printed together in one large field.
Example: You wish to tie together a part number and a serial number into one
field called 'IDENTNO'. To accomplish this you would use Link.
Number of Link Fields
The number of fields that will be combined to form this field. You can choose a
number between 2 and 12.
Link Field n
The source of the data for each linked field you have defined. Choices of existing
fields or special identifiers appear in the dialog box. You may also enter a value
enclosed in double quotes. To link a bar code Function 1, Function 2, Function 3,
or Function 4 character, select the appropriate function character from the list.
NOTE: If the field is a 'When Printed', 'Link' or 'Database' field, the bar code's
interpretation will be displayed as a string of zeroes on the format display.
BACK to TOP
Database
The information or "data" that will be used to fill this field on the format will come
from a database file. You will be asked to specify the database file name and the
name of the field containing the data or information to be used. A maximum of
three different databases may be accessed in one format. For each database
accessed, the name of the "search field" and an operator prompt will be required.
You will only be required to supply a "search field" name and an operator prompt
once for each new database used.
Before printing the format, the operator will be prompted for the value of the
search field to be found. The software will search the database until a matching
record is found. The matching record will then be used to supply data to all fields
which specify the same database.
75
Printed Documentation
For a paragraph field, a database MEMO field can be used on the label by
supplying the name of the MEMO field at the 'Data Field Name' prompt.
When the format is printed the operator will be prompted for the value of the
search field to be found. The software will search the database until a matching
record is found. The matching record will be used to supply data to all fields that
specify the same database.
There is a method by which you can print out all of the records within a given
database. Refer to the $ALL Function and Tutorial in Appendix C for further
information.
Database System
Search Fields
Trim Trailing
Blanks
Database File
Search Field
Name
Maximum Field
Length
Design/Test
Design/Test
Value
Connection
String
Operator Prompt
Line
Typical Field
Length
Data Field Name
Variable Table
Variable Table
Prompt
Table Name
Prompt Number
Database System
Enter the name of the Database System to use for accessing a database file.
You can choose 'the software's (non-SQL) database' to connect to an internal
dBase database or choose 'Other Database System' to retrieve data from other
types of database files.
Database File
If the field is defined as being from 'the software's (non-SQL) database', then the
name of that database must be entered. A list of the currently available
databases will be displayed in the dialog box. If you have previously entered a
database name, you can use the same name by pressing TAB.
Connection String
To connect to other types of database files, enter the appropriate connection
string to the data source here or you can click the 'Prompt' button to be prompted
to create the connection string. This string is created by first choosing
a Database provider and then creating or choosing a connection to the
database. How this is done will depend on your Database Provider.
Variable Table
With this option enable you will be able to choose which language table will
provide the data to populate the field.
Only enable this option if you wish to print multi-lingual text from a database and
you already setup the appropriate cross reference string.
76
Insert
Table Name
Enter the name of the TABLE containing the data to be printed. This item allows
you to select the appropriate database file table.
Search Fields
The number of fields used to search for a specific record.
Search Field
Field Name
The name of the database field that will be used in searching the database.
When the operator enters a search value, the database will be searched to find
the given value in the Search Field. The corresponding record will then be used
to supply data.
This item must be entered once and may be entered as many as 3 times for each
database used. If you have previously specified a field using the same database,
this item will not appear unless the number of search fields you have specified
was more than 1. The choices of field names appear in the dialog box.
Operator Prompt Line
Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing. The prompt will be
displayed above the data entry area for the field.
Variable Table Prompt
Define the variable table prompt you wish to appear at the print time. The prompt
will be displayed above the data entry area for the field.
Data Field Name
The name of the database field from which this format field will be filled. When
the database record to be used is found, data for this format field will be extracted
from the field matching the Data Field Name. The field name choices are
displayed in the dialog box.
Trim Trailing Blanks
Select Yes to suppress trailing blanks in an extracted database field. Select NO
to use the field as it appears.
Maximum Field Length
Enter the maximum number of characters to extract from a database field. A
value of 0 indicates that all characters should be used.
Typical Field Length
Enter the typical field length of a database field. This will allow fields to be
displayed during label creation using this length. Note that if more characters
exist than that specified for the typical length, all characters up to the maximum
amount specified will be used. A value of 0 indicates that there is no typical field
length.
Prompt Number
77
Printed Documentation
If the field's Source of Data is 'When Printed' or 'Database', the software provides
the user with control over the order of data input prompts by allowing the user to
specify/edit the order in which prompts will appear on the screen. This feature will
allow flexibility in designing user input screens
Design/Test Value
Leave this entry BLANK to use the default screen and field width representation,
or enter a string of characters which more closely represents typical printed data
to help with label design.
BACK to TOP
EPC Tag
A printer internal font has to be used when using RFID as the source of data for a
text field.
RFID can only be used as a source of data if the printer's RFID reader reads the
RFID tag before a field using the RFID data source is printed.
Read type
Select 'Data Block' to import the EPC programmed on the RFID tag.
Select 'Serial Number' to import the unique factory encoded serial number that is
resident in some tag types.
Number of retries
The number of times the printer will try to read the RFID tag if a read error occurs.
Data Format
Select 'ASCII' to display an ASCII representation of the data stored on the RFID
tag.
Select 'Hexadecimal' to display a Hexadecimal representation of the data stored
on the RFID tag.
Non-EPC Tag
A printer internal font has to be used when using RFID as the source of data for a
text field.
78
Insert
RFID can only be used as a source of data if the printer's RFID reader reads the
RFID tag before a field using the RFID data source is printed.
Read type
Select 'Data Block' to import data from one or more of the memory blocks on
your Non-EPC tag. The software will import all of the data from the selected
memory block(s).
Select 'Serial Number' to import the unique factory encoded serial number that is
resident in some tag types.
Starting Block
Select the starting memory block of the RFID tag from which data will be
imported.
Blocks to read
Select how many memory blocks will be imported and used as a source of
data. For example, selecting starting block 3 and blocks to read 4 will import the
data in memory blocks 3,4,5 and 6.
Number of retries
The number of times the printer will try to read the RFID tag if a read error occurs.
Data Format
Select 'ASCII' to display an ASCII representation of the data stored on the RFID
tag.
Select 'Hexadecimal' to display a Hexadecimal representation of the data stored
on the RFID tag.
Box Field
Adding a Box Field
Horizontal
Position
Position
Horizontal
Thickness
Adding a Box
Field Name
Comment
Vertical Position
Enable Printing
Field Width
Shape
Fill Pattern
Number of Sides
Polygons
Outlined
Field Height
Vertical
Thickness
Gray Level
79
Printed Documentation
Adding a Box
To add a box field, click on the Add Box Field icon
located on the Drawing
Toolbar or choose Insert | Box Field from the menu bar.
The following message will appear:
Press and hold the mouse button or press ENTER when done.
You should now move the pointer to the proper position on the format. You may
actually move to either the upper left corner or any of the other 3 corners of the
area to be occupied by the box. When the pointer is properly positioned, press
ENTER.
You may now move to the opposite corner of the area for the box. A rectangle will
display the area as you use the mouse button or the arrow keys to expand or
contract the area. When you have expanded the rectangle to the proper size,
release the mouse button or press ENTER.
Now you will be prompted to expand the box's borders to the proper thickness.
The following message will appear:
ADJUST SIDES TO PROPER THICKNESS
Drag with the mouse and release button when done,
or use the arrow keys and press ENTER when done.
The left arrow will decrease vertical sides and the up arrow key will decrease
horizontal sides. Pressing the arrow keys while holding down the shift key, will
result in movements of .10 inches or 1.0mm.
When the box's borders are the proper thickness, press ENTER. The box will be
added to the format and displayed.
For printers that support shaded boxes or polygons, you will be presented with
the Create Box Field Specification screen. Each of the specification screen items
are described below:
Field Name
A name to associate with the field. Can be up to 32 characters long. The name is
necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report,
80
Insert
copying data from this field into another field, using this field's data in a Linked
Field or filling this field using the Command File facility.
Horizontal Position
Enter the horizontal position of the field.
Vertical Position
Enter the vertical position of the field.
Comment
Enter a comment for this field.
Shape
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available shapes from which to
choose. The available choices for box fields are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rectangle
Solid Rectangle
Rounded Rectangle
Solid Rounded Rectangle
Regular Polygon
Solid Polygon
The choices vary based on the printer chosen.
Number of Sides
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available choices from which to
define the number of sides the polygon should have. A polygon can be designed
to have any number of sides from 3 to 12.
This screen item only appears if the shape chosen is Regular Polygon or Solid
Polygon.
Fill Pattern
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available fill patterns from which to
choose. The available choices are:
•
•
•
•
Solid
Down Diagonal
Up Diagonal
Grid
81
Printed Documentation
•
•
•
•
•
Diamond
Horizontal lines
Vertical Lines
Dots
Windows Wallpaper
The choices vary based on the printer and shape chosen.
Gray Level
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available gray level shading
options.
This option appears when a Solid fill pattern is chosen for shapes other than
Regular polygon or Solid Polygon. The choices for gray level shading vary based
on the printer chosen.
Once you have finished entering the specification data for the field, the field can
be placed on the format.
Polygons
For placing a polygon field on the format, follow these steps:
The following message will appear:
Move pointer to the CENTER of the polygon. Press ENTER or press and hold
mouse button.
You may now move the pointer to increase or decrease the polygon size as well
as to change the rotation of the polygon. The polygon will appear on the display
as you use the mouse or arrow keys to expand or contract the area.
The following message will appear:
EXPAND BOX to proper size. Use arrow keys then ENTER or drag with mouse.
When you have expanded the polygon to the proper size, release the mouse
button or press ENTER. If the shape chosen is Regular Polygon, you will also be
prompted to expand the borders of the polygon to the proper thickness. The
following message will appear:
Adjust sides to proper thickness. Use arrows then Enter or drag with mouse.
The left arrow will decrease the thickness of the polygon and the right arrow will
increase the thickness of the polygon. When the polygon is at the proper
82
Insert
thickness, press Enter. The polygon will be added to the format and displayed on
the screen.
Enable Printing
Select Yes to print the field on the format. Select No to display the field on the
format, but do not print the field. Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for
the field.
Field Width
Enter the width of the field in inches and hundredths of inches.
Horizontal Thickness
Enter the Horizontal Thickness of the box in inches and hundredths of inches.
Vertical Thickness
Enter the Vertical Thickness of the box in inches and hundredths of inches.
Outlined
Select Yes to outline the shape with a solid line
Field Height
Enter the Height of the field in inches and hundredths of inches.
BACK to TOP
Circle or Ellipse Field
Adding a Circle or Ellipse Field
Adding a Circle
or Ellipse
Vertical Position
Line Thickness
Field Name
Comment
Enable Printing
Shape
Field Width
Fill Pattern
Horizontal
Position
Field Height
Gray Level
Adding a Circle or Ellipse
83
Printed Documentation
To add a circle or ellipse field, click on the Add Circle or Ellipse Field icon
located on the Drawing Toolbar or click Insert | Circle or Ellipse Field from the
menu bar.
You will be instructed to define the location and size of the circle or ellipse then,
place it on the format.
You will need to move the pointer to increase or decrease the size of the circle or
ellipse. The circle will appear on the display as you use the mouse or arrow keys
to expand or contract the area of the circle. When you have expanded the circle
to the proper size, release the mouse button or press ENTER.
For printers that support outlined circles and ellipses, you have the ability to
adjust the thickness of the circle or ellipse border.
The left arrow will increase the thickness of the circle or ellipse and the right
arrow will decrease the thickness of the circle or ellipse.
When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the circle or ellipse,
press ENTER. The circle or ellipse will be added to the format and displayed.
If Circles and/or Ellipses are not supported for the printer, the menu option will be
grayed.
Each of the Circle/Ellipse data field items are described below.
Field Name
A name to associate with the field. Can be up to 32 characters long. The name is
necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report,
copying data from this field into another field, using this field's data in a Linked
Field or filling this field using the Command File facility.
Comment
Enter a comment for this field.
Horizontal Position
Enter the horizontal position of the field.
Vertical Position
Enter the horizontal position of the field
Enable Printing
84
Insert
Select Yes to print the field on the format. Select No to display the field on the
format, but do not print the field. Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for
the field.
Field Width
Enter the Width of the field in inches and hundredths of inches.
Field Height
Enter the Height of the field in inches and hundredths of inches.
Line Thickness
Enter the thickness of the field in inches and hundredths of inches.
Shape
Please select one of the following variations. Available choices are:
•
•
•
•
Circle (Outlined Circle)
Disc (Solid Circle)
Ellipse (Outlined Ellipse)
Solid Ellipse
Fill Pattern
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available fill patterns from which to
choose. The available choices are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Solid
Down Diagonal
Up Diagonal
Grid
Diamond
Horizontal lines
Vertical Lines
Dots
Windows Wallpaper
The choices vary based on the printer chosen.
Gray Level
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available gray level shading
options. This option appears when a Solid fill pattern is chosen.
85
Printed Documentation
The choices for gray level shading vary based on the printer chosen.
BACK to TOP
Line Field
Adding a Line Field
Adding a Line
Field
Vertical Position
Line Length
Field Name
Comment
Enable Printing
Shape
Orientation Angle
Fill Pattern
Horizontal
Position
Line Thickness
Gray Level
Adding a Line Field
To add a line field click on the Add Line Field icon
located on the Drawing
toolbar or choose Insert | Line Field
Field from the menu bar.
The line's width can be as large as the format width. The line's height can be as
large as the format height.
You can now use the mouse button to move the pointer to the proper position on
the format or you can use the arrow keys. Since a line is treated as though it is a
rectangle, you may actually move to either the upper left corner or any of the
other three corners of the area to be occupied by the line. When the pointer is
properly positioned, the following message will now appear:
Move to LOWER RIGHT CORNER of the line.
Press and hold the mouse button or press ENTER when done.
You can now use the mouse button to move to the opposite corner of the area for
the line or you can use the arrow keys. A solid rectangle will display the area as
you use the arrow keys to expand or contract the area. When you have expanded
the rectangle to the proper size, release the mouse button or press ENTER.
The completed line will be added to the format and shown on the format display.
Angled Lines are supported on some printers.
For printers that support shaded lines, you will be presented with the Create Line
Field Specification screen. Each of the specification screen items are described
below:
86
Insert
Field Name
A name to associate with the field. Can be up to 32 characters long. The name is
necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report,
copying data from this field into another field, using this field's data in a Linked
Field or filling this field using the Command File facility.
Comment
Enter a comment for this field.
Horizontal Position
Enter the horizontal position of the field.
Vertical Position
Enter the vertical position of the field.
Enable Printing
Select Yes to print the field on the format. Select No to display the field on the
format, but do not print the field. Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for
the field.
Orientation Angle
Enter the Angle in degrees and tenths of degrees.
Line Thickness
If you would like to adjust the thickness of a line after you have already placed the
line on the format, this parameter permits you to enter a value for the line
thickness.
Line Length
Enter the length of the line in inches or millimeters.
Shape
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available shapes from which to
choose. The available choices for line fields are:
•
•
•
Solid Rectangle
Solid Rounded Rectangle
Arrow
87
Printed Documentation
•
•
Double Arrow
Triangle
The choices vary based on the printer chosen.
Fill Pattern
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available fill patterns from which to
choose. The available choices are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Solid
Down Diagonal
Up Diagonal
Grid
Diamond
Horizontal lines
Vertical Lines
Dots
Windows Wallpaper
The choices vary based on the printer chosen.
Gray Level
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available gray level shading. This
option appears when a Solid fill pattern is chosen.
The choices for gray level shading vary based on the printer chosen.
Once you have finished entering the specification data for the field, the field can be placed
on the format.
BACK to Top
Picture Field
Adding a Picture Field
Adding a Picture
Field
Comment
Horizontal
Position
Field Width
Embed Graphic
Field Direction
Field Contrast
Dithering Options
Enable Printing
Graphic
Graphic Overlay
88
Vertical Position
Field Name
Field Height
Source of Data
Maintain Aspect
Ratio
Field Color
Insert
Adding a Picture Field
To add a picture field, click on the Add Picture Field icon
located on the
Drawing Toolbar or choose Insert | Picture Field from the menu bar.
NOTE: Over 40 of the most popular graphic types are supported.
Pictures can be created using Microsoft Paintbrush®, Adobe Photoshop®, Jasc
Paint Shop Pro® and many other graphics applications. Files with the .EPS
extension can only be included on formats designed for a Postscript printer.
Color pictures can be printed in color to a color printer from within the software
under the following criteria. If your image has no color information accompanying
it, then the software can not use the image. In this case, the image will not print
properly. If your image has color information accompanying it, then the software
does not have a problem printing the image. For example, if your image was
saved as a 16.7 million color image, the image has no color information
accompanying it. If the image was saved as a 256 color image, the image will
have color information accompanying it.
You are now presented with the picture specification screen. Once all
specification data is entered you will be returned to the Edit screen. You will be
instructed to define the size of the picture. You can use the mouse or the arrow
keys. Placing the picture field on the format display is similar to the process of
placing a box field on the format.
Use the arrow keys or drag with mouse.
When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the picture, the
software will read in the picture and add it to the format. It will be displayed in the
proper size.
NOTE: If this field's Source of Data is When Printed or Database, the area for the
picture will show as a checker-board on the format.
Each of the picture data items are described below.
Horizontal Position
Enter the Horizontal Position of the field.
Vertical Position
Enter the Vertical Position of the field.
Field Name
89
Printed Documentation
A name to associate with the field. Can be up to 32 characters long. The name is
necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report,
copying data from this field into another field, using this field's data in a Linked
Field or filling this field using the Command File facility.
Comment
Enter an optional comment for the field. Used in reports.
Field Width
Enter the Width of the field in inches and hundredths of inches.
Field Height
Enter the Height of the field in inches and hundredths of inches.
Source of Data
The data for this field can be one of the following:
•
•
•
Fixed
When Printed
Database
Embed Graphic
Select "Yes" to embed the graphic image into the label file. If the original graphic
image cannot be found, the image embedded in the format will be used in its
place. Using this option will significantly increase the size of the label format file.
Field Direction
The field can be printed in any of the 4 following orientations:
•
•
•
•
Normal (left to right)
Bottom to top
Upside down (right to left)
Top to bottom
An example is shown of each orientation in the box at the side of the display
screen when this item is being entered.
Field Contrast
The field can be printed normal (black print on white background) or reverse
(white print on black background).
90
Insert
Maintain Aspect Ratio
Selecting Yes for this option will allow pictures to maintain their original aspect
ratio. Selecting No will allow pictures to be stretched to fill the available defined
field size.
Dithering Options
The Dithering Options prompt allows you to select from various half-toning and
dithering options to see which one creates the best printed output for your
particular image.
Enable Printing
Select Yes to print the field on the format. Select No to display the field on the
format, but do not print the field. Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for
the field.
Graphic Overlay
Select Yes and images that overlap will print as a merged image and the white
background around the images will not obscure other fields already on the
label. Select No and the graphic background may obscure images that it
overlaps. This option is only available for Windows Drivers
Field Color
When designing a label for a COLOR printer, you can add a color to a
monochrome picture. Select a color from the available choices in the directions.
When the picture field is printed, the picture will be printed in the selected color.
This item will only appear if the selected picture was not originally saved as a
color graphic.
BACK to TOP
Source of Data
Fixed
Fixed Data
Edit
Control Characters
Fixed Data
Enter the exact data that you wish to be printed in the field.
91
Printed Documentation
Edit
Click Edit to display a text editor.
Control Characters
Choose from a list of predefined characters to be included in the data of defined
fields.
When Printed
What is a When Printed field?
The field data is variable. When you print the format, you will be prompted to fill in
the value of the field. It can be changed for each set of formats that are printed.
For a text field, your input may come from the keyboard, a serial port, a
Command File or a wedge type bar code scanner. For a paragraph field, you will
type in the paragraph at the time of printing. With the exception of TAB key usage,
the paragraph will be printed exactly as typed. To force a new line break, press
CTRL-ENTER simultaneously; otherwise, the text will automatically be arranged
into lines when printed (word wrap). The following prompts will apply:
Operator Prompt
Line
Maximum Field
Length
Prompt Repeats
Prompt Number
Allow Blanks
Selection List
Data Checking
Operator
Operator Prompt Line
Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing. The prompt will be
displayed above the data entry area for the field.
Prompt Repeats
Select to enable the printer to prompt for this field on every label. This only
applies when downloading to a memory card in the printer, and when the printer
prompts for the label quantity.
Prompt Number
The order in which you wish the prompt to appear on the operator input screen.
This option will appear if there is more than 1 prompted field defined for the
format.
Data Checking
An indication of the type of validation to be done on operator entry for a 'When
Printed' field. The types of Data Checking include:
92
Insert
•No Validation
•Numeric
•Alphabetic
•Alphanumeric
•Upper Case Characters
•Upper Case Alphabetic
•Upper Case Alphanumeric
•Fixed List of Values
Maximum Field Length
If you define the field as 'When Printed', you must supply the maximum length of
the field in character positions.
Allow Blanks
An indication of the allowable INCOMPLETE operator input for a 'When Printed'
field. The choices are as follows:
•Fully or Partially Blank
•Partially Blank
•Fully Blank
•No Blanks Allowed
Selection List
Enter a list of values which the operator can choose from. The values that you
type in will appear as choices on the Print screen. Each value must be separated
by a space. Short phrases must be enclosed in double quotes. To advance to a
new line, press CTRL+ENTER. For example, choices are RED GREEN BLUE.
To display this selection list, click on the down arrow next to the field input box on
the data input screen within the Print screen.
BACK to TOP
Database
The information or "data" that will be used to fill this field on the format will come
from a database file. You will be asked to specify the database file name and the
name of the field containing the data or information to be used. A maximum of
three different databases may be accessed in one format. For each database
accessed, the name of the "search field" and an operator prompt will be required.
You will only be required to supply a "search field" name and an operator prompt
once for each new database used.
Before printing the format, the operator will be prompted for the value of the
search field to be found. The software will search the database until a matching
93
Printed Documentation
record is found. The matching record will then be used to supply data to all fields
which specify the same database.
For a paragraph field, a database MEMO field can be used on the label by
supplying the name of the MEMO field at the 'Data Field Name' prompt.
When the format is printed the operator will be prompted for the value of the
search field to be found. The software will search the database until a matching
record is found. The matching record will be used to supply data to all fields that
specify the same database.
There is a method by which you can print out all of the records within a given
database. Refer to the $ALL Function and Tutorial in Appendix C for further
information.
Database System
Search Fields
Trim Trailing
Blanks
Database File
Search Field
Name
Maximum Field
Length
Design/Test
Value
Connection
String
Operator Prompt
Line
Typical Field
Length
Data Field Name
Variable Table
Variable Table
Prompt
Table Name
Prompt Number
Database System
Enter the name of the Database System to use for accessing a database file.
You can choose 'the software's (non-SQL) database' to connect to an internal
dBase database or choose 'Other Database System' to retrieve data from other
types of database files.
Database File
If the field is defined as being from 'the software's (non-SQL) database', then the
name of that database must be entered. A list of the currently available
databases will be displayed in the dialog box. If you have previously entered a
database name, you can use the same name by pressing TAB.
Connection String
To connect to other types of database files, enter the appropriate connection
string to the data source here or you can click the 'Prompt' button to be prompted
to create the connection string. This string is created by first choosing
a Database provider and then creating or choosing a connection to the
database. How this is done will depend on your Database Provider.
Variable Table
With this option enable you will be able to choose which language table will
provide the data to populate the field.
94
Insert
Only enable this option if you wish to print multi-lingual text from a database and
you already setup the appropriate cross reference string.
Table Name
Enter the name of the TABLE containing the data to be printed. This item allows
you to select the appropriate database file table.
Search Fields
The number of fields used to search for a specific record.
Search Field Name
The name of the database field that will be used in searching the database.
When the operator enters a search value, the database will be searched to find
the given value in the Search Field. The corresponding record will then be used
to supply data.
This item must be entered once and may be entered as many as 3 times for each
database used. If you have previously specified a field using the same database,
this item will not appear unless the number of search fields you have specified
was more than 1. The choices of field names appear in the dialog box.
Operator Prompt Line
Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing. The prompt will be
displayed above the data entry area for the field.
Variable Table Prompt
Define the variable table prompt you wish to appear at the print time. The prompt
will be displayed above the data entry area for the field.
Data Field Name
The name of the database field from which this format field will be filled. When
the database record to be used is found, data for this format field will be extracted
from the field matching the Data Field Name. The field name choices are
displayed in the dialog box.
Trim Trailing Blanks
Select Yes to suppress trailing blanks in an extracted database field. Select NO
to use the field as it appears.
Maximum Field Length
Enter the maximum number of characters to extract from a database field. A
value of 0 indicates that all characters should be used.
Typical Field Length
Enter the typical field length of a database field. This will allow fields to be
displayed during label creation using this length. Note that if more characters
exist than that specified for the typical length, all characters up to the maximum
95
Printed Documentation
amount specified will be used. A value of 0 indicates that there is no typical field
length.
Prompt Number
If the field's Source of Data is 'When Printed' or 'Database', the software provides
the user with control over the order of data input prompts by allowing the user to
specify/edit the order in which prompts will appear on the screen. This feature will
allow flexibility in designing user input screens
Design/Test Value
Leave this entry BLANK to use the default screen and field width representation,
or enter a string of characters which more closely represents typical printed data
to help with label design.
BACK to
to TOP
Text Field
Adding a Text or Paragraph Field
Adding a Text or
Paragraph Field
Horizontal Position
Vertical Position
Comment
Typeface
Width Magnification
Character Height
Character Width
Maximum Lines
Field Direction
Increment/Decrement
Field
Source of Data
Special Formatting
Height
Magnification
Field
Contrast
Contrast
Report Data
AddAdd-on Characters
Enable Printing
Font Style
Font Size
Date Format
Format String
Text Color
Position Per Line
Interline Spacing
Letter Orientation
Character Spacing
Character Formatting
Center/Justify
Type of Increment
Increment/Decrement
Sequence
Change Amount
Background Color
Print Criterion
Update Database
Design/Test
Design/Test Value
Script
Field Fill
Force Fit
Font Point Size
Increment/Decrement
Increment/Decrement
Unicode Data
96
Field Name
NonNon-Numeric
Data
Reverse
Field
Adjustment
Adjustment
Special
Effect
Character
Data
Checking
Selection
List
Maximum
Field Length
Typical Field
Length
Insert
Maximum
Minimum
Adding a Text or Paragraph Field
To add a new text or paragraph field to the format, click the Add Text Field icon
on the Drawing Toolbar or choose Insert | Text Field from the menu bar.
Horizontal Position
Enter the horizontal position of the field.
Vertical Position
Enter the vertical position of the field.
Field Name
A name to associate with the field. Can be up to 32 characters long. The name is
necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report,
copying data from this field into another field, using this field's data in a Linked
Field or filling this field using the Command File facility.
Comment
Enter a comment for the field.
Typeface
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available character sets from
which to choose the base character for your text field. A thumbnail preview will be
given for all TrueType fonts on the Text field parameters screen while editing this
prompt. If the source of data is fixed, the data will be shown on the parameters
screen in the True Type font selected. For when printed fields, the data will be
shown in the True Type font selected at print time when it is entered.
NOTE: When defining a text field that uses a TrueType font, the Character Height
is the actual cell size of a character. The cell size is defined to include the
character, international ascenders and lower case descenders.
For example: If you type a Character Height of 1.00", the actual character size
that is printed will be .70". Specifying a Character Height of 1.33" will print a
character of 1" in height.
Width Magnification
97
Printed Documentation
This function is used to specify the width of the characters.
Height Magnification
This function is used to specify the height of the characters
Script
Select the Script/Character Set to be used with the chosen font.
Font Point Size
When using True Type fonts you may click the "Change Font Point Size" Button
and select a point size for the text field. The Character Height is adjusted
automatically and the Character Width is set to "0" to make it proportional to the
height. Conversely, if the value for Character Height is changed then the value
for Font Point Size will be automatically adjusted.
Character Height
Indicate the character height in inches and hundredths of inches if measurements
are in English. Indicate the character height in millimeters and tenths of
millimeters if measurements are in Metric.
Character Width
Indicate the character width in inches and hundredths of inches if measurements
are in English. Indicate the character width in millimeters and tenths of
millimeters if measurements are in Metric.
When using TrueType fonts, you may specify a character width of "0". This will
make the width proportional to the height.
Maximum Lines
This function allows you to specify a single line text field or a multiple line text
(paragraph) field. Enter 1 for a single line. For a paragraph field, enter the
number of lines you want the paragraph to occupy. A maximum of 99 lines can be
specified for a paragraph field.
Field Contrast
•
•
Normal - Field will appear black on white background.
Reverse - Field will appear white on black background
Field Direction
98
Insert
When the Letter Orientation is Normal, the field can be printed in any of the
following orientations on the format.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Normal (left to right)
Bottom to top
Upside down (right to left)
Top to bottom
Slanted
Circular Arc
When the Letter Orientation is Stacked, the field can be printed in any of the
following stacked orientations:
•
•
•
•
•
Stacked Right
Stacked Up
Stacked Left
Stacked Down
Slanted
Stacked fields are fields where characters are printed below one another instead
of next to one another. This option varies depending on the printer chosen.
The software shows an example of each orientation in the box of the display
when this item is being entered.
You should now rotate the box to the appropriate angle. As you move the box,
the degree of the slant appears in the coordinates box on the lower right side of
the screen. When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the
circular arc field, release the mouse button or press ENTER.
When selecting a field direction of Circular Arc, the field is placed on the label
then expanded in an arc. Once all specification data is entered, you will be
returned to Edit screen. You will be instructed to define the location, angle and
the shape of the arc of the field.
You should now rotate the box to the appropriate angle. As you move the box,
the degree of the slant appears in the coordinates box on the lower right side of
the screen.
You will now be prompted to define the shape of the arc of the field.
Adjust SHAPE. Use arrows, then ENTER or drag with mouse.
Moving the pointer towards the top of screen will make the top of the letters curve
more.
99
Printed Documentation
Moving the pointer towards the bottom of the screen will make the bottom of the
letter curve more. When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the
circular arc field, release the mouse button or press ENTER.
Source of Data
The data for the field can be one of the following:
Fixed
When Printed
Database
Copied
Link
Serialized
Print Date
Time
Arithmetic
External File
Name When Printed
Database
Database Indirect
Special Formatting
This function allows for specialized formatting of data. Following are the available
options:
•
•
No special formatting
Short Date
Short Date
Example: 10-JAN-99
•
Long Date
Long Date
Example: January 10, 1999
•
Julian Date
Julian Date
Example: 99010
•
Custom Date
Custom Date
Allows you to create your own custom format for the date.
MM - Numeric Month
100
Insert
mm - Numeric Month with suppressed zero
MMM - Abbreviated Name of Month
MMMMMMMMM - Month Name
DD - 2 Digit Day of Month
DDD - 3 Digit Day of Year
YY - 2 Digit Year
Y - 1 Digit Year
WW - 2 Digit Week Number within Year
WWW - 3 Letter Day of Week
WWWWWWWWW - Day of Week Name
NOTE: Use mmm for jan or Mmm for Jan, etc.
Example: MM.DD.YY
•
Custom Spacing
Custom Spacing
This option allows for compliance with various industry standard formats
for bar code human readable interpretations. You may use a character
string of 9's to represent positions to be filled by data. The allowable
separators are any special characters you desire for your format, including
spaces.
Example: (999) 999-9999 for a phone number, demonstrating that
separators other than the space character can be used (i.e. dash,
parentheses).
This meets the needs of different standards such as NDC, which requires
dashes and spaces, or UCC/EAN 128, which requires parentheses and
spaces.
101
Printed Documentation
•
Custom Numeric/Amount Format
Custom Numeric Amount Format
This option allows you to format a string of numeric data. If you would like
to suppress the printing of leading zeroes or only print specific parts of the
numeric data, such as the first 3 digits, you can use a character string of
9's, X's or Z's to represent positions to be filled by data.
Example: ZZZ9 represents a numeric data string with suppressed leading
zeroes.
•
RPS Interpretation with Checksum
RPS Interpretation with Checksum
This option allows you to create the Human Readable interpretation for an
RPS bar code.
To properly create an RPS bar code with interpretation, refer to your RPS
Bar Code Specifications.
•
Price (.NN or N.NN)
Price (.NN or N.NN)
If selected, the fixed data will be printed in this format.
Displayed is a price with decimal points, but no currency sign(s).
•
Price (NN¢ or N.NN)
Price (NN¢ or N.NN)
If selected, the fixed data will be printed in this format.
No decimal point for fixed data of 2 characters or less.
102
Insert
•
Price (.NN¢ or $N.NN)
Price (.NN¢ or $N.NN)
If selected, the fixed data will be printed in this format.
Displayed with decimal points and currency signs.
•
Price ($.NN or $N.NN)
Price ($.NN or $N.NN)
If selected, the fixed data will be printed in this format.
Displayed with decimal points and
the dollar sign.
•
Unit Price (NN.N¢ or $N.NN)
Unit Price (NN.N¢ or $N.NN)
If selected, the fixed data will be printed in this format.
Displayed is a unit price.
•
Price Header (N/ if N > 1)
Price Header (N/ if N > 1)
If selected, the fixed data will be printed in this format.
For example:
If items sell 3 for 2.00, choosing this option will allow the price to be printed
as 3/2.00.
•
Price Header (N FOR if N > 1)
103
Printed Documentation
Price
Price Header (N FOR if N > 1)
If selected, the fixed data will be printed in this format.
For example:
If items sell 3 for 2.00, choosing this option will allow the price to be printed
as 3 FOR 2.00.
Report Data
To record the value of this field whenever the format is printed, select Yes.
Otherwise, Select No.
This is used to activate the legacy reporting option (*.rpt file). This option is not
needed when using the Print History Console.
AddAdd-On Characters
You may specify a character string of up to 10 characters to always be appended
to the front and/or end of the bar code. These characters will always be encoded
in the bar code. The following options are available:
•
•
•
•
None
Header
Trailer
BOTH Header and Trailer
Enable Printing
This selection will allow you to define a field from any of the available sources of
data and not have that field printed on the format.
Example: Your customer's part number gets printed on the format, but yours does
not; however you want your part number included in the report that is generated.
You need to generate a field defining your part number, disable the printing and
enable the report function.
You could also use this function to put a message on the screen for your operator.
Such as, the color or size stock that this format should be printed on.
Select Yes to print the field on the format. Select No to display the field on the
format, but do not print the field. Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for
the field.
104
Insert
Font Style
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available font styles for the
chosen typeface.
Font Size
You will be presented with an on-screen list of available font sizes for the chosen
typeface.
Date Format
A special string of characters that will represent how the date should be formatted.
The valid characters for the string appear in the Directions Box.
Format String
A character string in which 9's represent how the data should be formatted. Other
valid characters for the string include, parenthesis, periods, commas, hyphens
and the space character.
If you had previously selected Custom Numeric/Amount for your Special
Formatting option, you can type in a sequence of 9's, X's or Z's to represent
positions (or place holders) to be filled by data.
The 9 place holder should be used to always print a digit. For example, if the data
is:
000123456
and you want to print all digits, enter the following for the Format String screen
item:
999999999
The data that will print will be:
000123456
The Z place holder should be used if you want to suppress a variable number of
leading zeroes. In other words, if the digit is a leading zero, the zero will not print.
If the digit is not a zero, the digit will print.
Fixed Data: For example, if the data is:
000123456
105
Printed Documentation
and you want to suppress the 3 leading zeroes, enter the following for the Format
String screen item:
ZZZ999999
The data that will print will be:
123456
This example will suppress only the first three leading zeroes. If there are more
than three leading zeroes in the data stream, only the first three leading zeroes
will be suppressed.
Variable Data: When the data is unknown, such as database input or operator
input, and you want to suppress all leading zeroes, it is best to enter the following
for the Format String screen item:
ZZZZZZZZ9
Entering the format string this way will always suppress the leading zeroes no
matter what the actual data is.
For example, if the data is:
000123456
The following will print:
123456
If the data is:
000000123
The following will print:
123
The X place holder should be used to always suppress a digit in a specific
position. For example, if the data is:
123400056
and you want to print only the last six digits, enter the following for the Format
String screen item:
XXX999999
106
Insert
The data that will print will be:
400056
The number of place holder characters specified for Format String must match
the number of characters in the data string:
a) If data is coming from a database or if the data is When Printed and the
maximum field length is 10, there should be 10 characters specified in the Format
String:
ZZZZZZZZZ9
will suppress any leading zeroes.
For example, if the data is:
0000007890
The characters following will print:
7890
If the data is:
0034567890
The characters following will print:
34567890
NonNon-Numeric Data
If there are any non-numeric characters in the data, the non-numeric characters
will automatically be ignored. For example, if the data is 01234B6,
typing: ZZZZZZ9
will suppress any leading zeroes; however, since there are non-numeric
characters, the actual data that will print will be 12346.
Text Color
Choose a color for the text field. For TrueType fonts, you may click the "Custom"
button to create a custom color for the text field. Printer internal fonts will only
allow a choice of 16 colors. This option will only appear for the TEC 416 printer or
color Windows printers.
107
Printed Documentation
Positions Per Line
This function allows you to define the number of characters each line will have
(maximum of 300 character positions).
NOTE: If the paragraph data is larger than the area that you defined on the format,
and all characters cannot fit, the following message will be displayed: WARNING:
WARNING
Paragraph data exceeds the defined number of lines and positions per line.
Some data will be omitted.
Interline Spacing
This function allows you to define the distance between each line, in inches and
hundredths of inches. Enter 0 for default spacing.
Reverse Field Adjustment
This option is used to set the size of the reverse area surrounding the field. Enter
a value in hundredths of an inch to define the size of the reverse box that
surrounds the text.
This option is only available when using a Windows Printer Driver.
Letter Orientation
Choose the orientation of the characters in relation to the direction of the text. All
letters in the field can be printed in a Normal or a Stacked orientation. The
Stacked orientation only appears if the chosen typeface is a TrueType font.
Character Spacing
Enter the vertical distance between characters, from the baseline of the first
character to the baseline of the next character, in inches. Enter 0 for default
spacing.
The Character Spacing option is only available if the chosen typeface is a
TrueType font and the letter orientation is Stacked.
Character Formatting
If you want to specially format parts of the text field, select one or more alternate
styles. Enter blank for no special formatting of characters.
The purpose of Character Formatting is to apply special effects to text within a
paragraph. Special effects include bold,
bold italic, underline , superscript and subscript. You
have the ability to select a single special effect or multiple effects (up to 4). For
each special effect selected, you are given an additional screen item prompt.
108
Insert
The Character Formatting screen item appears on the text specification screen
when designing paragraph fields in which the chosen typeface is a TrueType font.
Special Effect Character
Enter a toggle character for the special effect. The toggle character will become a
non-printing character which can be used to bracket words or phrases that you
want to appear in the special effect style.
For example, to highlight a word to be underlined, you can use the ! (exclamation
point) as the toggle character. After the toggle character is defined, the !
(exclamation point) character can be placed before and after the word or phrase
that you want underlined.
The special effect toggle character can also be embedded in an external file or a
database memo field. For When Printed paragraph fields, the toggle character
can be used when entering data on the prompt line.
Center/Justify
This option will cause the character string to be centered within the defined print
area. That is, if the contents of the field contain less characters than the
maximum, the characters will be moved so they are centered in the field's area.
Other options available are: Right Justify, Left Justify and Full Justify. Full Justify
will adjust the spacing between words so that text aligns with both the left and
right margins. Options may vary based on the printer used.
Increment/Decrement Field
Field
The following options are available:
•
•
•
Increment
Decrement
Constant
If the field is Copied, the increment or decrement specified for the copy field will
apply to the copied field. If the field contains more than 10 numbers, the
increment or decrement will apply only to the last 10 numbers.
Increment/Decrement Sequence
The custom incrementation option allows you to define a specific sequence of
characters to increment or decrement. Valid characters are the digits 0-9 and the
letters A-Z.
See Examples
109
Printed Documentation
NOTE: Incrementing or Decrementing starts from the right side of the field value
and increments or decrements toward the left.
Type of Increment
The choices for the Type of Increment/decrement are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Numeric
Alphabetic
Alphanumeric
Hexadecimal
Octal
Custom
Change Amount
The numerical amount by which to increment or decrement the field.
Increment/Decrement Maximum
Enter the maximum value the field can reach before rolling over to the minimum
value.
NOTE: This option requires the computer to do the field incrementation and not
the printer. The computer will send the labels one at a time to the printer.
Increment/Decrement Minimum
Enter the value the field should be reset to after reaching the maximum value.
NOTE: This option requires the computer to do the field incrementation and not
the printer. The computer will send the labels one at a time to the printer.
Update Database
Select Yes to have the database updated after each job. This will reflect the last
value of the incremented/decremented field. Select No to leave the database field
unchanged.
Background Color
Select the background color for the text field. This option will only appear for the
TEC 416 printer or color Windows printers.
Data Checking
110
Insert
Please indicate whether data type validation should be performed on operator
input. Choices are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
No Validation
Numeric
Alphabetic
Alphanumeric
Date (M/D/Y)
Upper Case Characters
Upper Case Alphabetic
Upper Case Alphanumeric
Fixed List of Values
Selection List
Enter a list of values which the operator can choose from. The values that you
type in will appear as choices on the Print screen. Each value must be separated
by a space. Short phrases must be enclosed in double quotes. To advance to a
new line, press CTRL+ENTER. For example, choices are RED GREEN BLUE.
To display this selection list, click on the down arrow next to the field input box on
the data input screen within the Print screen.
Maximum Field Length
Enter the maximum number of characters to extract from the database field. A
value of 0 indicates that all of the characters should be used.
Typical Field length
Enter the typical number of characters that are extracted from the database field.
This will allow fields to be displayed during label creation using this length. Note
that if more characters exist than that specified for the typical length, all
characters up to the maximum amount specified will be used. A value of 0
indicates that there is no typical field length.
Design/Test Value
This option allows users to specify either a narrower character width or the
default character width of a text field by typing in a string of characters that more
precisely represents the actual printed data.
For this option, press TAB to leave this entry BLANK or type in a string of
characters which represents a narrower character width for the field. Leaving this
entry blank designates that you want to use the default screen and field width
representation. Typing in a string of characters allows you to more precisely
111
Printed Documentation
represent the actual printed data which can allow more characters to define on a
line.
Field Fill
With this option set to Yes, if less characters are inputted than specified for the
maximum field length, the characters will be bigger in both height and width.
Select No for normal operation.
Force Fit
When designing paragraph or Multi-source (block) text fields, you can enable the
"Force Fit" option. This option will allow the font size to shrink or grow so that the
text best fills the available field area. Once this option is enabled, you will be
prompted to enter the upper and lower limits for the text height. The upper limit
is determined by the value entered in the "Max. Fit Height" prompt, the text will
grow no larger than this value. The lower limit is determined by the value entered
in the "Min. Fit Height" prompt, the text will not shrink smaller than this value. The
width of the characters is changed proportionally to the change in height. This
option is useful when designing ingredient labels to make the best use of the
available label space.
Print Criterion
Enter the condition for which this field should be printed. The condition entered is
an expression that can contain currently defined field names, numeric or
alphabetic constants, mathematic operators, comparison operators or logical
operators. Numeric or alphabetic constants need to be enclosed in double quotes.
For example, you can create a text field that has a fixed value of 'SALE'. You
only want this field to print when the 'PRICE' field is less than 6.99. You can
select Conditional Print for the field named 'SALE' and type the following
expression in for Print Criterion: PRICE < 6.99. Where: PRICE is the field name
you want to compare. < is the comparison operator LESS THAN and 6.99 is the
value to match. The 'SALE' field will now only print when the value of the PRICE
field is less than 6.99.
Another example would be a text field with a fixed value of "Frozen". You only
want this field to print when another field called 'CONDITION' is equal to
"True". Type CONDITION = "True"
"True" in for Print Criterion. Any time the
CONDITION field is equal to "True" the "Frozen" field will print. If CONDITION is
empty or equal to something other than "True" then "Frozen" will NOT print.
The LIKE comparison operator allows you to perform pattern matching. You can
substitute a percent or an underscore character for a whole word, a group of
characters or a single character. A % (percent sign) represents a whole word or
112
Insert
any GROUP of characters in the data. The _ (underscore) represents any
SINGLE character in the data.
For example, if you need to print all records where the UPC code begins with the
number 6 and ends with any character, type the following expression: UPCCODE
LIKE 6%
Where:
UPCCODE is the field name in your database.
LIKE is the comparison operator LIKE.
6 is the starting character of the UPC code to match.
% designates the remaining characters in the UPC code.
The database will be searched for all records which begin with the number 6 and
only those records will be printed.
If you need to print all records where an Item number begins with A and ends with
a 5, type the following expression: ITEMNUM LIKE A_5
Where:
ITEMNUM is the field name in your database. The length of ITEMNUM is 3.
LIKE is the comparison operator LIKE.
A is the starting character of the ITEMNUM to match.
_ is a substitute for any single character.
5 is the last character of the ITEMNUM to match.
The database will be searched for all records where the ITEMNUM is 3
characters in length, begins with an A, ends with a 5 and has any character in the
second position. Only those records will be printed.
Unicode Data
Set the Unicode Data property to yes for the ability to have Unicode text in the
text field. The option is valid for fixed field data, when printed data, or database
fields. Any character present in the font can be used, allowing for multiple mixed
languages in one field. This only works for fields using TrueType fonts.
113
Printed Documentation
NOTE: Fields with Unicode Data set to 'Yes' will be sent as a graphic regardless of
the
the setting of the Download Fonts format option.
BACK to TOP
Adding a Multi-Source Text field
Adding a MultiMultiSource Text Field
Field Properties
Button
OK Button
Cancel Button
Field Data
Segments
Literal
Strings/Existing
Fields
Existing Data
Segments
Adding a MultiMulti-Source Text Field
To add a new Multi-Source Text Field to the format, click the Add MultiMulti-Source
Text Field icon
on the Drawing Toolbar or choose Insert | MultiMulti-Source Text
Field from the menu bar.
Field Properties Button
Clicking the 'Field Properties' button will allow you to modify the properties of the
final text field (excluding source of data). Please see Adding a Text Field for
details.
NOTE: You must have at least one segment defined in the field before you are
able to change any of the field properties.
OK Button
Clicking the 'OK
OK'
OK Button will create the Multi-Source Text Field.
Cancel Button
114
Insert
Clicking the 'Cancel
Cancel'
Cancel button will cancel the creation of the Multi-Source Text Field.
Field Data Segments
This list shows all of the data segments that will be part of the completed Text
Field. The data segments will be listed in the order that they will appear in the
text field. You can change this order by selecting a segment and clicking either
the 'Move
Move Up'
Move Down'
Up or 'Move
Down buttons. You can remove any of the segments by
highlighting it and clicking the
Remove'
Remove button.
Literal Strings/Existing Fields
From this list you may add the data from any of the predefined text or bar code
fields on the format as a data segment for this field. You can also add a literal
string enclosed in double quotes (" "). For example "sample string".
Include'
Include button
To add the string or field value to the text field click the
Existing Data Segments
This list shows all predefined Data Segments that are currently on the format that
you may use as part of the text field.
If there are no Data Segments listed, you can create one by clicking the 'Add
Add'
Add
button. You may edit a Data Segment already on the format by clicking the 'Edit
Edit'
Edit
button. You may also delete one from the format by clicking the 'Delete
Delete'
Delete button.
BACK to TOP
Source Data
Fixed
Fixed Data
Edit
Control Characters
Fixed Data
Enter the exact data that you wish to be printed in the field.
Edit
Click Edit to display a text editor.
Control Characters
Choose from a list of predefined characters to be included in the data of defined
fields.
When Printed
What is a When Printed field?
115
Printed Documentation
The field data is variable. When you print the format, you will be prompted to fill in
the value of the field. It can be changed for each set of formats that are printed.
For a text field, your input may come from the keyboard, a serial port, a
Command File or a wedge type bar code scanner. For a paragraph field, you will
type in the paragraph at the time of printing. With the exception of TAB key usage,
the paragraph will be printed exactly as typed. To force a new line break, press
CTRL-ENTER simultaneously; otherwise, the text will automatically be arranged
into lines when printed (word wrap). The following prompts will apply:
Operator Prompt
Line
Maximum Field
Length
Prompt Repeats
Prompt Number
Allow Blanks
Selection List
Data Checking
Operator Prompt Line
Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing. The prompt will be
displayed above the data entry area for the field.
Prompt Repeats
Select to enable the printer to prompt for this field on every label. This only
applies when downloading to a memory card in the printer, and when the printer
prompts for the label quantity.
Prompt Number
The order in which you wish the prompt to appear on the operator input screen.
This option will appear if there is more than 1 prompted field defined for the
format.
Data Checking
An indication of the type of validation to be done on operator entry for a 'When
Printed' field. The types of Data Checking include:
•No Validation
•Numeric
•Alphabetic
•Alphanumeric
•Upper Case Characters
•Upper Case Alphabetic
•Upper Case Alphanumeric
•Fixed List of Values
Maximum Field Length
116
Insert
If you define the field as 'When Printed', you must supply the maximum length of
the field in character positions.
Allow Blanks
An indication of the allowable INCOMPLETE operator input for a 'When Printed'
field. The choices are as follows:
•Fully or Partially Blank
•Partially Blank
•Fully Blank
•No Blanks Allowed
Selection List
Enter a list of values which the operator can choose from. The values that you
type in will appear as choices on the Print screen. Each value must be separated
by a space. Short phrases must be enclosed in double quotes. To advance to a
new line, press CTRL+ENTER. For example, choices are RED GREEN BLUE.
To display this selection list, click on the down arrow next to the field input box on
the data input screen within the Print screen.
BACK to TOP
Database
The information or "data" that will be used to fill this field on the format will come
from a database file. You will be asked to specify the database file name and the
name of the field containing the data or information to be used. A maximum of
three different databases may be accessed in one format. For each database
accessed, the name of the "search field" and an operator prompt will be required.
You will only be required to supply a "search field" name and an operator prompt
once for each new database used.
Before printing the format, the operator will be prompted for the value of the
search field to be found. The software will search the database until a matching
record is found. The matching record will then be used to supply data to all fields
which specify the same database.
For a paragraph field, a database MEMO field can be used on the label by
supplying the name of the MEMO field at the 'Data Field Name' prompt.
When the format is printed the operator will be prompted for the value of the
search field to be found. The software will search the database until a matching
record is found. The matching record will be used to supply data to all fields that
specify the same database.
117
Printed Documentation
There is a method by which you can print out all of the records within a given
database. Refer to the $ALL Function and Tutorial in Appendix C for further
information.
Database System
Search Fields
Trim Trailing
Blanks
Database File
Search Field
Name
Maximum Field
Length
Design/Test
Value
Connection
String
Operator Prompt
Line
Typical Field
Length
Data Field Name
Variable Table
Variable Table
Prompt
Table Name
Prompt Number
Database System
Enter the name of the Database System to use for accessing a database file.
You can choose 'the software's (non-SQL) database' to connect to an internal
dBase database or choose 'Other Database System' to retrieve data from other
types of database files.
Database File
If the field is defined as being from 'the software's (non-SQL) database', then the
name of that database must be entered. A list of the currently available
databases will be displayed in the dialog box. If you have previously entered a
database name, you can use the same name by pressing TAB.
Connection String
To connect to other types of database files, enter the appropriate connection
string to the data source here or you can click the 'Prompt' button to be prompted
to create the connection string. This string is created by first choosing
a Database provider and then creating or choosing a connection to the
database. How this is done will depend on your Database Provider.
Variable Table
With this option enable you will be able to choose which language table will
provide the data to populate the field.
Only enable this option if you wish to print multi-lingual text from a database and
you already setup the appropriate cross reference string.
Table Name
Enter the name of the TABLE containing the data to be printed. This item allows
you to select the appropriate database file table.
Search Fields
The number of fields used to search for a specific record.
Search Field Name
118
Insert
The name of the database field that will be used in searching the database.
When the operator enters a search value, the database will be searched to find
the given value in the Search Field. The corresponding record will then be used
to supply data.
This item must be entered once and may be entered as many as 3 times for each
database used. If you have previously specified a field using the same database,
this item will not appear unless the number of search fields you have specified
was more than 1. The choices of field names appear in the dialog box.
Operator Prompt Line
Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing. The prompt will be
displayed above the data entry area for the field.
Variable Table Prompt
Define the variable table prompt you wish to appear at the print time. The prompt
will be displayed above the data entry area for the field.
Data Field Name
The name of the database field from which this format field will be filled. When
the database record to be used is found, data for this format field will be extracted
from the field matching the Data Field Name. The field name choices are
displayed in the dialog box.
Trim Trailing Blanks
Select Yes to suppress trailing blanks in an extracted database field. Select NO
to use the field as it appears.
Maximum Field Length
Enter the maximum number of characters to extract from a database field. A
value of 0 indicates that all characters should be used.
Typical Field Length
Enter the typical field length of a database field. This will allow fields to be
displayed during label creation using this length. Note that if more characters
exist than that specified for the typical length, all characters up to the maximum
amount specified will be used. A value of 0 indicates that there is no typical field
length.
Prompt Number
If the field's Source of Data is 'When Printed' or 'Database', the software provides
the user with control over the order of data input prompts by allowing the user to
specify/edit the order in which prompts will appear on the screen. This feature will
allow flexibility in designing user input screens
Design/Test Value
119
Printed Documentation
Leave this entry BLANK to use the default screen and field width representation,
or enter a string of characters which more closely represents typical printed data
to help with label design.
BACK to
to TOP
Copied
The data is copied from another field called the copy field. The data in this field
will be the same as the data in the copy field.
Name of Copy Field
If the field is defined as 'Copied', you must select the name of the copy field which
will supply the data for this field. To copy a bar code check digit, choose the bar
code field name with the '@' symbol before it. Available field names are listed in
the dialog box.
@TRUECOUNT
@TRUECOUNT allows you to print the number of batches printed of a label on
that label.. To use @TRUECOUNT, create a Linked or Copied field and select
@TRUECOUNT. The value of @TRUECOUNT is taken from the number of
batches entered by the user on the print request screen.
NOTE: If you later lengthen the copy field, the copied field's length will also
change. If you later erase the copy field, the copied field's data will be changed to
a single 0 bar code.
Link
What is a Linked Field?
Link data from 2-12 fields. This function will allow you to tie together data from
different fields on a format to be printed together in one large field.
Example: You wish to tie together a part number and a serial number into one
field called 'IDENTNO'. To accomplish this you would use Link.
Number of Link Fields
The number of fields that will be combined to form this field. You can choose a
number between 2 and 12.
Link Field n
The source of the data for each linked field you have defined. Choices of existing
fields or special identifiers appear in the dialog box. You may also enter a value
enclosed in double quotes. To link a bar code Function 1, Function 2, Function 3,
or Function 4 character, select the appropriate function character from the list.
120
Insert
NOTE: If the field is a 'When Printed', 'Link' or 'Database' field, the bar code's
interpretation will be displayed as a string of zeroes on the format display.
BACK to TOP
Serialized
The data is read from a Serial File. If the data is changed by incrementing or
decrementing the field, then the next available serial number will be rewritten to
the Serial File.
Serial File Name
The path/name of the Serial File that contains the serial number.
Print Date
The current system date is used to fill the field. Unless a special format is
selected, the date will be printed in the Windows default format. For example, if
Windows default is English date format, the date Jan 01 2003 will print in the form
mm-dd-yy: 01-01-03. To print the date in the European format of dd-mm-yy,
select Special Formatting option 'K' The same can also be achieved by changing
the Windows default date format to be European.
Date Offset
The following three date offsets can be used regardless if the printer has an
internal clock or not. If the printer has a clock and supports date offsets then the
commands are sent to use the printer clock. If date offsets are not supported by
the printer or the printer does not have a clock then the field will be sent as fixed
data.
Year Offset
Enter the offset for the year. If this is set to something other than 0, that value is
added to the current year. To print the current year, leave this value set to 0.
Month Offset
Enter the offset for the month. If this is set to something other than 0, that value is
added to the current month. To print the current month, leave this value set to 0.
Day Offset
Enter the offset for the day. If this is set to something other than 0, that value is
added to the current day. To print the current day, leave this value set to 0.
121
Printed Documentation
Time
The current system time is used to fill the field. The time field will be filled in when
formats are selected for printing.
Time Format
These options appear if a Time Stamp is selected. Enter a custom format string
using any of the following characters to represent the time:
HH - is to designate the hours
MM - is to designate the minutes
SS - is to designate the seconds
AA - is to designate AM or PM
To suppress a leading zero for the Hour, enter one H.
For example, if you do not want to print the leading zero where the hour is a
single digit such as 8 o'clock, enter H:MM:SS to print the time as 8:00:00
Time Offset
The following three time offsets can be used regardless if the printer has an
internal clock or not. If the printer has a clock and supports time offsets then the
commands are sent to use the printer clock. If time offsets are not supported by
the printer or the printer does not have a clock then the field will be sent as fixed
data.
Hour Offset
Enter the offset for the hour. If this is set to something other than 0, that value is
added to the current hour. To print the current hour, leave this value set to 0.
Minute Offset
Enter the offset for the minute. If this is set to something other than 0, that value
is added to the current minute. To print the current minute, leave this value set to
0.
Second Offset
Enter the offset for the second. If this is set to something other than 0, that value
is added to the current second. To print the current second, leave this value set to
0.
122
Insert
Arithmetic
Calculate a value based on expression. You may Add, Subtract, Multiply or
Divide and specify up to 9 decimal places.
Calculation
This option appears if an Arithmetic field is chosen. Enter an arithmetic
expression using the currently defined field names, numeric constants, or a
combination of the two with a mathematic operator. You may also use the
reserved word 'DATE' to perform calculations that require the use of the current
system date. Valid mathematic operators are:
+(addition)
-(subtraction)
*(multiplication)
/(division)
For example, to calculate a 'Sell By' date for a product, you can add a numeric
constant to the system date. Type:
DATE + 90
Decimal Places
Number of decimal places may be defined as 0 to 9 in Arithmetic fields.
NOTE: If the field's Source of Data is 'When Printed' or 'Database', the user has
control over the order of data input prompts. This feature will allow flexibility in
designing user input screen layout.
If the field is a 'When Printed', 'Linked' or 'Database' field, it will be displayed as a
string of question marks or ?????'s on the format display.
BACK to TOP
External File
The data is contained in a separate text file. You will be prompted to specify the
name of the file that contains the text data.
123
Printed Documentation
If a '@' symbol is placed as the first character of the external file, the paragraph
will appear exactly as it was typed. Without the '@' symbol, the paragraph lines
will be based on the number of 'Maximum Lines' and 'Positions Per Line'.
Name When Printed
The name of the paragraph text file. When you print the format, you will be
prompted to enter the name of the text file, including the extension.
Database Indirect
The text file name.txt is read in from a database record. You must specify the
database name and the name of the database field containing the text file to be
used. If this is the first time that this database is being used, the name of the
search field and an operator prompt will be required.
To Print out the entire database, refer to the $ALL function for further information.
EPC Tag
A printer internal font has to be used when using RFID as the source of data for a
text field.
RFID can only be used as a source of data if the printer's RFID reader reads the
RFID tag before a field using the RFID data source is printed.
Read type
Select 'Data Block' to import the EPC programmed on the RFID tag.
Select 'Serial Number' to import the unique factory encoded serial number that is
resident in some tag types.
Number of retries
The number of times the printer will try to read the RFID tag if a read error occurs.
Data Format
Select 'ASCII' to display an ASCII representation of the data stored on the RFID
tag.
124
Insert
Select 'Hexadecimal' to display a Hexadecimal representation of the data stored
on the RFID tag.
Non-EPC Tag
A printer internal font has to be used when using RFID as the source of data for a
text field.
RFID can only be used as a source of data if the printer's RFID reader reads the
RFID tag before a field using the RFID data source is printed.
Read type
Select 'Data Block' to import data from one or more of the memory blocks on
your Non-EPC tag. The software will import all of the data from the selected
memory block(s).
Select 'Serial Number' to import the unique factory encoded serial number that is
resident in some tag types.
Starting Block
Select the starting memory block of the RFID tag from which data will be
imported.
Blocks to read
Select how many memory blocks will be imported and used as a source of
data. For example, selecting starting block 3 and blocks to read 4 will import the
data in memory blocks 3,4,5 and 6.
Number of retries
The number of times the printer will try to read the RFID tag if a read error occurs.
Data Format
Select 'ASCII' to display an ASCII representation of the data stored on the RFID
tag.
Select 'Hexadecimal' to display a Hexadecimal representation of the data stored
on the RFID tag.
VoiceCode
VoiceCode
125
Printed Documentation
VoiceCode has been implemented by the Produce Traceability Initiative (PTI) as 'Voice
Pick Code' as a way to eliminate the need to scan outbound produce cases in operations
that utilize a voice-directed picking system. Version 5.13.0.1635 added a new field type
'VoiceCode' to create the 4 digit code needed to integrate with these voice-directed
picking systems. The data for the VoiceCode is a Global Trade Item Number (GTIN - 14
digits) and a Lot Code (1-20 alphanumeric characters) with an optional Pack Date using
YYMMDD format. These three data components can be any data source supported by
EASYLABEL. VoiceCode is supported in EASYLABEL Gold and Higher (EASYLABEL
Start and EASYLABEL Silver do NOT support VoiceCode).
For more information on the Produce Traceability Initiative or Voice Pick Code, please
visit the Produce Traceability Initiative homepage www.producetraceability.org
To add a VoiceCode field to an existing label format:
1. Open a label format.
2. Click on “Insert” in the Main Menu.
3. Click on “VoiceCode Field...”
4. The “Create VoiceCode Field” window will open. The field options for
VoiceCode fields are similar to other text fields in EASYLABEL.
a) The General tab allows you to specify the fields name, reporting and
printing options.
b) The Source tab allows you to specify the data source(s) for the field.
c) The Parameters tab allows you to specify the size and position of the field
as well as the properties of the font used to create the VoiceCode field.
5. When you are finished, click OK to close the “Create VoiceCode Field” window
and then click on the format to place the field on the label.
Two sample VoiceCode labels, voicecode_caselabel.fmt and voicecode_caselabel_2.fmt,
are provided in EASYLABEL's Examples directory. The Examples directory is found in
same directory that EASYLABEL was installed in.
RFID
Programming EPC Tags
To add an Electronic Product Code (EPC) to your smart label select the RFID
icon from the drawing toolbar
bar.
or choose Insert | RFID Settings from the menu
The first screen of the RFID Wizard will allow you to change the field name, add a
comment, choose to write protect the RFID tag and select the number of
126
Insert
retries. Check the Write to User Memory Blocks check box and/or the Advanced
Passwords and Locking check box to activate these advanced RFID
features. These options are only available if the printer supports it. When you're
finished entering your specifications click 'Next'.
The next screen will allow you to select one of the EPC identity types available
with the selected RFID tag type and display a short description of the selected
identity type.
The next few screens will prompt you for the data necessary to create an EPC. If
you leave a field blank and click 'Next', you may import the data from a field
already on the format or create a data segment and use it as the source of data.
The last screen of the RFID Wizard will present you with a summary of the
information that you entered. Click 'Finish' to accept the information or 'Back' to
make changes. Clicking 'Cancel' will cancel the process of creating an EPC.
Programming Non-EPC Tags
To program a smart label select the RFID icon from the drawing toolbar
choose 'Insert'| 'RFID Settings' from the menu bar.
or
The first screen of the RFID Wizard will allow you to change the field name
and add a comment. Check the Write to User Memory Blocks check box and/or
the Advanced Passwords and Locking check box to activate these advanced
RFID features. These options are only available if the printer supports it. When
you're finished entering your specifications click 'Next'.
The next screen will present you with a table of the RFID tag's memory
blocks. The number of blocks that may be used to input data and other available
options depend on the RFID tag type. With most RFID tags you will be able to
enter data into each memory block, choose to permanently lock a memory block
and select the number of retries. If you select a blank block and click 'Next', you
may import the data from a field already on the format or create a data segment
and use it as the source of data. When selecting a source of data with a greater
length than the data allowed in a memory block and the next memory block is
empty, the rest of the data will be imported into that memory block. If the next
memory block is not empty and the data to be imported is too long to fit into a
single memory block, you will not be able to import the data.
After you have entered all the necessary data into the table, click 'Finish'. The
RFID Wizard will close and at print time the data you entered will be encoded on
the RFID tag.
127
Printed Documentation
128
Tools
Print Format Definition
Print Format
Definitions
Printer Setup
Destination
Output to File
Top Margin
Left Margin
Font Setup
This report, produced in hard copy form, is a listing of the format specifications,
as well as specification data for each field defined on the format.
Print Format Definitions
Open the format that you want to print definitions for and choose Tools | Print
Format Definition from the menu bar.
Next, you are presented with the printing options for printing format definitions.
Each of the Format Definition Print option items are described in the following
section:
Destination
Please select the destination for the report. The selections are:
•Printer -- sends the report to a printer
•Printer Data File -- creates a file which includes printer control characters
•Text File -- creates a fixed-space ASCII text file.
Output to File
Define the Name/Path of the file to be created when Printer Data File or Text File
is selected under Destination.
Font Setup
Select No to use the default printer font. Select Yes for the option to use
a different font for this report.
Printer Setup
Select No to use the current default printer options. Select Yes to bring up the
"Windows Print Setup" box. This allows the user to select and configure which
printer to send the format definition to.
Top Margin
Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in
inches or millimeters.
Left Margin
Enter the HORIZONTAL OFFSET of the print image area from the left edge of the
paper in inches or millimeters.
129
Printed Documentation
BACK to TOP
Cross Hairs
Using the Extended Cross Hairs can make field placement much easier. A thin
line is displayed vertically and horizontally on the format showing exactly where
the pointer is at all times. This allows easier use of the rulers to precisely place
your field.
Align
Align Left
To Left Align multiple fields on a format, select the relevant fields, and chose the
Align Left function.
Center Horizontally
Used to precisely align the Horizontal Center Line of two or more fields on a
format. Choose the relevant fields and select the Center Horizontally function.
This will align the Horizontal Center Lines of the selected objects.
Align Right
To Right Align multiple fields on a format, select the relevant fields, and chose the
Align Right function.
Space Horizontally
To precisely space multiple fields horizontally on a format choose the relevant
fields and select the Space Horizontally function.
Align Up
Select align up to position fields to be parallel with the lowest field on the format.
Center Vertically
130
Tools
Used to precisely align the Vertical Center Line of two or more fields on a
format. Choose the relevant fields and select the Center Vertically function. This
will align the Vertical Center Lines of the selected objects.
Align Down
Select align down to position fields to be parallel with the lowest field on the
format.
Space Vertically
To precisely space multiple fields vertically on a format choose the relevant fields
and select the Space Vertically function.
131
Printing
Printers
Adding a Printer
To Add a New Printer, choose Settings | Printer Configuration from the menu bar
or select the printer configuration icon
from the Function Toolbar. Then click
the add printer icon
See Printer Setup page for your printer for more information.
Deleting a Printer
To delete a printer, choose Settings | Printer Configuration from the menu bar or
select the printer configuration icon
from the Function Toolbar.
Next select the printer that you wish to delete from the list of Currently Defined
printers and click the Delete button
.
Changing an Existing Printer
To change current printer configuration options, choose Settings | Printer
Configuration from the menu bar or select the printer configuration icon
from
the Function Toolbar on the main screen, double-click on the printer that you
want to change or highlight it and click the Change Printer Configuration icon or
choose Edit | Change from the menu
Avery Dennison
Avery Dennison Setup
Printer Name
Type of Port
Printer
Description
Use Hardware
Handshake
Printer
Manufacturer
Printer Model
Baud Rate
Port
Concurrent
Set Printer
Cutter
Calendar Option
Access
Darkness
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
133
Printed Documentation
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Use Hardware Handshake
Select 'Yes' to use a hardware handshake. Select 'No' to use an XON/XOFF
handshake.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Cutter
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
• Do not cut
• Cut after each Format
• Cut after each Batch
• Cut after each Job
Calendar
Calendar Option
Select 'Yes' if your printer has the calendar option (clock chip) installed. This will
allow formats that contain date/time fields to be handled internally in the printer
134
Printing
and be updated to reflect the current date/time when the label is printed. Select
'No' to download the date/time from the program.
Set Printer Darkness
Select 'Yes' to allow software to set printer darkness. This will override any
darkness setting defined in the printer. Select 'No' to use printers darkness
setting.
BACK to TOP
Avery Dennison Cables
9-9 Pin Cable Configuration
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
9-9 Pin Cable Configuration
9 Pin on Printer
Printer
9 Pin on PC
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
135
Printed Documentation
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
BACK to TOP
136
25 Pin on PC
Printing
cab
A Series, M Series and Mach
A Series, M Series and Mach Setup
Printer Name
Port
Cutter
Pause Before
Printing
Printer
Description
Concurrent
Access
Set Printer
Clock
Standard
Code Size
Printer
Manufacturer
RS485
Direct Print
Download
Graphics
Format
Printer Model
Type of Port
Printer
Address
Darkness
Adjustment
Offset
Adjustment
Size of Gap
Print Mode
Baud Rate
Label Buffer
Setting
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
137
Printed Documentation
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
RS485
Select 'Yes' if using an RS 485 protocol, otherwise select 'No'.
Printer Address
Used when the RS485 option is set to 'Yes'. Enter the sequential number or
network ID of the printer (from 1 to 26) within the list of printers on this port.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
NOTE: Always make sure the Baud Rate is the same as your printer setup.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Set Printer Clock
Select 'Yes' to set the printer clock to match the computer clock. Select 'No' to
NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock.
Direct Print
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
138
Printing
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Darkness Adjustment
Adjustment
Enter a number from -4 to +4 to adjust the base level of print darkness. Negative
numbers make the print lighter.
Offset Adjustment
Adjust the form edge offset. Offset adjustment is the number from -99 to +999
needed to change the formats starting print position. Negative numbers will move
the starting position down from the top of the format. Positive numbers will move
the starting position up towards the top of the format.
Pause Before Printing
Select 'Yes' to pause the printer before printing each job. Pausing the printer is a
safety precaution that protects the operator when an applicator is being
used. Select 'No' to print each job without pausing the printer.
Standard Code Sizes
Select Standard Code Sizes to use standard (SCx) symbol sizes for UPC/EAN
bar codes, otherwise leave blank. Deselect Standard Code Sizes to print UPC
and EAN symbologies with user-defined values. Selecting Standard Code Sizes
allow you to print UPC and EAN symbologies using the European standard code
sizes. You are also given the option of choosing from a list of available sizes on
the bar code specification screen.
Download Graphics Format
Use IMG for traditional imaging, PCX for higher quality imaging. IMG processing
is faster, whereas PCX processing produces a higher quality image. This option
only applies when Enhanced Image Processing is selected in the Program
Options.
Print Mode
The Print Mode option appears on the Format Specification screen and allows
the user to select the desired mode of printing: Batch, Peel-Off, or Tear-Off.
Size of Gap
Entering the size of the gap between the labels allows for more accurate forms
control.
139
Printed Documentation
Label Buffer Setting
Allows the selection of multiple/single buffer modes. By selecting single buffer
mode, labels with date and/or time fields will be updated at the time they are
printed. Using multiple buffer mode may be faster, but the date or time on the
labels may not be updated as often.
BACK to TOP
A Series, M Series and Mach Cables
9-9 Pin Cable Configuration
9 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
A Series, M Series and Mach Notes
RS - 232
Communications
Using the Cutter
Maxicode
Cut Offset
Using an
Optional
Keyboard
Disable Reprint
140
Flash Memory
Card Downloads
Printing
RS - 232 Communications
For RS-232 Serial Communications:
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: RTS/CTS (on Printer)
Character Set: Windows 1252 (on Printer)
Using the Cutter
On the format specification screen, you have the ability to cut after each format,
cut after each batch or cut after each job if the printer has a cutter installed.
When selecting to cut after each format, an additional screen item 'Cut Offset'
allows you to specify where the label should be cut.
Maxicode
When using Maxicode with Apollo printers that support it, data must be entered in
the following format:
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
Where:
CCC = Country Code
SSS = Service Code
ZZZZZXXXX = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
(Must be enclosed in # signs)
data... = Alphanumeric Data (maximum length: 84 characters)
141
Printed Documentation
Example:
123999#442120798#This is an example.
Flash Memory Card Downloads
Select Memory Card Download to mark this format to be intended for download to
the memory card.
Note that some software features will not be accessible during label creation due
to printer and memory card limitations.
Cut Offset
Enter the distance from the point at which the label stops printing and the point at
which the label is to be cut in hundredths of inches.
This value should be approximately .60". To make TWO cuts per label, enter two
offsets separated by a comma. For example, to cut a reflective marking out of a
label, the first offset should be approximately .60" and the second offset should
the amount of space between the end of the first label and the start of the second
label.
Using an Optional Keyboard
An optional keyboard can be attached to the printer. This allows faster input for
variable data entry for formats stored on the memory card that require operator
input. Please see the printer Operators Manual for additional information.
Disable Reprint
Select Disable Reprint to prevent the printer from reprinting the last label format
that was printed.
BACK to TOP
Apollo
Apollo Setup
Printer Name
Port
142
Printer
Description
Concurrent
Printer
Manufacturer
RS 485
Printer Model
Type of Port
Printer
Baud Rate
Printing
Access
Direct Print
Cutter
Pause Before
Printing
Standard
Code Size
Set Printer
Clock
Download
Graphics
Format
Address
Darkness
Adjustment
Offset
Adjustment
Print Mode
Size of Gap
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
143
Printed Documentation
RS 485
Select RS 485 if using an RS 485 protocol, otherwise leave blank. The optional
RS-232 to RS-485 adapter allows for up to 26 Apollo printers to be connected to
the port. Accessing individual printers is accomplished by assigning each
connected printer its own network address from the printer's front panel. Each
printer is then configured to match this address. At print time, simply choose
which printer in the print screen to send the job to.
Printer Address
Used when the RS485 option is set to 'Yes'. Enter the sequential number or
network ID of the printer (from 1 to 26) within the list of printers on this port.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
NOTE: Always make sure the Baud Rate is the same as your printer setup.
Direct Print
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Set Printer Clock
Select 'Yes' to set the printer clock to match the computer clock. Select 'No' to
NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock.
Darkness Adjustment
Enter a number from -3 to +3 to adjust the base level of print darkness. Negative
numbers make the print lighter.
144
Printing
Offset Adjustment
Adjust the form edge offset. Offset adjustment is the number from -99 to +999
needed to change the formats starting print position. Negative numbers will move
the starting position down from the top of the format. Positive numbers will move
the starting position up towards the top of the format.
Pause Before Printing
Select 'Yes' to pause the printer before printing each job. Pausing the printer is a
safety precaution that protects the operator when an applicator is being
used. Select 'No' to print each job without pausing the printer.
Standard Code Sizes
Select Standard Code Sizes to use standard (SCx) symbol sizes for UPC/EAN
bar codes, otherwise leave blank. Deselect Standard Code Sizes to print UPC
and EAN symbologies with user-defined values. Selecting Standard Code Sizes
allow you to print UPC and EAN symbologies using the European standard code
sizes. You are also given the option of choosing from a list of available sizes on
the bar code specification screen.
Download Graphics Format
Use IMG for traditional imaging, PCX for higher quality imaging. IMG processing
is faster, whereas PCX processing produces a higher quality image. This option
only applies when Enhanced Image Processing is selected in the Program
Options.
Print Mode
The Print Mode option appears on the Format Specification screen and allows
the user to select the desired mode of printing: Batch, Peel-Off, or Tear-Off.
Size of Gap
Entering the size of the gap between the labels allows for more accurate forms
control.
BACK to TOP
Apollo Cables
9-25 Pin Cable
Cable
Configuration
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
RS - 485 Cable
Configuration
9 - Pin Cable Configuration
145
Printed Documentation
25 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
146
25 Pin on PC
Printing
RS - 485 Cable Configuration
BACK to TOP
Apollo Notes
RS - 232
Communications
RS - 485
Communications
Using the Cutter
Maxicode
Memory Card
Downloads
Cut Offset
Using an
Optional
Keyboard
Disable Reprint
147
Printed Documentation
RS - 232 Communications
For RS-232 Serial Communications:
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: RTS/CTS (on Printer)
Character Set: Windows 1252 (on Printer)
RS - 485 Communications
For RS-485 Serial Communications:
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Character Set: Windows 1252 (on Printer)
Network Address: Printer and Software MUST match
In order to daisy-chain Apollo printers, the PC must have an RS-485 converter,
as supplied by your reseller.
The Apollo printer network can support up to 26 printers.
Using the Cutter
On the format specification screen, you have the ability to cut after each format,
cut after each batch or cut after each job if the printer has a cutter installed.
When selecting to cut after each format, an additional screen item 'Cut Offset'
allows you to specify where the label should be cut.
Maxicode
148
Printing
When using Maxicode with Apollo printers that support it, data must be entered in
the following format:
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
Where:
CCC = Country Code
SSS = Service Code
ZZZZZXXXX = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
(Must be enclosed in # signs)
data... = Alphanumeric Data (maximum length: 84 characters)
Example:
123999#442120798#This is an example.
Memory Card Downloads
Select Memory Card Download to mark this format to be intended for download to
the memory card.
Note that some software features will not be accessible during label creation due
to printer and memory card limitations.
Cut Offset
Enter the distance from the point at which the label stops printing and the point at
which the label is to be cut in hundredths of inches.
This value should be approximately .60". To make TWO cuts per label, enter two
offsets separated by a comma. For example, to cut a reflective marking out of a
label, the first offset should be approximately .60" and the second offset should
the amount of space between the end of the first label and the start of the second
label.
Using an Optional Keyboard
149
Printed Documentation
An optional keyboard can be attached to the printer using a special keyboard
adaptor. This allows faster input for variable data entry for formats stored on the
memory card that require operator input. Please see the printer Operators
Manual for additional information.
Disable Reprint
Select Disable Reprint to prevent the printer from reprinting the last label format
that was printed.
BACK to TOP
Memory Card Functions
Using a Memory
Card
Number of
Formats
Format
Store As
Quantity
Batch Size
Printer
Printer Number
Output File
Downloading to a
PCMCIA Drive
Using a Memory Card
When a memory card is inserted in the printer, it is automatically detected by the
printer. Refer to your printer manual for information on properly installing a
memory card.
From the Print screen, you can choose to have formats sent directly to the printer
or downloaded to the memory card for later use. A format can also be printed to a
file for programming purposes. Within the Print Queue, formats can be erased
from the printer's memory card, a directory of formats on the card can be viewed
or the memory card can be formatted.
To download to the memory card, select Tools | Download Format to Memory
Card from the Print screen.
Store As
Enter the name under which the format will be stored on the memory card. To
have this format selected automatically whenever the printer is powered on, use
the name 'Default'.
If the format is called 'Default', then this label will be printed automatically each
time the printer is turned on.
Quantity
Quantity
150
Printing
Specify how the number of labels to be printed is set.
•
•
•
Indefinite - Printer prints indefinitely
Printer Prompts - Printer prompts for quantity to be printed.
Fixed - Printer prints a previously specified quantity.
Batch Size
Enter the number of identical copies of each format you want printed. When this
format is stored on the memory card, then selected for printing, the same number
of identical labels will print each time.
This screen item will only appear if there is an incrementing field on the label.
Number of Formats
Enter the number of formats you want printed. When this format is stored on the
memory card, then selected for printing, the same number of labels will print each
time.
This screen item will only appear if a Fixed quantity was chosen.
Printer Number
Select the number of the printer to use in order to print the format. You can also
choose to print your format to a file.
Output File
Enter the name of the name of an output file for the format. Entering the name of
an existing file will append new information to previous information. Entering a
new filename will create a new file.
Downloading to a PCMCIA Drive
This option is found at the print screen under the "Tools" menu. This allows you
to send a format to a memory card in a PCMCIA drive instead of an Apollo printer.
Formats can also be written directly to a PCMCIA drive attached to your
computer. The PCMCIA card, with the stored formats, can then be used in the
Apollo printer for future off line printing. If you have a PCMCIA slot that acts like a
drive, you can choose to send the format to the PCMCIA drive by simply
designating the drive letter of the PCMCIA card. This allows formats to be sent to
PC cards without having a printer directly attached to your PC. However, for
formats that use TrueType fonts, graphics, database files or any external file, you
must have a printer attached directly to your PC and download the format to the
memory card in the printer.
151
Printed Documentation
Format Card
The format card option allows you to format a memory card. Any formats that are
already stored on the card will be erased. When formatting a card, the name
'Apollo' is automatically assigned to the card. You may specify a different name
for the card by typing a new name in 'Name' dialog box.
Delete File
The delete file option allows you to delete a file (such as a graphic, a database or
a format) from the card. Choose a format name from the available list of stored
formats, then click on the Delete File button.
A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the file for deletion. Choose OK to
delete the file from the memory card or choose Cancel if you do not want to
delete the file.
Details
You can locate the Details button by entering the Print Queue, highlighting an
Apollo printer from the list, clicking Memory Card and then Details. You will
receive the message "Accessing Memory Card. Please wait..." The software will
read the contents of the card and present the user with details on the files stored
there including the name, date, available memory and so on.
Memory Card
Card Limitations
Long filenames for database and serial files are not supported when using the
Apollo printer and downloading them to the PCMCIA memory cards.
The table below displays the features that are available when using the Apollo
memory card:
Field Type
Type
Bar Codes
Source of Data
Fixed
Database
Copied
Link
When Printed
Text
152
Fixed
Options
Incrementation/Decrementation
Character Field Types ONLY
Incrementation/Decrementation
Incrementation/Decrementation
Data Type Validation: numeric,
alpha, alphanumeric, date,
upper case characters, upper
case alphabetic, upper case
alphanumeric
Incrementation/Decrementation
Incrementation/Decrementation
Printing
When Printed
Database
Copied
Link
Serialized
Date
Graphics
Lines
Rectangle
Ovals
Polygons
Polygons
Time
Arithmetic
Fixed
Incrementation/Decrementation
Character Field Types ONLY
Incrementation/Decrementation
Incrementation/Decrementation
Numeric
Incrementation/Decrementation
ONLY
Printer's Internal Calendar is
used.
Printer's Internal Clock is used.
BACK to TOP
Gemini
Gemini, Gemini 2 and A2 Gemini Setup
Printer Name
Printer Model
Direct Print
Printer Description
Type of Port
Darkness Adjustment
Printer Manufacturer
Port
Paper/Ribbon Out
Printer Name
Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
153
Printed Documentation
Printer Model
Select the model of printer to be used.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached. For Parallel printing, available
choices are LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3.
Direct Print
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Darkness Adjustment
Enter a number from -4 to 4 to adjust the base level of print darkness. Negative
numbers make the print lighter.
Paper/Ribbon Out
While printing, a situation may occur where the Gemini will run out of label or
ribbon stock. When this occurs, a message dialog box will appear explaining that
there is an error on the printer. The type of error condition and the number of
unprinted labels will be displayed along with the following message:
Please correct the printer error then Press OK.
After replacing the paper or ribbon stock, click OK. The printer will automatically
resume printing.
BACK to TOP
Gemini Notes
Format Specification
Options
Format Specification Options
154
Paper/Ribbon Out
Condition
True Type Fonts
Fonts
Printing
Select No if transfer printing with a ribbon. Select Yes if printing on thermal paper
without a ribbon.
Paper/Ribbon Out Condition
While printing, a situation may occur where the Gemini will run out of label or
ribbon stock. When this occurs, a message dialog box will appear explaining that
there is an error on the printer. The type of error condition and the number of
unprinted labels will be displayed along with the following message:
Please correct the printer error then Press OK.
After replacing the paper or ribbon stock, click OK. The printer will automatically
resume printing.
True Type Fonts
TrueType fonts on the Gemini printers are supported on the Text Field definition
screen.
C.Itoh
C.Itoh Setup
Printer Name
Printer
Description
Printer
Manufacturer
Printer Model
Type of Port
Port
Baud Rate
Concurrent
Access
Use Hardware
Handshake
Direct Print
Device Attached
Printer Address
Printer Memory
Cutter
Set Printer Clock
Darkness
Adjustment
Offset
Adjustment
Initial Label Feed
Printer Name
155
Printed Documentation
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer
Printer Model
Select the model of printer to be used
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Use
Use Hardware Handshake
Select 'Yes' to use a hardware handshake. Select 'No' to use an XON/XOFF
handshake.
Direct Print
156
Printing
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Device Attached
Enter the type of device that is attached to the port. The choices are Printer,
Western Telematic 4-way Switch, 8-way Switch, or 16-way Switch.
Printer Address
When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box,
enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to.
Printer Memory
Select the corresponding memory option if a memory card or cartridge has been
installed in the printer.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Set Printer Clock
Select 'Yes' to set the printer clock to match the computer clock. Select 'No' to
NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock.
Darkness Adjustment
Enter a number from -3 to +3 to adjust the base level of print darkness. Negative
numbers make the print lighter.
Offset Adjustment
Enter a number from -99 to 999 to adjust the form edge offset. This allows you to
compensate for slight mechanical differences between printers. This may also be
accomplished with settings on the printer's front panel.
157
Printed Documentation
Initial Label Feed
Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed. Allowing an
initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die-cut label stock
BACK to TOP
C.Itoh Cables
9-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41 - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox
Switchbox - 161a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switch Box Printer
Assignments
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41, 41a,
161a Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c Cable
Configuration
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
158
9 Pin on PC
Printing
25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
Western Telematic Switch Boxes
You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC
by using a Western Telematic CAS-41 4-way switch box, a Western Telematic
CAS-81 8-way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS-161A 16-way switch box.
These switching devices may be obtained from:
WESTERN TELEMATIC, INC.
5 Sterling
Irvine, CA 92718 USA
714.586.9950 • 800.854.7226
Fax: 714.583.9514
www.wti.com
If you are using a Western Telematic Switch, formats that contain TrueType font
text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western
Telematic Switch Box. The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to
be downloaded. When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western
Telematic Switch, you must download the font as a graphic.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41 - Dip Switches
159
Printed Documentation
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41a - Dip Switches
Western Telematic
Telematic Switchbox - 81c - Dip Switches
The CAS - 81C 8-way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10
position Dip Switches as follows:
NOTE: When purchasing the CAS-81c 8-way switchbox, it must be equipped
with firmware version 1.0a.
Western Telematic
Telematic Switchbox - 161a - Dip Switches
160
Printing
Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments
If a third CAS-41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above, printer
assignments would be 9 through 12. The same would be true for the CAS-161A,
where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16, the second switch
box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected, it
would go to Printers 33 through 48.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41, 41a, 161a Cable Configuration
161
Printed Documentation
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c Cable Configuration
BACK to TOP
C.Itoh Notes
MaxiCode
MaxiCode
MaxiCode
162
RS - 232 Communications
Printing
When using MaxiCode with C.Itoh printers that support it, data must be entered in
the following format:
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
Where:
CCC = Country Code
SSS = Service Code
ZZZZZXXXX = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
(Must be enclosed in # signs)
data... = Alphanumeric Data (maximum length: 84 characters)
Example:
123999#442120798#This is an example.
RSRS-232 Communications
•
•
•
•
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: RTS/CTS (on Printer)
BACK to TOP
Citizen
Citizen Setup
Printer Name
Printer
Description
Type of Port
Port
Baud Rate
Cutter
Cutter
Darkness
Adjustment
Set Printer Clock
Printer
Manufacturer
Concurrent
Access
Printer Memory
Offset
Adjustment
Printer Model
Use Hardware
Handshake
Direct Print
Initial Label Feed
Printer Name
163
Printed Documentation
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer
Printer Model
Select the model of printer to be used
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Use Hardware Handshake
Select 'Yes' to use a hardware handshake. Select 'No' to use an XON/XOFF
handshake.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
Device Attached
164
Printing
Enter the type of device that is attached to the port. The choices are Printer,
Western Telematic 4-way Switch, 8-way Switch, or 16-way Switch.
Printer Address
When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box,
enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to.
Direct Print
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Printer Memory
If a memory cartridge is installed, select the option corresponding to the memory
module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot. A memory module is required in
the Prodigy and Prodigy Plus printers to store picture information and TrueType
fonts. If the memory module is not present, the printer will still work, but any
graphic that is downloaded, will not be printed.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Set Printer Clock
Select 'Yes' to set the printer clock to match the computer clock. Select 'No' to
NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock.
Darkness Adjustment
Adjustment
Enter a number from -3 to +3 to adjust the base level of print darkness. Negative
numbers make the print lighter.
Offset Adjustment
165
Printed Documentation
Enter a number from -99 to 999 to adjust the form edge offset. This allows you to
compensate for slight mechanical differences between printers. This may also be
accomplished with settings on the printer's front panel.
Initial Label Feed
Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed. Allowing an
initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die-cut label stock
BACK to TOP
Citizen Cables
9-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41, 41a,
161a Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switch Box Printer
Assignments
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
Printer
166
9 Pin on PC
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41 - Dip
Switches
Western
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 161a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c Cable
Configuration
Printing
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
Western Telematic Switch Boxes
You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC
by using a Western Telematic CAS-41 4-way switch box, a Western Telematic
167
Printed Documentation
CAS-81 8-way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS-161A 16-way switch box.
These switching devices may be obtained from:
WESTERN TELEMATIC, INC.
5 Sterling
Irvine, CA 92718 USA
714.586.9950 • 800.854.7226
Fax: 714.583.9514
www.wti.com
If you are using a Western Telematic Switch, formats that contain TrueType font
text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western
Telematic Switch Box. The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to
be downloaded. When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western
Telematic Switch, you must download the font as a graphic.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41 - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41a - Dip Switches
Switches
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c - Dip Switches
The CAS - 81C 8-way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10
position Dip Switches as follows:
168
Printing
NOTE: When purchasing the CAS-81c 8-way switchbox, it must be equipped
with firmware version 1.0a.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 161a - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments
If a third CAS-41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above, printer
assignments would be 9 through 12. The same would be true for the CAS-161A,
169
Printed Documentation
where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16, the second switch
box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected, it
would go to Printers 33 through 48.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41, 41a, 161a Cable
Cable Configuration
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c Cable Configuration
BACK to TOP
170
Printing
Citizen Notes
RS - 232 Communications
MaxiCode
RSRS-232 Communications
•
•
•
•
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: RTS/CTS (on Printer)
MaxiCode
When using MaxiCode with Citizen printers that support it, data must be entered
in the following format:
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
Where:
CCC = Country Code
SSS = Service Code
ZZZZZXXXX = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
(Must be enclosed in # signs)
data... = Alphanumeric Data (maximum length: 84 characters)
Example:
123999#442120798#This is an example.
BACK to TOP
Datamax
Datamax Setup
Printer Name
Printer
Description
Type of Port
Port
Printer
Manufacturer
Concurrent
Access
Printer Model
Baud Rate
171
Printed Documentation
Device Attached
Printer Address
Cutter
Set Printer Clock
Initial Label Feed
Optimize
DataMatrix
Direct Print
Darkness
Adjustment
Optimize QR
Code
Printer Memory
Offset
Adjustment
RFID Enabled
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the model of printer to be used
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The choices are Serial, Parallel,
Network, IP or USB. Depending on the printer selected, the USB option may not
be available since not all printers support the USB interface.
Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
172
Printing
Use Hardware Handshake
Select 'Yes' to use a hardware handshake. Select 'No' to use an XON/XOFF
handshake.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
Device Attached
Enter the type of device that is attached to the port. The choices are Printer,
Western Telematic 4-way Switch, 8-way Switch, or 16-way Switch.
Printer Address
When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box,
enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to.
Direct Print
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Printer Memory
If a memory cartridge is installed, select the option corresponding to the memory
module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot. A memory module is required in
the Prodigy and Prodigy Plus printers to store picture information and TrueType
fonts. If the memory module is not present, the printer will still work, but any
graphic that is downloaded, will not be printed.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Set Printer Clock
173
Printed Documentation
Select 'Yes' to set the printer clock to match the computer clock. Select 'No' to
NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock.
Darkness Adjustment
Enter a number from -3 to +3 to adjust the base level of print darkness. Negative
numbers make the print lighter.
Offset Adjustment
Enter a number from -99 to 999 to adjust the form edge offset. This allows you to
compensate for slight mechanical differences between printers. This may also be
accomplished with settings on the printer's front panel.
Initial Label Feed
Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed. Allowing an
initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die-cut label stock.
Optimize DataMatrix
Select 'Yes' to optimize the DataMatrix 2D symbology. If the printer supports this
symbology internally (has correct firmware version), it will print much quicker.
Select 'No' to produce DataMatrix as a graphic. This is supported for all printers
but prints slower.
Optimize QR Code
Select 'Yes' to optimize the QR-Code 2D symbology. If the printer supports this
symbology internally (has correct firmware version), it will print much quicker.
Select 'No' to produce QR-Code as a graphic. This is supported for all printers but
prints slower.
RFID Enabled
Select 'Yes' if the printer has RFID capability.
BACK to TOP
174
Printing
Datamax Cables
9-25 Pin
Pin Cable
Configuration
Ovation! and Ovation! 2:
9-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox
Switchbox - 41a Changing Monitor Pins
Western Telematic
Switch Box Printer
Assignments
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41 - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41, 41a,
161a Cable
Configuration
9-9 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 161a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c Cable
Configuration
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
175
Printed Documentation
9-9 Pin Cable Configuration
9 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
Ovation! and Ovation! 2: 9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
176
9 Pin on PC
Printing
NOTE: Communications for the Datamax Ovation! and Ovation! 2 must be set by
a printer software command. Please refer to the printer's user manual for more
information.
Ovation! and Ovation! 2: 2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
NOTE: Communications for the Datamax Ovation! and Ovation! 2 must be set by
a printer software command. Please refer to the printer's user manual for more
information.
Western Telematic Switch Boxes
177
Printed Documentation
You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC
by using a Western Telematic CAS-41 4-way switch box, a Western Telematic
CAS-81 8-way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS-161A 16-way switch box.
These switching devices may be obtained from:
WESTERN TELEMATIC, INC.
5 Sterling
Irvine, CA 92718 USA
714.586.9950 • 800.854.7226
Fax: 714.583.9514
www.wti.com
If you are using a Western Telematic Switch, formats that contain TrueType font
text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western
Telematic Switch Box. The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to
be downloaded. When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western
Telematic Switch, you must download the font as a graphic.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41 - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41a - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switchbox
Switchbox - 41a - Changing Monitor Pins
178
Printing
The four internal jumpers located on the CAS-41A circuit board are used to
switch the CAS-41A to monitor pin 4 (Request to Send) instead of pin 20 (factory
setting). To switch monitor pins, proceed as follows:
CAUTION
CAUTION:
ION Make certain to power off the CAS-41A and disconnect the power
cable before attempting to remove the instrument
cover.
1. Remove the four screws that secure the CAS41A's plastic cover to the chassis. Remove
the cover from the chassis.
2. Locate the jumpers on the CAS-41A circuit
board. As you face the instrument back panel,
the jumpers are located in the lower left hand
corner of the circuit board. Move the jumpers
as shown to monitor pin4.
3. Replace the plastic cover on the CAS-41A
chassis. Reinstall the four screws that secure
the cover to the chassis. Reconnect the
power cable and switch the power on.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c - Dip Switches
The CAS - 81C 8-way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10
position Dip Switches as follows:
NOTE: When purchasing the CAS-81c 8-way switchbox, it must be equipped
with firmware version 1.0a.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 161a - Dip Switches
179
Printed Documentation
Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments
If a third CAS-41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above, printer
assignments would be 9 through 12. The same would be true for the CAS-161A,
where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16, the second switch
box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected, it
would go to Printers 33 through 48.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41, 41a, 161a Cable Configuration
180
Printing
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c Cable Configuration
BACK to TOP
Datamax Notes
RS - 232 Communications
Communications
MaxiCode
181
Printed Documentation
RSRS-232 Communications
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: RTS/CTS (on Printer)
•
•
•
•
MaxiCode
When using Maxicode with Datamax printers that support it, data must be
entered in the following format:
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
Where:
CCC = Country Code
SSS = Service Code
ZZZZZXXXX = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
(Must be enclosed in # signs)
data... = Alphanumeric Data (maximum length: 84 characters)
Example:
123999#442120798#This is an example.
BACK to TOP
Fargo
Fargo Setup
Printer Name
Printer
Description
Type of Port
Port
Baud Rate
Direct Print
Darkness
Adjustment
Cutter
Printer Name
182
Printer
Manufacturer
Use Hardware
Handshake
Device Attached
Offset
Adjustment
Printer Model
Concurrent
Access
Printer Memory
Initial Label Feed
Printing
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the model of printer to be used
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Use Hardware Handshake
Select 'Yes' to use a hardware handshake. Select 'No' to use an XON/XOFF
handshake.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Baud Rate
Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
Device Attached
183
Printed Documentation
Enter the type of device that is attached to the port. The choices are Printer,
Western Telematic 4-way Switch, 8-way Switch, or 16-way Switch.
Printer Address
When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box,
enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to.
Direct Print
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Printer Memory
If a memory cartridge is installed, select the option corresponding to the memory
module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot. A memory module is required in
the Prodigy and Prodigy Plus printers to store picture information and TrueType
fonts. If the memory module is not present, the printer will still work, but any
graphic that is downloaded, will not be printed.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Darkness Adjustment
Enter a number from -3 to +3 to adjust the base level of print darkness. Negative
numbers make the print lighter.
Offset Adjustment
Enter a number from -99 to 999 to adjust the form edge offset. This allows you to
compensate for slight mechanical differences between printers. This may also be
accomplished with settings on the printer's front panel.
Initial Label Feed
184
Printing
Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed. Allowing an
initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die-cut label stock
BACK to TOP
Fargo Cables
9-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Ovation! and Ovation! 2:
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41, 41a,
161a Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41 - Dip
Switches
Western
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 161a - Dip
Switches
Ovation!
Ovation! and Ovation! 2:
9-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switch Box Printer
Assignments
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c Cable
Configuration
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
185
Printed Documentation
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
Ovation! and Ovation! 2: 9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
186
9 Pin on PC
Printing
NOTE: Communications for the Datamax Ovation! and Ovation! 2 must be set by
a printer software command. Please refer to the printer's user manual for more
information.
Ovation! and Ovation! 2: 2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
NOTE: Communications for the Datamax Ovation! and Ovation! 2 must be set by
a printer software command. Please refer to the printer's user manual for more
information.
187
Printed Documentation
Western Telematic Switch Boxes
You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC
by using a Western Telematic CAS-41 4-way switch box, a Western Telematic
CAS-81 8-way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS-161A 16-way switch box.
These switching devices may be obtained from:
WESTERN TELEMATIC, INC.
5 Sterling
Irvine, CA 92718 USA
714.586.9950 • 800.854.7226
Fax: 714.583.9514
www.wti.com
If you are using a Western Telematic Switch, formats that contain TrueType font
text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western
Telematic Switch Box. The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to
be downloaded. When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western
Telematic Switch, you must download the font as a graphic.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41 - Dip
Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41a - Dip Switches
188
Printing
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c - Dip Switches
The CAS - 81C 8-way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10
position Dip Switches as follows:
NOTE: When purchasing the CAS-81c 8-way switchbox, it must be equipped
with firmware version 1.0a.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 161a - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments
189
Printed Documentation
If a third CAS-41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above, printer
assignments would be 9 through 12. The same would be true for the CAS-161A,
where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16, the second switch
box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected, it
would go to Printers 33 through 48.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41, 41a, 161a Cable Configuration
190
Printing
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c Cable Configuration
BACK to TOP
Fargo Notes
RS - 232 Communications
MaxiCode
191
Printed Documentation
RSRS-232 Communications
•
•
•
•
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: RTS/CTS (on Print
MaxiCode
When using MaxiCode with Fargo printers that support it, data must be entered in
the following format:
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
Where:
CCC = Country Code
SSS = Service Code
ZZZZZXXXX = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
(Must be enclosed in # signs)
data... = Alphanumeric Data (maximum length: 84 characters)
Example:
123999#442120798#This is an example.
BACK to TOP
HP
HP Setup
Printer
Printer Name
Printer Model
Printer Description
Type of Port
Direct Print
Printer Memory
Printer Manufacturer
Port
Upper Case
International
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
192
Printing
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the model of printer to be used.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached
Direct Print
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Printer Memory
Indicate how much memory or whether an additional memory card or cartridge is
installed in the printer. Select S to indicate that the printer has STANDARD
memory (512K) installed. Select E to indicate that the printer has EXTENDED
memory installed (more that 512K).
Upper Case International
Deselect to disable uppercase International Characters. This allows a smaller cell
size for each character. Select to enable uppercase International Characters.
This will protect International Characters with uppercase ascenders (accent
193
Printed Documentation
marks, umlauts, etc.) from being omitted when the top of that character is placed
along the outside edges of a format. Please be aware that this option will move
the field away from the outside edge of the printed label.
BACK to TOP
HP Notes
Laser Jet
Communications
Printable Area
Field Direction
Bar Code
Verification
Verification
Printable
Characters
Printing a Set of
Formats
Downloaded
Fonts
Paper Size
Print Queue
Compatible
Printer
Bar Width
Multipliers
True Type Fonts
Laser Jet Communications
The HP LaserJet Series II, IIP, III, IV, and V should be set to factory defaults. The
only exception being Parallel I/O.
Following are the specific settings which were tested:
Auto Continue = Off
Symbol Set = Roman - 8
Copies = 1
Manual Feed = Off
Font Source = I
Font Number = 00
Form = 60 Lines
Parallel I/O
Refer to your HP LaserJet Printer Manual for information on how to configure
your printer and how to print a self test.
Bar Code Verification
Bar codes were tested using an original HP cartridge with the printer's darkness
control set to a five (5). Refilled cartridges had varying results. All bar codes were
verified as being in spec in all resolutions using a Quick-Check IV verifier.
194
Printing
Downloaded Fonts
A record is kept of what fonts have been sent to the printer. If for any reason the
printer is turned off during the course of a day's work, you should exit the
program and then restart the program by double-clicking on the icon.
Compatible Printer
We have found many "compatible" laser printers to be less than 100% compatible
with the LaserJet Series II. It is recommended that you use an HP printer or that
you test the printer thoroughly before you make a purchase. LaserJet Plus
emulation is not enough. It must be LaserJet Series II compatible or higher.
Printable Area
There is a dead space of unprintable area of approximately ¼" around the
perimeter of the page. The margin command starts from this point and not the
upper left corner of the paper.
Printable Characters
Overall character height including lower case descenders must be taken into
account when deciding what can print on a page. Therefore, the maximum
character height that could print on an 11" form with a print area height of 10.59"
is 7.99".
Any field that would be off the format due to the lower case characters is
automatically moved up even if lower case is not used.
Paper Size
Paper width can be defined to be as large as 19.68". A legal size paper tray is
needed to print 8 ½" x 14" formats. The printer must also be set to "Paper=Legal".
Please refer to your HP LaserJet Printer Manual for more information on how to
set this option.
Bar Width Multipliers
This function allows you to establish the density of your bar code. Everything
revolves around the dot size that the laser printer can print. The printable dot size
is 3.3 Mils.
Example: UPC printed in 100% magnification has a 13 Mil narrow bar. To
achieve this you would use a multiplier of 4 which would give you approximately
102% magnification.
195
Printed Documentation
Field Direction
If you are printing to an HP LaserJet Series II, bar codes can be designed and
printed in orientations 1 and 4, however, bar codes in orientation 4 can not print
the human readable interpretation.
Printing a Set of Formats
You can use the software in a demand mode when you only need one
replacement label at a time. On the Print Request Screen, you can specify the
starting print position in which to begin printing formats on your sheet of labels.
This will allow you to remove labels one at a time from the sheet and re-feed the
sheet many times.
We recommend not printing on the center strip of labels and keeping them in
place. This will allow the printer's pick up mechanism to work properly.
Print Queue
If there is a database error when using $ALL, the associated report will have a
zero in the number of labels printed.
TrueType Fonts
TrueType fonts on the HP printers are supported on the Text Field definition
screen.
BACK to TOP
Intermec
Intermec Setup
Printer Name
Printer
Description
Type of Port
Port
Direct Print
Printer Memory
Printer
Manufacturer
Concurrent
Access
Cutter
Printer Model
Baud Rate
Initial Label Feed
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
196
Printing
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the model of printer to be used.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Baud Rate
Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
Direct Print
Select Direct Print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network
printer, be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers
that can be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using
Windows 95,98, or ME.
Printer Memory
If a Memory cartridge is installed, select the option corresponding to the memory
module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot.
197
Printed Documentation
Cutter
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Initial Label Feed
Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed. Allowing an
initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die-cut label stock.
BACK to TOP
Intermec Cables
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
198
9 Pin on PC
9-9 Pin Cable Configuration
Printing
9-9 Pin Cable
Cable Configuration
9 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
199
Printed Documentation
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
200
25 Pin on PC
Printing
BACK to TOP
Intermec Notes
RS - 232
Communications
MaxiCode
getstatus useprinter
Status
Status Messages
Print Speed and Image
Bands
Resetting the Printer
Trailing Edge Violations
RSRS-232 Communications
•
•
•
•
Data Bits - 8
Stop Bits - 1
Parity - None
Protocol - XON/XOFF - NO STAT
NOTE: The Intermec 4100 printer uses XON/XOFF for its protocol.
getstatus useprinter Status Messages
201
Printed Documentation
Resetting the Printer
All Intermec printers will automatically reset at print time if any of the following
parameters are changed within the software:
1. Media Type
2. Print Mode
3. Cutter Option
Intermec 4400 If 'Printer Status' is not available from within the print queue, a
'Hardware Reset' must be executed. Select the 'Hardware Reset' option from the
Print Queue Menu. Once the 4400 has been reset, factory default settings will be
restored. If the printer was configured for any settings other than the factory
defaults, these settings must now be set again in the printers front panel.
MaxiCode
When using MaxiCode with Intermec printers that support it, data must be
entered in the following format:
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
Where:
CCC = Country Code
SSS = Service Code
ZZZZZXXXX = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
(Must be enclosed in # signs)
data... = Alphanumeric Data (maximum length: 84 characters)
Example: 123999#442120798#This is an example.
202
Printing
Print Speed and Image
Image Bands
The print speed and image bands determine the rate at which the printer
processes the images of your labels. In the printer, label printing and image
processing occur simultaneously. For this reason, it is very important that these
settings be synchronized. If the Image Band command is too low, the imaging
process is unable to keep up with the print speed. In this case, the printer stops
printing and starts again at the lowest print speed. If the Image Band command is
set too high, the printer spends too much time imaging, which slows down label
production.
To optimize the number of image bands for your print speed, set the image bands
at the lowest number and then print a label at the desired speed. If the label prints,
the Image Band setting is correctly optimized.
To optimize the number of image bands for batch printing, you must select
enough image memory to allow the printer to retain the entire label image PLUS
ONE INCH (one image band is equal to 1 inch). Therefore, if the printed image
stops at a distance of 4 inches from the beginning of the label, you must select
five image bands to prevent re-imaging.
Trailing Edge Violations
Trailing Edge violations more easily occur on small (under 1" tall) labels because
of the limited space on the label. These violations result in print "wandering" up or
down the label. The print will often move farther and farther down the label until it
actually crosses the inter-label gap. This is followed by a blank label or two and
then the process is repeated. The absolute minimum margin is 1/8" (0.125
inches). To avoid causing a Trailing Edge violation, do not exceed the absolute
minimum margin.
BACK to TOP
Novexx
Novexx Setup
Printer Name
Printer
Description
Type of Port
Port
Baud Rate
Set Printer
Darkness
Direct Print
Printer
Manufacturer
Concurrent
Access
Cutter
Printer Model
Handshake
Calendar Option
Printer Name
203
Printed Documentation
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Enter the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select Concurrent Access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, deselect Concurrent Access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Handshake
Select 'Yes' to use a hardware handshake. Select 'No' to use an XON/XOFF
handshake.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
NOTE: Always make sure the Baud Rate is the same as your printer setup.
204
Printing
Direct Print
Select Direct Print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network
printer, be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers
that can be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using
Windows 95,98, or ME.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Calendar Option
Select 'Yes' if your printer has the calendar option (clock chip) installed. This will
allow formats that contain date/time fields to be handled internally in the printer
and be updated to reflect the current date/time when the label is printed. Select
'No' to download the date/time from the program.
Set Printer Darkness
Select 'Yes' to allow software to set printer darkness. This will override any
darkness setting defined in the printer. Select 'No' to use printers darkness
setting.
BACK to TOP
Novexx Cables
Lion, Puma, Tiger, Tiger XXL and
XXtreme 99-25 Pin Cable Configuration
Lion, Puma, Tiger, Tiger XXL and
XXtreme 2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Lion, Puma, Tiger, Tiger XXL and XXtreme 99-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
205
Printed Documentation
Lion, Puma, Tiger, Tiger XXL and XXtreme 2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
Printer
BACK to TOP
206
25 Pin on PC
Printing
Novexx Notes
RS - 232 Communications
RS - 232 Communications
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: RTS/CTS Standard
BACK to TOP
Printronix
Printronix Setup
Printer Name
Printer Model
Concurrent
Concurrent Access
Printer Memory
Darkness Adjustment
RFID Enabled
Printer Description
Type of Port
Use Hardware
Handshake
Cutter
Offset Adjustment
Printer Manufacturer
Port
Direct Print
Set Printer Clock
Initial Label Feed
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
207
Printed Documentation
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Use Hardware Handshake
Select 'Yes' to use a hardware handshake. Select 'No' to use an XON/XOFF
handshake.
Direct Print
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Printer Memory
If a memory cartridge is installed, select the option corresponding to the memory
module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
208
Do not cut
Printing
•
•
•
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Set Printer Clock
Select 'Yes' to set the printer clock to match the computer clock. Select 'No' to
NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock.
Darkness Adjustment
Enter a number from -4 through +4 to adjust the base level of print darkness.
Negative numbers make the print lighter.
Offset Adjustment
Adjust the form edge offset. Offset adjustment is the number from -99 to +999
needed to change the formats starting print position. Negative numbers will move
the starting position down from the top of the format. Positive numbers will move
the starting position up towards the top of the format.
Initial Label Feed
Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed. Allowing an
initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die-cut label stock.
RFID Enabled
Select 'Yes' if the printer has RFID capability.
BACK to TOP
Printronix Cables
9-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41, 41a,
161a Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41 - Dip
Switches
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 161a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c Cable
Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switch Box Printer
Assignments
209
Printed Documentation
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
Western Telematic
Telematic Switch Boxes
210
Printing
You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC
by using a Western Telematic CAS-41 4-way switch box, a Western Telematic
CAS-81 8-way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS-161A 16-way switch box.
These switching devices may be obtained from:
WESTERN TELEMATIC, INC.
5 Sterling
Irvine, CA 92718 USA
714.586.9950 • 800.854.7226
Fax: 714.583.9514
www.wti.com
If you are using a Western Telematic Switch, formats that contain TrueType font
text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western
Telematic Switch Box. The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to
be downloaded. When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western
Telematic Switch, you must download the font as a graphic.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41 - Dip Switches
NOTE: When using a CAS-41 or 41A, move all four jumpers down one position
so that the "DTR" lines printed on the circuit board are not pointing at the jumpers.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41a - Dip Switches
211
Printed Documentation
NOTE: When using a CAS-41 or 41A, move all four jumpers down one position
so that the "DTR" lines printed on the circuit board are not pointing at the
jumpers.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c - Dip Switches
The CAS - 81C 8-way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10
position Dip Switches as follows:
NOTE: When purchasing the CAS-81c 8-way switchbox, it must be equipped
with firmware version 1.0a.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 161a - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switchbox
Switchbox - 41, 41a, 161a Cable Configuration
212
Printing
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c Cable Configuration
Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments
213
Printed Documentation
If a third CAS-41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above, printer
assignments would be 9 through 12. The same would be true for the CAS-161A,
where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16, the second switch
box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected, it
would go to Printers 33 through 48.
BACK to TOP
Printronix Notes
RS - 232
Communications
nications
Commu
Memory Card
Installation
MaxiCode
RS - 232 Communications
Data Bits - 8
Stop Bits - 1
Parity - None
Protocol - XON/XOFF - NO STAT
NOTE: The ThermaLine T3306 has two serial ports. Serial Port A is the default
serial port on the printer. Be sure to connect the serial cable to Port A when
configured for Serial printing.
214
Printing
Memory Card Installation
The ThermaLine T3306 has an optional 1 MB or 2MB memory cartridge.
To install a memory cartridge:
1.) Insert a 1 MB or 2MB memory cartridge into the top cartridge slot in the T3306.
NOTE: The software only recognizes the top slot.
2.) Configure the software to recognize the cartridge.
Choose File | Printer Setup.
Choose Printronix ThermaLine T3306 as your printer model.
Select Printer RAM, from the Options Tab, and specify the memory cartridge
that you have.
MaxiCode
When using MaxiCode with Printronix printers that support it, data must be
entered in the following format:
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
Where:
CCC = Country Code
SSS = Service Code
ZZZZZXXXX = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
(Must be enclosed in # signs)
BACK to TOP
RJS
RJS Setup
Printer Name
Printer
Description
Type of Port
Port
Printer
Printer
Manufacturer
Concurrent
Access
Printer Model
Baud Rate
215
Printed Documentation
Direct Print
Cutter
Darkness
Adjustment
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the model of printer to be used.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Enter the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select Concurrent Access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known deselect Concurrent Access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
Direct Print
216
Printing
Select Direct Print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network
printer, be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers
that can be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using
Windows 95,98, or ME.
Cutter
elect Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Darkness Adjustment
Enter a number from -10 through +10 to adjust the base level of print darkness.
Negative numbers make the print lighter. This screen only appears for the RJS
Qualibar 440 and 450
BACK to TOP
RJS Cables
Thermabar: 9-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Thermabar: 2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Qualabar: 9-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Qualabar: 2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Thermabar:
Thermabar: 9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
217
Printed Documentation
Thermabar: 2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
Qualabar: 9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
218
9 Pin on PC
Printing
Qualabar: 2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
BACK to TOP
RJS Notes
Printable
Characters
Field Direction
Stacked Fields
Void & Reprint
219
Printed Documentation
Printing a Set of
Formats
Thermabar RSRS232
Communications
Qualabar RSRS-232
Communications
Dip Switches
Print Head
Temperature
Thermabar RSRS232
Communications
Dip Switches
Qualabar
Parallel/Centronix
Dip
Dip Switches
True Type
Type Fonts
Intercharacter
Space
Thermabar
Parallel/Centronix
Dip Switches
Qualabar RSRS-232
Communications
Printable Characters
The software allows you to define character heights and widths. A printer problem
exists for characters larger than about 3/4". Printing width characters
approaching 3/4" or greater may cause erratic results. Characters may disappear,
strange lines may appear, or the printer may lock if larger characters are used.
Font H - Tipton Gothic font should not be used on a format where the Print Area
Height is greater than 10 inches.
Field Direction
•
•
•
•
•
Tipton Gothic (Fixed) allows Left to Right field orientation only.
Tipton Gothic (Proportional) allows Left to Right field orientation only.
Rotatable allows Normal field orientation only.
All other internal printer fonts allow Normal and Stacked field orientations.
TrueType fonts allow Normal and Stacked field orientations.
Stacked Fields
Stacked fields are fields where characters are printed below one another instead
of next to one another. To allow for this on the RJS, you are presented with a
choice for Normal or Stacked Letter Orientation. When a Stacked Letter
Orientation is selected, you can choose from 4 different stacked Field Directions.
Stacked fields are not supported with Font H - Tipton Gothic (Fixed), Font I Tipton Gothic (Proportional), Font J - Rotatable and TrueType fonts.
Void & Reprint
The RJS printer is designed to verify up to 15 bar codes as they are printed. The
printer will verify bar codes in orientations 1 and 3, Picket Fence only. Bar codes
in orientations 2 and 4, Step Ladder, will not verify.
The Void and Reprint option will enable or disable bar code verification.
220
Printing
If enabled, any labels with invalid bar codes will have a checkerboard pattern
printed over the invalid bar code. The printer will then try to reprint the label up to
3 times. If more than 3 invalid labels are printed, the printer will lock up and must
be reset by turning the printer off and then on again or by pressing the Red Reset
button located inside the printer.
Printing a Set of Formats
When using a Command File to print your formats, all jobs will be released to the
printer immediately rather than being held in the print queue.
If you turn the printer off for any reason, you must exit the program and restart it
so the printer will re-initialize.
The RJS printer limits you to 32 serialized (incremented) fields on a format. Bar
code fields with interpretations count as two since both the bar code and the
interpretation must be serialized.
Lines will automatically reverse when crossing another field. If a line that doesn't
reverse when crossing another is needed, use a rectangle field. The edge lines
on boxes overwrite any other field they come in contact with. Add a rectangle and
place it on the format as you would place a line. Then, adjust the thickness of the
box edge lines so that two sides of the box come together. This will create a solid
line on the label.
Print Head Temperature
The print head temperature can be automatically adjusted for each bar code in
orientations 1 and 3, picket fence. Enter 'Y' to automatically adjust the print head
temperature to keep this bar code within specification. Enter 'N' to disable both
automatic print head temperature adjustment and verification for this bar code.
TrueType Fonts
TrueType fonts on the RJS printers are supported on the Text Field definition
screen. Fields that use TrueType fonts are sent to the printer as a graphic.
Intercharacter Space
This option allows you to specify the space between each character based on a
dot size of .005 inches. If more or less spacing is desired, this number can be
adjusted accordingly. The default setting is 2 dots, or .01 inches and should be
appropriate for most text fields. The maximum setting that can be specified is 500
dots or 2.5 inches.
Thermabar
221
Printed Documentation
RSRS-232 Communications
The following settings are needed for serial communications for RJS ThermaBar
260 and 285 printers:
•
•
•
•
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: RTS/CTS
RSRS-232 Communications Dip Switches
Parallel/Centronix Dip Switches
QualaBar
RSRS-232 Communications
The following settings are needed for serial communications for RJS QualaBar
440 and 450 printers:
•
•
•
•
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: XON/XOFF
RSRS-232 Communications Dip Switches
The switches are labelled closed and open. Closed means that the switch is on
and open means that the switch is off. For the switch to be on, or closed, the
switch is toward the front of the printer.
222
Printing
Parallel/Centronix Dip Switches
For parallel printing, there are no special switch settings required. The Qualibar
450 automatically configures for parallel printing when a parallel cable is attached
to the printer. The Qualibar 440 does not support parallel printing.
BACK to TOP
Sato
Sato Setup
Printer Name
Printer
Description
Printer
Manufacturer
S Model
Type of Port
Port
Port
Bidirectional
Direct Print
Baud Rate
Printer Memory
Set Printer Clock
Firmware Level
Device Attached
Cutter
Set Printer
Darkness
Printer Model
Concurrent
Access
Printer Address
Calendar Option
Set Printer Speed
RFID Enabled
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
223
Printed Documentation
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used.
S Model
If the printer is an S Model select S Model Printer from the Options tab, otherwise
deselect S Model printer.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Bidirectional
If you are using a serial cable you can select Bidirectional to use printer protocol
STATUS 2 or STATUS 4 and a BIDIRECTIONAL cable. Deselect Bidirectional to
use printer protocol PC1 RS ON/OFF and a DTR cable
The software does not differentiate between the protocols STATUS 2 or STATUS
4.
If you are using a parallel cable you can select Bidirectional to enable Status and
the Cancel command with a parallel cable. The printer must have the multi-buffer
toggle turned on. This option is only available on the E series printers.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
224
Printing
Device Attached
Select the type of device that is attached to the port. The choices are Printer,
Western Telematic 4-way Switch, 8-way Switch, or 16-way Switch.
Printer Address
When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box,
enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to.
Direct Print
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Printer Memory
This option allows you to define which card slot the memory card is connected to.
Memory card options vary based on the printer used. This item only appears
when configuring for a CL408, a CL412, a CL608 or a
CL612.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Calendar Option
Select 'Yes' if your printer has the calendar option (clock chip) installed. This will
allow formats that contain date/time fields to be handled internally in the printer
and be updated to reflect the current date/time when the label is printed. Select
'No' to download the date/time from the program.
Set Printer Clock
Select 'Yes' to set the printer clock to match the computer clock. Select 'No' to
NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock.
225
Printed Documentation
Firmware Level
Select 'Yes' if the printer is installed with ROM versions 1E1010 and 2E1010 or
higher. Otherwise, enter N. The Firmware Level screen item only appears if the
printer attached is a Sato Model CL608 or Model 8480s.
Set Printer Darkness
Select 'Yes' to allow software to set printer darkness. This will override any
darkness setting defined in the printer. Select 'No' to use printers darkness
setting.
Set Printer Speed
Select 'Yes' to allow software to set printer speed. This will override any print
speed defined in the printer. Select 'No' to use printer's speed setting.
RFID Enabled
Select 'Yes' if the printer has RFID capability.
BACK to TOP
Sato Cables
9-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Bidirectional: 9-25 Pin
Cable Configuration
Bidirectional: 2525-25 Pin
Cable Configuration
9-9 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41 - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 161a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switch Box Printer
Printer
Assignments
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41, 41a
Cable Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 161a Cable
Configuration
226
Printing
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c - 9 Pin
Cable Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c - 25 Pin
Cable Configuration
Configuration
Setup for Sato 8400/6
and 8400/8
Setup for Sato 8400,
8400RV and 8450
Setup for Sato CL608
and 8480s
Setup for Sato CL612
Setup for Sato CL408
and CL412
Parallel Printing
Internal Time Stamp
MultiMulti-Buffer
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
Printer
9 Pin on PC
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
227
Printed Documentation
Bidirectional: 9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
In order to support the Cancel command from the Sato printer, the software must
be configured for Bidirectional printing. Configuration for bidirectional printing is
done as follows:
•
•
•
Select Bidirectional in the printer setup.
You must have a Bidirectional cable attached.
The printer protocol must be set for Status 2 or 4
In order for the Cancel command to properly function, the following should be
noted:
•
•
Jobs in the Print Queue, which have a graphic, must be in a Frozen Status.
Then, subsequent jobs will need to be Unfrozen as needed.
Jobs in the print queue, which do not have a graphic, can be in a Frozen or
Unfrozen state.
9 Pin on PC
228
25 Pin on Printer
Printing
Bidirectional: 2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
In order to support the Cancel command from the Sato printer, the software must
be configured for Bidirectional printing. Configuration for bidirectional printing is
done as follows:
•
•
•
Select Bidirectional in the printer setup.
You must have a Bidirectional cable attached.
The printer protocol must be set for Status 2 or 4
In order for the Cancel command to properly function, the following should be
noted:
•
•
Jobs in the Print Queue, which have a graphic, must be in a Frozen Status.
Then, subsequent jobs will need to be Unfrozen as needed.
Jobs in the print queue, which do not have a graphic, can be in a Frozen or
Unfrozen state.
25 Pin on PC
25 Pin on Printer
229
Printed Documentation
9-9 Pin Cable Configuration
9 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
Western Telematic Switch Boxes
You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC
by using a Western Telematic CAS-41 4-way switch box, a Western Telematic
CAS-81 8-way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS-161A 16-way switch box.
These switching devices may be obtained from:
230
Printing
WESTERN TELEMATIC, INC.
5 Sterling
Irvine, CA 92718 USA
714.586.9950 • 800.854.7226
Fax: 714.583.9514
www.wti.com
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41 - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41a - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41a - Changing Monitor Pins
The four internal jumpers located on the CAS-41A circuit board are used to
switch the CAS-41A to monitor pin 4 (Request to Send) instead of pin 20 (factory
setting). To switch monitor pins, proceed as follows:
CAUTION:
CAUTION Make certain to power off the CAS-41A and disconnect the power
cable before attempting to remove the instrument
cover.
1. Remove the four screws that secure the CAS41A's plastic cover to the chassis. Remove
the cover from the chassis.
231
Printed Documentation
2. Locate the jumpers on the CAS-41A circuit board. As you face the
instrument back panel, the jumpers are located in the lower left hand
corner of the circuit board. Move the jumpers as shown to monitor pin4.
3. Replace the plastic cover on the CAS-41A chassis. Reinstall the four
screws that secure the cover to the chassis. Reconnect the power cable
and switch the power on.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c - Dip Switches
The CAS - 81C 8-way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10
position Dip Switches as follows:
NOTE: When purchasing the CAS-81c 8-way switchbox, it must be equipped
with firmware version 1.0a.
On the inside of the box, a set of jumpers located behind the 25-pin port are
labeled CTS and DCD. In order to have proper handshaking, the CTS jumper
should be set so that both pins are covered and the DCD jumper should be set so
that only one pin is covered.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 161a - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments
232
Printing
If a third CAS-41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above, printer
assignments would be 9 through 12. The same would be true for the CAS-161A,
where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16, the second switch
box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected, it
would go to Printers 33 through 48.
Western Telematic
Telematic Switchbox - 41, 41a Cable Configuration
Western Telematic Switchbox - 161a - 9 Pin Cable Configuration
233
Printed Documentation
Western Telematic Switchbox - 161a - 25 Pin Cable Configuration
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c - 9 Pin Cable Configuration
234
Printing
Western Telematic
Telematic Switchbox - 81c - 25 Pin Cable Configuration
Setup for Sato 8400/6 and 8400/8
Serial (RS-232) Communication settings are:
235
Printed Documentation
•
•
•
•
•
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Codes: Standard
Protocol: PC1 RS ON/OFF
Sato 8400 printer family: It is recommended that the Receive Buffer Size, on the
front panel of the printer, be set to 1-Item Buffer. When the printer is set to 1-Item
Buffer, the printer will process one print job at a time and will remain busy until
completion of that job.
Setup for Sato 8400, 8400RV
8400RV and 8450
Serial RS-232 Communication settings are:
•
•
•
•
•
8 Data Bits
No Parity
1 Stop Bit
Standard Codes
PC1 RS ON/OFF Protocol
8450: The "Dot Expansion" setting on the Label Setup screen in the software,
will override the "Dot Expansion" setting on the printer's front panel under <Mode
S Options>.
Sato 8400 printer family: It is recommended that the Receive Buffer Size, on the
front panel of the printer, be set to 1-Item Buffer. When the printer is set to 1-Item
Buffer, the printer will process one print job at a time and will remain busy until
completion of that job.
Setup for Sato CL608 and 8480s
Serial RS-232 Communication settings are:
•
•
•
•
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: Ready/Busy
Sato 8400 printer family: It is recommended that the Receive Buffer Size, on the
front panel of the printer, be set to 1-Item Buffer. When the printer is set to 1-Item
Buffer, the printer will process one print job at a time and will remain busy until
completion of that job.
236
Printing
The above configuration sets the printer for 19200 baud. Turn Dip Switch 3-3
(Pitch Sensor) ON if you are using continuous media. On the Sato 8480s, turn
Dip Switch 3-5 (Print Start Signal) ON if you are not using an applicator.
Refer to the SATO CL608 or the SATO 8480s printer manual for more
information on Dip Switch settings.
Setup for Sato CL612
Serial (RS-232) Communication settings are:
•
•
•
•
•
Baud: 9600 bps
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: Ready/Busy
The above configuration sets the printer for 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, and
1 stop bit. Turn Dip Switch 3-3 (Pitch Sensor) on if you are using continuous
media.
237
Printed Documentation
Refer to the SATO CL612 printer manual for more information on Dip Switch
settings.
Setup for Sato CL408 and CL412
The above configuration sets the printer for 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, and
1 stop bit. Turn Dip Switch 3-3 (Pitch Sensor) on if you are using continuous
media.
Refer to the SATO CL408 or the SATO CL412 printer manual for more
information on Dip Switch settings.
Parallel Printing
For Parallel printing, there are no special configuration settings needed. The
SATO CL612, CL408, and CL412 printers automatically configure for parallel
printing when a parallel cable is attached to the printer.
For Bidirectional Parallel printing the printer must be set to multi-buffer and the
Software's Bidirectional option must also be enabled.
Internal Time Stamp
Allows formats with a time stamp to be printed in real time using the printers
internal time stamp. To use this function the printer must be equipped with a
clock chip.
Refer to your printer manual for setup on Sato models 8490, 8485 S-L, and 8485
S-R.
MultiMulti-Buffer
238
Printing
Typically used to enable Bidirectional Parallel printing with the Software's
Bidirectional option enabled. This allows for Status and the Cancel command
with a parallel cable.
Can also be used with Serial printing and the standard Ready/Busy cable in print
and apply applications where one job is sent to the printer and at some point the
job will need to be cancelled. Should not be used this way if stacking multiple
jobs in the queue, since all jobs will be fed into the printer and the Cancel
command will cancel all jobs.
Multi-Buffer Settings:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Baud: 9600 bps
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
DSW 1-2, 8 ON
DSW 2-5 ON
BACK to TOP
Sato Notes
True Type Fonts
Maxicode
TrueType Fonts
TrueType fonts on the Sato printers are supported on the Text Field definition
screen. Fields that use TrueType fonts are sent to the printer as a graphic.
Maxicode
When using Maxicode with Sato printers that support it, data must be entered in
the following format:
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
239
Printed Documentation
Where:
CCC = Country Code
SSS = Service Code
ZZZZZXXXX = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
(Must be enclosed in # signs)
data... = Alphanumeric Data (maximum length: 84 characters)
Example:
123999#442120798#This is an example.
BACK to TOP
Synergystex
Synergystex Setup
Printer Name
Printer Model
Upper Case
International
Printable Characters
Printer Description
Port Type
Printer Manufacturer
Port
Bar Code Verification
Downloaded Fonts
Vertical Separation
Bar Width Multipliers
Multipliers
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
240
Printing
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Upper Case International
Enables uppercase International Characters. Selecting this option protects
International Characters with uppercase ascenders (accent marks, umlauts, etc.)
from being omitted when the top of that character is placed along the outside
edges of a format. Please be aware that this option will move the field away from
the outside edge of the printed label.
Bar Code Verification
Bar codes were tested with the printer's darkness control set to 2.5 and 3.
Refilled cartridges had varying results. All bar codes were verified as being in
"spec" in all resolutions using a Quick Check IV verifier.
Downloaded Fonts
A record is kept of what fonts have been sent to the printer. If for any reason the
printer is turned off during the course of a day's work, you should exit the
program and then restart the program by double-clicking on the icon.
Printable Characters
Overall character height including lower case descenders must be taken into
account when deciding what can print on a page. Therefore, the maximum
character height that could print on an 11" form with a print area height of 10.59"
is 7.99".
Any field that would be off the format due to the lower case characters is
automatically moved up even if lower case is not used.
Vertical Separation
241
Printed Documentation
The distance in one-sixth or one-eighth inch increments from the top of one
format to the top of the next one down. Maximum vertical separation is 33.0". To
specify from zero to seven- eighths inch or zero to five-sixths inch, use the
following decimal equivalents:
0 eighths = .0" 0 sixths = .0"
1 eighth = .12" 1 sixth = .17"
2 eighths = .25" 2 sixths = .33"
3 eighths = .37" 3 sixths = .5"
4 eighths = .5" 4 sixths = .67"
5 eighths = .62" 5 sixths = .83"
6 eighths = .75"
7 eighths = .87"
Examples:
1) If vertical spacing is 4 and 3/8", enter 4.37". Print area height will then be 4.25"
or less.
2) If vertical spacing is 2 and 1/4", enter 2.25". Print area height could be as much
as 2.13".
3) If vertical spacing is 1/2" or 1", use .5" or 1.0".
Bar Width Multipliers
Multipliers
This function allows you to establish the density of your bar code. Everything
revolves around the dot size that the laser printer can print. The dot size that the
laser can print is 3.3 Mils.
Example:
UPC printed in 100% magnification has a 13 Mil narrow bar. To achieve this you
would use a multiplier of 3 which would give you approximately 102%
magnification.
BACK to TOP
TEC
TEC Setup
Printer Name
242
Printer Description
Printer Manufacturer
Printing
Printer Model
Concurrent Address
Type of Port
Port
Baud Rate
Port
Cutter
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used.
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Address
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
243
Printed Documentation
NOTE: Always make sure the Baud Rate is the same as your printer setup.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
BACK to TOP
TEC Cables
9 Pin Cable Configuration
9 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
25 Pin Cable
Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
244
25 Pin on PC
25 Pin Cable Configuration
Printing
BACK to TOP
TEC Notes
MaxiCode
2D Barcodes
B-872
MaxiCode
When using MaxiCode with TEC printers that support it, data must be entered in
the following format:
123456789SSSCCCdata...
Where:
SSS = Service Code
CCC = Country Code
123456789 = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
data... = Alphanumeric Data (maximum length: 84 characters)
245
Printed Documentation
2D Barcodes
If 2D barcodes do not print, contact TEC for the latest version of firmware to
correct this problem.
B-872
If the top of the format is being cut off, change the feed adjustment on the
printer's front panel to positive values as needed.
BACK to TOP
Tharo H-Series and V-Series
Tharo H and V Setup
Printer Name
Printer
Description
Type of Port
Port
Baud Rate
Rate
Bypass FLASH
Memory
Cutter
Optimize PDF417
Printer
Manufacturer
Concurrent
Access
Calendar Option
Optimize QR
Code
Printer Model
Use Hardware
Handshake
Printer Memory
Use Memory
Card
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used
246
Printing
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing
Use Hardware Handshake
Select 'Yes' to use a hardware handshake. Select 'No' to use an XON/XOFF
handshake.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
NOTE: Always make sure the Baud Rate is the same as your printer setup.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Calendar Option
Select 'Yes' if your printer has the calendar option (clock chip) installed. This will
allow formats that contain date/time fields to be handled internally in the printer
and be updated to reflect the current date/time when the label is printed. Select
'No' to download the date/time from the program.
Printer Memory
247
Printed Documentation
If additional memory is installed, select the option corresponding to the amount of
memory that is installed.
Optimize PDF417
Select 'Yes' to optimize the PDF417 2D symbology. If the printer supports this
symbology internally (has correct firmware version), it will print much quicker.
Select 'No' to produce PDF417 as a graphic. This is supported for all printers but
prints slower.
Optimize QR Code
Select 'Yes' to optimize the QR Code 2D symbology. If the printer supports this
symbology internally (has correct firmware version), it will print much quicker.
Select 'No' to produce QR Code as a graphic. This is supported for all printers but
prints slower.
Use Memory Card
Select 'Yes' to store downloaded formats, graphics, fonts and databases on a
removable Compact Flash card in the printer. Select 'No' to use the printer's
built-in internal Flash.
Bypass FLASH Memory
Select 'Yes' to bypass using the printer FLASH memory for downloaded fonts and
graphics. TrueType text fields and any graphic images are sent as bitmaps
directly into the label image buffer. This will increase printing speed and reduce
the time to first label. Select “No’ to download TrueType fonts and graphics to the
printer’s FLASH memory.
BACK to TOP
Tharo H and V Cable
9-9 Pin Cable Configuration
Configuration
9 Pin on Printer
248
9 Pin on PC
Printing
Tharo H and V Notes
RS - 232
Communications
Flash Memory
Downloads
Using a PS/2
Keyboard with the
H-Series
RSRS-232 Communications
•
•
•
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Flash Memory Downloads
Downloads
Select Memory Card Download in the Format Specifications to mark this format
to be intended for download to the printer's Flash memory.
Note that some software features will not be accessible during label creation due
to printer and Flash memory limitations.
Using a PS/2 Keyboard with the HH-Series
249
Printed Documentation
Any standard PS/2 keyboard can be attached to the printer's PS/2 port. This
allows the input of variable data for formats stored on the memory card that
require operator input. Please see the THARO H-Series Users Manual for
additional information.
BACK to TOP
Tharo (Legacy Printers)
Tharo Setup (Includes 112, 112 Plus, Freedom, Magic, Orion, Wizard, and Hercules)
Printer Name
Port
Printer
Address
Offset
Adjustment
Printer
Description
Use
Hardware
Handshake
Printer
Memory
Translucent
Ribbon
Printer
Manufacturer
Printer Model
Type of Port
Concurrent
Access
Baud Rate
Device
Attached
Direct Print
Cutter
Darkness
Adjustment
Initial Label
Feed
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used.
Type of Port
250
Printing
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Use Hardware Handshake
Select 'Yes' to use a hardware handshake. Select 'No' to use an XON/XOFF
handshake.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
NOTE: Always make sure the Baud Rate is the same as your printer setup.
Device Attached
Select the type of device that is attached to the port. The choices are Printer,
Western Telematic 4 –way, Switch, 8– way Switch, or 16 – way Switch.
Printer Address
When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box,
enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to.
Printer Memory
If a memory cartridge is installed, select the option corresponding to the memory
module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot. A memory module is required in
the Tharo 112 printer to store picture information and TrueType fonts. If the
memory module is not present, the printer will still work, but any graphic that is
downloaded, will not be printed.
Direct Print
251
Printed Documentation
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Darkness Adjustment
Adjust the base level of print darkness. Negative numbers make the print lighter.
Offset Adjustment
Adjust the form edge offset. Offset adjustment is the number from -99 to +999
needed to change the formats starting print position. Negative numbers will move
the starting position down from the top of the format. Positive numbers will move
the starting position up towards the top of the format.
Translucent Ribbon
Allows you to configure for colored ribbons with an opaque trailer. If translucent
ribbon is selected, the logic of the ribbon out sensor is reversed so that with the
proper ribbon, you will be able to run the printer in thermal transfer mode and get
a proper 'Ribbon Out' indication.
Initial Label Feed
Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed. Allowing an
initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die-cut label stock.
BACK to TOP
Tharo Cables (Includes 112, 112 Plus, Freedom, Magic, Orion, Wizard, and
Hercules)
9-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
252
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
9-25 Pin Cable
Cable
Configuration (Orion)
Printing
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration (Orion)
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41 - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 161a - Dip
Switches
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switch Box Printer
Assignments
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41, 41a,
161a Cable
Configuration
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
253
Printed Documentation
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration (Orion)
25 Pin on Printer
254
9 Pin on PC
Printing
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration (Orion)
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
255
Printed Documentation
Western Telematic Switch Boxes
You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC
by using a Western Telematic CAS-41 4-way switch box, a Western Telematic
CAS-81 8-way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS-161A 16-way switch box.
These switching devices may be obtained from:
WESTERN TELEMATIC, INC.
5 Sterling
Irvine, CA 92718 USA
714.586.9950 • 800.854.7226
Fax: 714.583.9514
www.wti.com
If you are using a Western Telematic Switch, formats that contain TrueType font
text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western
256
Printing
Telematic Switch Box. The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to
be downloaded. When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western
Telematic Switch, you must download the font as a graphic.
When configured for a Tharo printer, you can configure the software to send
TrueType fonts as a graphic by specifying N for the "Download Fonts" screen
item in the Format Specification Screen
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41 - Dip Switches
NOTE: When using a CAS-41 or 41A, move all four jumpers down one position
so that the "DTR" lines printed on the circuit board are not pointing at the jumpers.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41a - Dip Switches
NOTE: When using a CAS-41 or 41A, move all four jumpers down one position
so that the "DTR" lines printed on the circuit board are not pointing at the jumpers.
Western Telematic Switchbox
Switchbox - 81c - Dip Switches
The CAS - 81C 8-way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10
position Dip Switches as follows:
257
Printed Documentation
NOTE: When purchasing the CAS-81c 8-way switchbox, it must be equipped
with firmware version 1.0a.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 161a - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41, 41a, 161a Cable Configuration
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c Cable Configuration
258
Printing
Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments
If a third CAS-41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above, printer
assignments would be 9 through 12. The same would be true for the CAS-161A,
where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16, the second switch
259
Printed Documentation
box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected, it
would go to Printers 33 through 48.
BACK to TOP
Tharo Notes (Includes 112, 112 Plus, Freedom, Magic, Orion, Wizard, and Hercules)
MaxiCode
MaxiCode
When using Maxicode with Tharo printers that support it, data must be entered in
the following format:
CCCSSS#ZZZZZXXXX#data...
Where:
CCC = Country Code
SSS = Service Code
ZZZZZXXXX = Zip Code + 4 Digit Extension (optional)
(Must be enclosed in # signs)
data... = Alphanumeric Data (maximum length: 84 characters)
Example:
123999#442120798#This is an example.
BACK to TOP
TSC
TSC Setup
Printer Name
Type of Port
260
Printer
Printer
Description
Port
Printer
Manufacturer
Concurrent
Printer Model
Use Hardware
Printing
Baud Rate
Cutter
Access
Set Printer
Darkness
Handshake
Set Printer Speed
Initial Label Feed
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Select the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing
Use Hardware Handshake
261
Printed Documentation
Select 'Yes' to use a hardware handshake. Select 'No' to use an XON/XOFF
handshake.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
NOTE: Always make sure the Baud Rate is the same as your printer setup.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Set Printer Darkness
Select 'Yes' to allow software to set printer darkness. This will override any
darkness settings defined in the printer. Select 'No' to use the printers darkness
settings.
Set Printer Speed
Select 'Yes' to allow the software to set printer speed. This will override any print
speed settings defined in the printer. Select 'No' to use the printers speed
settings.
Initial Label Feed
Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed. Allowing an
initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die-cut label stock.
BACK to TOP
TSC Cables
9-9 Pin Cable Configuration
9 Pin on Printer
262
9 Pin on PC
Printing
Windows
Windows Setup
Installing a Windows
Printer
Defining a Windows
Printer
Postscript Printers
Installing a Windows Printer
Before designing a format for a Windows printer, the printer must be installed
from within Windows.
To install a Windows printer driver, follow these steps:
•Choose Start | Settings | Printers.
•Double-click "Add Printer".
•Follow the instructions in the "Add Printer Wizard".
Defining Printer Configuration
263
Printed Documentation
Windows printer configuration settings can only be modified from within Windows.
To view, add, change or delete current printer configuration options, choose Start
| Settings | Printers and double-click on the correct printer.
Postscript Printers
The software supports Windows Postscript printers. They must be installed in the
same manner as a regular Windows Printer. See above.
BACK to TOP
Windows Notes
Upper Case
International
LaserJet
Communications
Bar Code
Verification
Downloaded
Fonts
Compatible
Printers
Paper Size
Bar Width
Multipliers
Field Direction
Printing
Printing a Set of
Formats
Upper Case International
Enables uppercase International Characters. Selecting this option protects
International Characters with uppercase ascenders (accent marks, umlauts, etc.)
from being omitted when the top of that character is placed along the outside
edges of a format. Please be aware that this option will move the field away from
the outside edge of the printed label.
LaserJet Communications
The HP LaserJet Series II, IIP, III, IV, and V should be set to factory defaults. The
only exception being Parallel I/O.
Following are the specific settings which were tested:
•
•
•
264
Auto Continue = Off
Symbol Set = Roman - 8
Copies = 1
Printing
•
•
•
•
•
Manual Feed = Off
Font Source = I
Font Number = 00
Form = 60 Lines
Parallel I/O
Refer to your HP LaserJet Printer Manual for information on how to configure
your printer and how to print a self test.
Bar Code Verification
Bar codes were tested using an original HP cartridge with the printer's darkness
control set to a five (5). Refilled cartridges had varying results. All bar codes were
verified as being in "spec" in all resolutions using a Quick-Check IV verifier.
Downloaded Fonts
A record is kept of what fonts have been sent to the printer. If for any reason the
printer is turned off during the course of a day's work, you should exit the
program and then restart it.
Compatible Printers
Many "compatible" laser printers were found to be less than 100% compatible
with the LaserJet Series II. It is recommended that you use an HP printer or that
you test the printer thoroughly before you make a purchase. LaserJet Plus
emulation is not enough. It must be LaserJet Series II compatible or higher.
Printable Characters
Overall character height including lower case descenders must be taken into
account when deciding what can print on a page. Therefore, the maximum
character height that could print on an 11" form with a print area height of 10.59"
is 7.99".
Any field that would be off the format due to the lower case characters is
automatically moved up even if lower case is not used.
Paper Size
Paper width can be defined to be as large as 19.68". A legal size paper tray is
needed to print 8 ½" x 14" formats. The printer must also be set to "Paper=Legal".
Please refer to your HP LaserJet Printer Manual for more information on how to
set this option.
Bar Width Multipliers
265
Printed Documentation
This function allows you to establish the density of your bar code. Everything
revolves around the dot size that the laser printer can print. The printable dot size
is 3.3 Mils.
Example:
UPC printed in 100% magnification has a 13 Mil narrow bar. To achieve this you
would use a multiplier of 4 which would give you approximately 102%
magnification.
Field Direction
If you are printing to an HP LaserJet Series II, bar codes can be designed and
printed in orientations 1 and 4, however, bar codes in orientation 4 can not print
the human readable interpretation.
Printing a Set of Formats
You can use the software in a demand mode when you only need one
replacement label at a time. On the Print Request Screen, you can specify the
starting print position in which to begin printing formats on your sheet of labels.
This will allow you to remove labels one at a time from the sheet and re-feed the
sheet many times.
We recommend not printing on the center strip of labels and keeping them in
place. This will allow the printer's pick up mechanism to work properly.
BACK to TOP
Zebra
Zebra Setup
Printer Name
Printer
Description
Type of Port
Port
Port
Baud Rate
Device Attached
Optimize
DataMatrix
Print Mode
Override
Cutter
Override Label
Offset
Printer
Manufacturer
Concurrent
Access
Printer Address
Set Printer
Darkness
Optional Fonts
Printer Model
ZNET
Direct Print
Print ID Label
Time Accuracy
Tolerance
Printer Name
The Printer Name parameter is optional. You may specify a name to uniquely
identify this printer. This name will show up in the print request screen and the
266
Printing
queue's printer list. It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX
interface.
Printer Description
Description
The Printer Description parameter is optional. You may enter a description that
further identifies the printer for the user. The location of the printer ("Shipping
and Receiving") and size/type of media loaded ("4 inch X 6 inch paper media")
are examples of what can be stored here.
Printer Manufacturer
Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided.
Printer Model
Select the printer model to be used
Type of Port
Select the type of port the device is attached to. The options are Serial, Parallel,
USB, Network/Windows or IP. Some of these options may or may not be
available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected.
Port
Enter the port to which the printer is attached.
Concurrent Access
Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts.
Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture
computers. If serial port interrupts are not known, do not select concurrent access.
This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing
ZNET Serial Network
Select 'Yes' to enable the use of the Zebra ZNET or Zebra Multi-Drop serial port
networking. This allows multiple Zebra printers to be connected to the same
serial port. This works only for specific Zebra printer models that are 'chained'
together, and requires special cables available from Zebra.
Baud Rate
Indicate the baud rate used. Baud rates may vary on different printers.
NOTE: Always make sure the Baud Rate is the same as your printer setup.
267
Printed Documentation
Device
Device Attached
Select the type of device that is attached to the port. The choices are Printer,
Western Telematic 4-way Switch, 8-way Switch, or 16-way Switch.
Printer Address
When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box,
enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to.
Direct Print
Select direct print to send data directly to the port. For a shared or network printer,
be sure direct print is not selected. This option appears for those printers that can
be configured for parallel printing. This option only appears when using Windows
95, 98, or ME.
Cutter
Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability. While
designing the format, if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you
may choose:
•
•
•
•
Do not cut
Cut after each Format
Cut after each Batch
Cut after each Job
Optimize DataMatrix
Select 'Yes' to optimize the DataMatrix 2D symbology. If the printer supports this
symbology internally (has correct firmware version), it will print much quicker.
Select 'No' to produce DataMatrix as a graphic. This is supported for all printers
but prints slower.
Set Printer Darkness
Select 'Yes' to allow software to set printer darkness. This will override any
darkness setting defined in the printer. Select 'No' to use printers darkness
setting.
Print ID Label
Select Print ID Label to have a printer identification label printed at initialization.
Deselect Print ID Label if no printer identification label is needed. If you have
268
Printing
specified to have an ID label printed, the software will cause an ID label to be
printed at the start up of each session. The ID label shows a number indicating
the number that is assigned to the printer. Selecting to have the ID label printed is
useful when more than 1 printer is attached.
Override Label Offset
Select 'Yes' to override printer's setting of label offset. Normally, a label offset of
zero means to keep the printer's current setting. Setting this option to 'Yes' will
allow the software to always set the printer's label offset. Select 'No' to disable
this option.
Print Mode Override
Select print mode override if you want to control the print mode when designing
the format. Deselect print mode override if you want to control the print modes
from the printers front panel. This option allows you to choose if the print modes
should be controlled based on the format or from the printer. For Zebra printers
that have no front panel, such as the Stripe 300, Stripe 500, 105s, and 160s, this
option will not be displayed.
Optional Fonts
Indicate the number of optional fonts installed on the printer. There may be from
0 to 9 optional fonts available.
Time Accuracy Tolerance
If the firmware in the Zebra printer supports this feature, set it to the number of
seconds from 0 to 999 that will tell the printer how often to update the time and
date. 0 will use the Time Now option which will cause the printer to print the time
when the label format was imaged by the printer.
BACK to TOP
Zebra Cables
9-25 Pin Cable
Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41 - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
2525-25 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 41a - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
9-9 Pin Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switchbox - 81c - Dip
Switches
Western Telematic
269
Printed Documentation
Switchbox - 161a - Dip
Switches
Switchbox - 41, 41a,
161a Cable
Configuration
Western Telematic
Switch Box Printer
Assignments
9-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
9 Pin on PC
2525-25 Pin Cable Configuration
25 Pin on Printer
25 Pin on PC
9-9 Pin Cable Configuration
9 Pin on Printer
270
9 Pin on PC
Switchbox - 81c Cable
Configuration
Printing
Western Telematic Switch Boxes
You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC
by using a Western Telematic CAS-41 4-way switch box, a Western Telematic
CAS-81 8-way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS-161A 16-way switch box.
These switching devices may be obtained from:
WESTERN TELEMATIC, INC.
5 Sterling
Irvine, CA 92718 USA
714.586.9950 • 800.854.7226
Fax: 714.583.9514
www.wti.com
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41 - Dip Switches
NOTE: When using a CAS-41 or 41A, move all four jumpers down one position
so that the "DTR" lines printed on the circuit board are not pointing at the jumpers.
271
Printed Documentation
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41a - Dip Switches
NOTE: When using a CAS-41 or 41A, move all four jumpers down one position
so that the "DTR" lines printed on the circuit board are not pointing at the jumpers.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41a - Changing Monitor Pins
The four internal jumpers located on the CAS-41A circuit board are used to
switch the CAS-41A to monitor pin 4 (Request to Send) instead of pin 20 (factory
setting). To switch monitor pins, proceed as follows:
CAUTION:
CAUTION Make certain to power off the CAS-41A and disconnect the power
cable before attempting to remove the instrument cover.
1. Remove the four screws that secure the CAS41A's plastic cover to the chassis. Remove
the cover from the chassis.
2. Locate the jumpers on the CAS-41A circuit
board. As you face the instrument back panel,
the jumpers are located in the lower left hand
corner of the circuit board. Move the jumpers
as shown to monitor pin4.
3. Replace the plastic cover on the CAS-41A
chassis. Reinstall the four screws that secure
the cover to the chassis. Reconnect the
272
Printing
power cable and switch the power on.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c - Dip Switches
The CAS - 81C 8-way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10
position Dip Switches as follows:
NOTE: When purchasing the CAS-81c 8-way switchbox, it must be equipped
with firmware version 1.0a.
Western Telematic Switchbox - 161a - Dip Switches
Western Telematic Switchbox - 41, 41a, 161a Cable Configuration
273
Printed Documentation
Western Telematic Switchbox - 81c Cable Configuration
Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments
274
Printing
If a third CAS-41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above, printer
assignments would be 9 through 12. The same would be true for the CAS-161A,
where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16, the second switch
box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected, it
would go to Printers 33 through 48.
BACK to TOP
Zebra Notes
Optional
Optional Fonts
Backfeed Speed
Print Mode
Communications
Optional Fonts
The Smooth Scalable Font on Zebra printers is supported on the Text Field
definition screen. When using the Smooth Font, there is an additional option
available under the Center/Justify item prompt. This option will appear when the
Source of Data is When Printed or Database. Text can be left or right justified,
centered or field optimized. If you choose the option 'Field Optimized', the defined
area will be filled with wider characters than you originally defined.
Backfeed Speed
275
Printed Documentation
The Backfeed Speed screen item appears on the Format Specification screen
and allows a backfeed speed to be set when printing to any Xi Series or PAX
Printer.
Print Mode
Tear-Off
Peel-Off
Rewind
Applicator
Cutter
Communications
Communication settings for Zebra printers are as follows:
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Handshake: XON/XOFF
Zebra Programming Language: ZPL
BACK to TOP
Print Batch of Formats
Printing a Batch of Formats
To use the print functions, click the Printer icon
of Formats from the menu bar.
Printing a Batch
Output File
Where
Description
276
Printer
Printer Number
Number of
Formats
Starting Record
or choose File | Print Batch
Duplex Print
Alternate Printer
Batch Size
Record Selection
Ending Record
Hold Job
Printing
Printing a Batch
You will be prompted to enter the name of the format to be printed. You may type
the name of your format in at this time. An alphabetized directory will be
displayed across the screen of the label formats in the default directory. If there
are more formats than can be shown, you may use the PgDn key to move to the
next screen. Click on a file name with the left mouse button to select a format to
print.
If you wish to print out an entire database, refer to the $ALL Function and Tutorial.
You will be prompted for the batch size, number of batches, whether to hold the
job at time of printing and an optional job description. All which are explained in
the following:
Printer Number
Select the number of the printer to use in order to print the format. You may also
choose, Print to File. This will allow you to print the format to a .txt file. You can
type in the destination for the output file or choose browse to find a destination.
Duplex Print
Select Yes to simultaneously print the same job on two printers, or No to print the
job on a single printer.
This screen item appears when you have two of the same model printer defined.
Alternate Printer
Select No for NONE or the number of an alternate printer to use in order to print
the format. This item will only appear if you have configured the same printer on
two different ports.
Output File
Enter the name of an output file for the format. Entering the name of an existing
file name will append new information to previous information. Entering a new file
name will create a new file.
Number of Formats
Enter the number of formats you want printed.
Batch Size
Enter the number of identical copies of each format you want printed.
277
Printed Documentation
If the format contains incremented or decremented fields, you will be able to print
any number of identical formats before the increment or decrement function is
applied. This number is the batch size. You need to enter the batch size and then
the number of batches to print.
For example, if you want to print 100 sets of formats with an incremented serial
number going from 001 to 100 and for each serial number, you need six identical
formats showing the serial number, you will need to enter a batch size of 6 and
the number of batches as 100.
Record Selection
Please indicate which records to print. Select All to print ALL records, Range to
print a RANGE of records, Marked to print only those records that are MARKED
for printing or Conditional to print records with common values.
Entering All will print ALL records in the database. Entering Range will allow you
to print a RANGE of records. You will need to specify the starting record number
and the ending record number for the range. Entering Marked will allow you to
print MARKED records. If you had previously viewed a database and selected
individual records for printing, then only the marked records will be printed.
Records that are marked for printing will remain marked until the user unmarks
them from within the database. Entering Conditional will allow you to print records
with common values. You will need to specify a condition in which to print the
database records.
Where
Where
This should be a LOGICAL expression using the field names listed, along with
constants, arithmetic operators, comparison operators and logical operators.
String constants should be enclosed in single quotes. The LIKE comparison
operator can be used to perform pattern matching. A % (percent sign) represents
ANY STRING of characters and an _ (underscore) represents ANY SINGLE
CHARACTER.
Examples:
Examples AISLENUM = 100; COLOR = 'BLUE'; SERIALNUM >= 10001 AND
SERIALNUM <= 10005; UPCCODE LIKE '12130_____7' AND ITEMNUM
<>1000
The database will be searched for all records which match the given criterion,
and only those records will be printed.
Starting Record
The number of the record in which to START printing from. Type in ALL to print
all records in the database.
278
Printing
Ending Record
The number of the record in which to STOP printing.
Hold Job
Select No to let the job begin printing as soon as possible, or Select Yes to hold
the job initially.
The hold job prompt will allow you to begin printing the job as soon as possible or
to hold the job initially. The default for this prompt is No which will typically be the
case. You might be using two different types of stock to print your formats on and
want to answer No for all jobs that will use the stock you have loaded in the
printer, and Yes for jobs that will require a stock change. Also, you may answer
Yes if you wish to stack multiple jobs for printing later.
Description
Enter a job description if desired. This will allow you to type in a short memory aid
such as a part number, customer name or format type, so if you need to modify
this job once it is in the print queue, you will be able to distinguish it from other
jobs.
The following message will now be displayed:
Format Being Added to Format Request Queue
The printer should be turned on and in the ON-LINE/READY mode prior to
sending jobs to the printer. (It takes only a few moments to send the necessary
commands to the Print Queue but the printer will print until the task is complete.)
You may continue to add new formats to the Print Queue, change format data,
scan barcodes, view the Print Queue or quit to the previous menu. The formats
will continue printing until the task is complete. If you completely leave the
program, a dialog box will appear, informing you that the print queue is still active.
You have 3 choices:
Yes - Selecting Y will save the Print Queue. Only those jobs not currently printing
will be saved. Later when you come back into the software, the Print Queue will
be restored.
No - Selecting N will clear all jobs in the Print Queue.
Cancel - Selecting Cancel or pressing ESC will allow you to continue your
session.
NOTE: A record indicating the number of formats printed is written to the format
tracking data file if necessary.
279
Printed Documentation
Once you have selected the format to be printed, the format will be read in and
displayed. Next you will be prompted for any variable data to be used to fill all
variable fields. The format display will now be updated to show the format as it
will look when printed. After entering any variable data, click on the Printer button.
The Print Request screen will appear.
BACK to TOP
Printing a New Format
To select a new format to print from the print screen, click the Open icon
or
choose File | Open from the menu. If you are not already at the print screen, click
the Printer icon or choose File | Print a Batch of Formats from the main menu.
Highlight the name of the format that you wish to print and click Open.
BACK to TOP
Print Request
Format Name
Description
Output File
Batch Size
Printer Number
Number of
Batches
Alternate Print
Duplex Print
Duplex Printer
Cut Option
Option
Format Name
Displays the name that the format was saved as.
Hold Job
Starting Position
Alternate Printer
Description
Enter a job description if desired. This will allow you to type in a short memory aid
such as a part number, customer name or format type, so if you need to modify
this job once it is in the print queue, you will be able to distinguish it from other
jobs.
Printer Number
Select the number of the printer to use in order to print the format. You may also
choose, Print to File. This will allow you to print the format to a .txt file. You can
type in the destination for the output file or choose browse to find a destination.
Hold Job
Select No to let the job begin printing as soon as possible, or Select Yes to hold
the job initially.
280
Printing
The hold job prompt will allow you to begin printing the job as soon as possible or
to hold the job initially. The default for this prompt is No which will typically be the
case. You might be using two different types of stock to print your formats on and
want to answer No for all jobs that will use the stock you have loaded in the
printer, and Yes for jobs that will require a stock change. Also, you may answer
Yes if you wish to stack multiple jobs for printing later.
Output File
When you choose to print a format to File you must specify the name of an output
file for the format. Entering the name of an existing file name will append new
information to previous information. Entering a new file name will create a new
file.
Batch Size
Enter the number of identical copies of each format you want printed.
If the format contains incremented or decremented fields, you will be able to print
any number of identical formats before the increment or decrement function is
applied. This number is the batch size. You need to enter the batch size and then
the number of batches to print.
For example, if you want to print 100 sets of formats with an incremented serial
number going from 001 to 100 and for each serial number, you need six identical
formats showing the serial number, you will need to enter a batch size of 6 and
the number of batches as 100.
Number of Batches
Enter the number of times to increment/decrement the format fields.
Starting Position
Indicate where to begin placing the formats on the first page.
Duplex Print
Select Yes to simultaneously print the same job on two printers, or No to print the
job on a single printer.
This screen item appears when you have two of the same model printers defined.
Duplex Printer
Select the secondary printer that the job is to be printed to.
Alternate Print
Select the number of an alternate printer to use in order to print the format. This
item will only appear if you have configured the same printer on two different
ports.
Alternate Printer
281
Printed Documentation
Select the secondary printer that the job is to be printed to.
Cut Option
Indicate one of the following:
• Do not cut
• Cut after each format
• Cut after each batch
• Cut after whole job
BACK to TOP
Changing Format Data
When Printed/Database
Printed/Database Fields
Fixed Fields
When Printed/Database Fields
To change the variable data for When Printed or Database Fields, click the
Change Format Variable Data icon
or choose Tools | Change Format Data
from the menu bar. For When Printed Fields, you can also right or left click on an
individual field.
The format data input screen will now be displayed. This screen shows the
defined custom prompts for each variable field. Below each prompt is an input
area for the value of the field.
The highlight bar is moved from one area to the next by pressing the TAB key. If
there are more than 6 variable fields, they are grouped in pages, each page
containing 6 prompts.
If there are more than 6 prompts, you may use the PgUp and PgDn keys to move
from one page to the next or previous page. If you press the TAB key from the
last variable field on a page, you will move to the next page. If you press the
SHIFT-TAB key from the top variable field on a page, you will move to the
previous page, if any.
When all data has been entered, press ENTER. Each variable field and any
copied fields will be redisplayed with the current data.
When printing formats that read data from a database, you can view a list of
database search keys. To see the list, click the down arrow next to the field input
box.
When the list box is displayed, the following message also appears:
282
Printing
The list box shows the database search keys matching the pattern entered with
wild card characters being % (any string of characters) and _ (any single
character).
When entering a search key, you can use any of the following wild card
characters to restrict the number of search keys that appear in the list box:
- % (percent sign) or * (asterisk) can be used to represent any group of
characters in the input data.
- _ (underscore) or ? (question mark) can be used to represent a single character
in the input data.
For example, to list all part numbers that begin with the number 56, in the input
box, type: 56% or 56* All database records that begin with 56 will be displayed in
the list box.
Fixed Fields
To change the format data on fixed fields, right or left click on the individual field.
To choose more than one fixed field, hold the CTRL key and click on the fields
that you wish to change.
NOTE: You can prevent users from changing fixed fields by not allowing them
"Update Format" rights. See Adding, Changing or Deleting Users for more
information.
BACK to TOP
Test Print
Disabling Test Print
Duplex Print
Printer Number
Alternate Printer
To test print the current format choose File | Test Print from the menu bar or
select the Test Print icon
from the Standard Tool Bar.
Disabling Test Print
You may disable the Test Print option at the print screen only. It will still be
available while editing a format. This selection can be found by choosing Tools |
Options from the menu bar. To disable Test Print see Program Options for more
details.
If you are configured for the same printer on two different ports, you can specify
which printer should be used prior to Test Printing the format. The Test Print
Request Screen will appear with the following items:
283
Printed Documentation
Printer Number
Select the number of the printer to use in order to print the format.
Duplex Print
Select to simultaneously print the same job on two printers, or leave blank to print
the job on a single printer.
This screen item appears when you have two of the same model printer defined.
Alternate Printer
Select to simultaneously print the same job on two printers, or leave blank to print
the job on a single printer.
The printer should be properly cabled to the computer, turned on, and in the ONLINE/READY mode. The paper or label stock should also be properly positioned.
If an error occurs, see Appendix A: Error Status Messages
NOTE: A record will be written to the format tracking data file indicating that one
format was printed.
BACK to TOP
Print Queue
View/Changing the Print Queue
To View or Change the Print Queue, click the Print Queue
View | Print Queue from the menu bar or press F2.
button, choose
The Print Queue is a job staging area for your various printing jobs. The Print Job
files reside on the hard disk. The software manages these files and loads a new
job after each job is completed until it has exhausted the Print Queue. This will
allow you to load an entire day's work at the start of a shift.
The Print Queue can hold up to 220 jobs.
Change Single Job Status
Edit Job
The Edit function allows you to modify the attributes you defined for a job when
you loaded the job in the Print Queue. Items such as Batch Size, the printer to
send the job to, and the Hold Job option are potential selections.
284
Printing
This function only applies to jobs that have not yet begun to print.
Cancel A Job
This function will allow you to cancel any job individually. You would use this
function if you no longer needed a job you had previously loaded into the Queue,
if one of your printers has broken down, or a format has started to print and you
immediately recognize that incorrect information is being printed. This function
immediately resets the printer and rewrites any associated report to reflect how
many formats, if any, had been printed.
Move Down
This function should be used to prioritize when Non - Printing jobs will be printed.
Select the job that you want to move down in priority. Click the Move Down button
until the job is in the desired location in the print queue.
Move Up
This function should be used to prioritize when Non - Printing jobs will be printed.
For example: A truck just pulled up to your shipping dock and the freight is ready
but not labeled. The job is in the Queue but it is Job Number 25.
Simply Freeze All of the jobs to that printer, move Job 25 to Job 2, by selecting
the job and clicking the Move Up button, then resume all the jobs to that printer.
You can Freeze all jobs except the one that is currently printing.
Freeze
The Freeze function will cause a job that is waiting to print to be suspended. It will
be placed in Freeze status immediately. A job in Freeze status will not print until
Unfrozen. This will allow you to move the job in the Queue. Only non-printing jobs
can be suspended or frozen.
UnFreeze
The Unfreeze function will allow you to change any job that is in a Frozen state
into one that is waiting to print. You should use this function after changing to a
285
Printed Documentation
new label stock, changing the routing of this job to a specific printer, changing the
quantity of formats requested or moving the job in the Queue.
Change all jobs associated with Printer
Defined Printers
Provides a list of all the currently defined printers. The Manufacturer , Model, and
defined port are listed for each printer.
Printer Status
Click the Printer Status button to receive information back from the printer such
as the model number, firmware version and memory available. You may also be
able to reset the printer or perform a label feed. These options will vary based on
the printer being used.
Cancel All
Allows you the capability to cancel all jobs associated with a designated printer.
Select the printer you wish to have all of its jobs cancelled and click the Cancel
All button.
Freeze All
Allows you the capability to Freeze all jobs associated with a designated printer.
Select the printer for which you wish to freeze the jobs.
UnFreeze All
Allows you the capability to UnFreeze all jobs associated with a designated
printer. Select the printer for which you wish to unfreeze the jobs.
Status Window
Job
The number of a specific job. Used to define a specific job when jobs are sent to
the Print Queue. The print queue currently supports up to 220 jobs
simultaneously.
Format
286
Printing
The assigned Format Name for the format being printed.
Description
A description of the job. If you gave this job a descriptive name when you first
placed the job in the print queue, the description will be displayed.
Printer
The printer you defined for printing this job. If you defined more than 1 printer to
send this format to, the request will be routed to the first available printer.
Status
The Status of the job being prepared for printing. Possible conditions are:
•Cannot change active or completed job - Unable to edit or move a job that
is currently printing or completed job.
•Cannot find job - Unable to find a specified job.
•Comm error - Error on the specified Serial Port.
•Database error - An error reading from a database.
•Excess fonts - Too many fonts specified.
•Font load - Sending fonts to printer.
•Font load/Busy - Sending fonts to printer - printer is busy.
•Frozen - Job will not start printing until Unfrozen.
•Graphic load - Sending a graphic to the printer.
•Graphic load/busy - Sending a graphic to printer - printer busy.
•Invalid device - Invalid device attached or specified.
•Paper out - Printer is out of paper.
•Picture error - Error reading picture file.
•Port unavailable - The specified port is unavailable.
287
Printed Documentation
•Printer paused - Pause on the printer.
•Printing - Current job or batch is printing.
•Printing/Busy - Current job or batch is printing and is unable to accept
additional information or is OFF-LINE.
•Ribbon out - Printer is out of ribbon.
•There are no jobs in queue - No jobs are in the Print Queue.
•Unable to open - Unable to open a specified file.
•Waiting - Job will print as soon as assigned printer is available.
Total
The total number of identical formats in each batch.
To Do
The total number of formats left to be completed.
Other Messages
•Cannot Move a Job that is Printing
•Cannot Edit a Job that is Printing
•Cannot Freeze a Job that is Printing
•The Format Request List is Full. Cannot Add this Job Probable Cause:
Print Queue is full or 220 jobs in Queue - allow jobs to run and add job later.
•Picture Error - Cannot read picture or picture too large. Probable Cause:
The specified picture file cannot be found or the size of the picture is too
large.
•Queue Error - Error loading job in queue. Probable Cause: A .JOB file
cannot be found while restoring the Print Queue.
Job List Files
What is a Job List File?
288
Printing
A Job List File is basically a saved print queue. Job lists can be created to print
specific sequences of labels. A job list can be opened, and all the jobs in the list
can then be added to the print queue in one operation. It is also possible to send
individual jobs or a selected group of jobs from the list to the Print Queue.
Any number of Job List Files can be created, saved and then loaded for printing
at any time.
Job List Files do not require any programming experience or require any special
syntax. Therefore, they are an EASY way to automate label printing by loading
the print queue with multiple print jobs.
How Do I Create a Job List File?
Creating a Job List File is as EASY as printing labels:
1. Select File | New | Job List File (.jlf) from the main menu in the Platinum, or
Multi-user version of the software. You will then be presented with the Job
List Editor.
2. To add jobs to the list, select Edit | Add Job from the main menu or click
the ‘Add a Job to the Job List’ button on the toolbar. Then select the
format you wish to add to the list and click Open.
3. Then enter any variable data to be used for this print job and click
OK. You will be presented with a preview of the printed label, click OK to
close the preview.
4. The print request screen will be displayed allowing you to enter printer
number, batch size, etc. Click OK when finished to add the job to the list.
Repeat these steps to add more jobs to the list. You are not limited to one format
or one printer, the Job List can be comprised of an assortment of label formats
and printers.
When you are finished, select File | Save to save the job list
Using Job List Files
For a Job List File to function correctly the formats, file paths and correct printers
must be set up in the software in the same as when the Job List file was
created. Otherwise errors will occur and/or the jobs will not be printed correctly.
To Print a Job List:
1. Select File | Open | Job List File from the main menu in the Platinum, or
Multi-user version of the software.
2. Select the Job List you wish to open.
3. Select File | Print Job List from the main menu to load the entire job list.
289
Printed Documentation
If a print job had ‘Hold Job’ set to ‘Yes’ when it was added to the Job List File, it is
still sent to the Print Queue. It is added in a frozen state. To print this job a user
must unfreeze the job in the Print Queue.
Printing Individual Items
To print only a selected job from the Job List:
1. Select File | Open | Job List File from the main menu in the Platinum, or
Multi-user version of the software.
2. Select the Job List you wish to open.
3. Select an individual job from the Job List you want to print by single left
clicking on it. Hold down the Control key when clicking to select more than
one job.
4. Select File | Print Job List from the main menu to load the entire job list.
Editing Job List Files
You can delete jobs, modify jobs and change their position within the Job List by
using selections from the menu or the toolbar buttons.
To edit a job in the Job list, select it by single left clicking on it and then:
1. Select Edit | Delete Job from the menu to delete it from the Job List.
2. Select Edit | Move Up from the menu to move the order of the job up in the
Job List.
3. Select Edit | Move Down from the menu to move the order of the job down
in the Job List.
4. Select Edit | Modify from the menu to modify the input and destination of
the job. You will be prompted for the variable data and for the printer
number, batch size, etc.
Print Format Definition
Print Format
Definitions
Printer Setup
Destination
Output to File
Top Margin
Left Margin
Font Setup
This report, produced in hard copy form, is a listing of the format specifications,
as well as specification data for each field defined on the format.
Print Format Definitions
Open the format that you want to print definitions for and choose Tools | Print
Print
Format Definition from the menu bar.
Next, you are presented with the printing options for printing format definitions.
290
Printing
Each of the Format Definition Print option items are described in the following
section:
Destination
Please select the destination for the report. The selections are:
•Printer -- sends the report to a printer
•Printer Data File -- creates a file which includes printer control characters
•Text File -- creates a fixed-space ASCII text file.
Output to File
Define the Name/Path of the file to be created when Printer Data File or Text File
is selected under Destination.
Font Setup
Select No to use the default printer font. Select Yes for the option to use
a different font for this report.
Printer Setup
Select No to use the current default printer options. Select Yes to bring up the
"Windows Print Setup" box. This allows the user to select and configure which
printer to send the format definition to.
Top Margin
Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in
inches or millimeters.
Left Margin
Enter the HORIZONTAL OFFSET of the print image area from the left edge of the
paper in inches or millimeters.
BACK to TOP
Advanced Printing
IP Printing
From the Printer Configuration screen choose "IP" from the Type of Port drop
down menu. Enter the IP Address of the printer or print server in the IPAddress/Printer Name text box. For example, 192.168.1.2.
IP Communications
Select 'RAW' to use RAW IP communication, 'FTP' to use FTP communication, or
'LPR' to use LPR IP communication. The FTP or LPR printer protocols should be
used if the selected server
device does not support RAW mode very well or if the device only supports LPR
or FTP printing. When using LPR or FTP consult with your network administrator
291
Printed Documentation
to determine the Queue Name and the FTP User Name/Password that should be
used.
Port Number
When RAW is selected, enter the Raw Data Port Number of the printer. You may
select from the list of the most common port numbers, however you may enter
one that is not in the list. You should obtain this number from the documentation
for the printer or print server that is being used.
You may also click on the "Scan" button to scan the IP address given for
available ports. You will then be notified that some Antivirus Software or
Firewalls may regard this scanning for available ports as virus activity, click OK to
begin the scan.
Anonymous FTP
Select 'YES' to use anonymous FTP login. Select 'NO' to use a user name and
password for the FTP login.
FTP User Name
After selecting 'NO' for Anonymous FTP, enter the user name to be used for FTP
printing. Your network administrator should be able to provide this information.
FTP
FTP Password
After selecting 'NO' for Anonymous FTP and entering the FTP User Name, enter
the password for the user selected for FTP printing. Your network administrator
should be able to provide this information.
FTP/LPR Queue Name
Enter the printer's queue name for FTP/LPR printing. Your network administrator
should be able to provide this information.
Time Out
Enter the number of seconds to wait while attempting to connect to the printer
before reporting a connection error.
Note: When opening a printer connected via TCP/IP, the software will attempt
three connections before reporting an error.
USB Printing
Only supported USB printers will display USB as an available port for
communication.
The first time you plug in a USB printer, Windows will automatically detect it and
search for a suitable driver. If a suitable driver is not installed you'll be presented
with the "Found New Hardware Wizard". At this time you should install the
Windows driver for the printer by following the steps outlined in the wizard.
292
Printing
Follow these steps to add a USB printer for use in the Software:
1. Choose "Settings" | "Printer Configuration" from the main menu bar. Then
click the "Add a New Printer" icon or select "Edit" | "Add" from the menu bar.
2. Select the printer's manufacturer and model from the drop down boxes.
3. Select USB from the "Type of Port" drop down box.
4. Normally, the USB port will be automatically selected for you. If you have
more than one USB printer of that model attached you will have to select the USB
port number associated with the printer under the “USB Port” option. Then click
on the "Test Connection" button to make sure the selected port is available for
USB printing.
5. Fill in the remainder of the options for your printer. For help on these options
consult the “Setup” page for your printer family in the Software’s Help file.
6. When you are finished setting up the printer configuration click “OK". You will
have to restart the Software before the printer can be used.
Even though the Windows driver for the USB printer is installed we still
recommend that you use the Software's internal drivers when possible.
Network Printing - UNC (Universal Naming Convention)
Setting Up a Printer
To print to a thermal/thermal transfer printer that is not using a Windows driver,
you should follow these steps on the computer where the printer is actually
attached:
1. From Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP, click Start | Settings | Printers
2. Double-click on the "Add Printer" icon
3. The "Add Printer Wizard" will be displayed, click "Next" to start the Wizard
4. Choose "Local Printer", click "Next"
5. Choose the port that the printer is connected to, click "Next"
6. From the Manufacturers list on the left side, choose "Generic"
7. From the Printers list on the right side, choose "Generic/Text Only"
8. Click "Next"
9. Type the printer name; for example MyApolloPrinter
10. Choose whether or not you would like this printer to be your default
Windows printer, click "Next"
11. Select the "Share Name" option and enter the share name for the
printer. This will be the name that will be used to identify the printer on the
network.
12. Follow the rest of the "Add Printer Wizard" instructions
293
Printed Documentation
Installing the Printer
To install the printer in the software:
1. Choose Settings | Printer Configuration from the main menu bar. Then
click the Add a New Printer icon or select Edit | Add from the menu bar.
2. Select the Printer Manufacturer and Printer Model you wish to install.
3. On the General tab choose Network/Windows from the Type of Port drop
down box.
4. In the Path text box enter the path to the shared printer, or you can browse
your network by selecting the Browse button.
5. Click OK to finish.
BACK to TOP
Multi - Port Serial Printing
Multi-Port serial printing is supported for devices such as DigiBoards and
RocketPorts.
When configuring a printer, simply indicate which COM port is to be used for
"Port".
294
Internal dBase Database
Database Functions
The Database Functions include: Creating and Defining a New Database; Adding,
Changing or Erasing Records From a Database; Erasing a Database Field,
Browsing or Searching the Database; Printing, Erasing the Database, Modifying a
Database Structure.
Adding a Database
Field Name
Add a New Field
Sequentially
Data Type
Decimal Places
Field Position
Adding a Database
Insert a New Field
Field Length
Editing the Database
Structure
Structure
Reserved Words
Adding a Database
To add a new database, click the New icon
from the menu bar or select File
| New.
New A dialog box will appear, click Save as Type and choose Database Files
(*.dbf). Enter a filename for the database and click Add.
Add.
Up to 7 index files per database may be specified. This allows for much faster
access to the data when printing formats. When you are asked for a search field
name, when defining a database field in a format, it should be one of your
indexed fields.
When using a database search key, an index file will be created based on your
chosen search key, thus making the search time faster. Once the index file is
created, it will be saved as part of your database structure.
The structure of the internal database is the same as that used by the program
dBASEIII+. This makes it possible to use many of the powerful features of dBASE
on your database or to access a database created by dBASEIII+.
You may use databases created under dBASE III, III+, IV or an ASCII database
directly, without having to convert them first to ASCII text files. Your dBASE files
may be copied into this software's subdirectory if desired. However, this is not
necessary because any file may be accessed simply by specifying the path. The
available database files will be displayed in alphabetical order for the default
directory or subdirectory.
295
Printed Documentation
Since the software's database structure is compatible with dBASE III, III+ and IV
file structure, databases can handle up to 128 fields per record, over 4000 bytes
per record and more than 1 million records per file.
NOTE: When fields are displayed on the screen for purposes of editing or viewing,
only those fields that will fit in one window will be shown. Having a print out of the
structure of your dBASE fields will serve as a reminder of those fields not seen.
The data from these databases can be included in formats designed with the
software. A format field can be specified so that it contains the value from a
particular database field in a specified database. For each database that will be
used in this way, a particular field must be specified as the search field. When the
field's data is to be retrieved, the database is searched to find a record that
matches the desired value entered by the operator. A database record can also
be designed to contain a serial number value. The purpose of this, for example, is
to allow part number specific serial numbers, rather than format specific serial
numbers. To declare a field to be a serial number, you can design the structure to
have a numeric field with the desired length.
For retrieving a record in the quickest possible time, an internal database should
be used. This is an internally indexed file that allows for rapid search.
Also included under the database functions are the functions associated with
Serial Files. These files hold the data for a given format field that require unique
values for each format printed.
You will be asked to enter a new database name. An alphabetical listing of
current database files will also be displayed. Afterwards, you will be presented
with the Database Structure Creation screen. From here you need to define the
structure of the database.
The following options will allow you to define new fields for the database:
Add a New Field Sequentially
Sequentially - Will add the new fields in sequential order.
Insert a New Field - Will allow you to insert a new field in any order you wish.
For the above options, the database field definition screen will be presented.
Field Name
The name of the field may be up to 10 characters long. The name must begin
with a letter but may also contain numbers and the underscore character.
Embedded blanks are not permitted. The field name can also be a Reserved
Word
Data Type
296
Internal dBase Database
Valid field types are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
Character
Numeric
Logical
Memo
Date
Field Length
This is the maximum number of characters or digits that are to be contained in
the field. Date, logical and memo fields are fixed length fields.
Decimal Places
The number of decimal positions in a numeric field. The value entered here
should be 2 less than the field length of the numeric field value.
Example: A numeric field length of 5 may have decimal places defined as 3, 2, 1
or 0.
Field Position
The position to insert the field within the structure. This appears after you have
defined at least one field for the database.
Editing the Database Structure
In order to edit the database, you must first choose the option Create the New
Database. After creating a new database, the Database Records Management
screen will be presented.
Reserved Words
There are four (4) reserved words that can be used for database field names:
FMTCOUNT, BARSUPP, LBLCOUNT and FMTNAME. More information and an
example of their use can be found here.
FMTCOUNT allows you to control the number of labels printed for each
individual record when using the $all function. When FMTCOUNT is used
as a field name, the record is printed as many times as the number stored
in this field. FMTCOUNT is useful when different records in the database
require a different number of labels. For example, when multiple locations
are used to shelve an item.
297
Printed Documentation
BARSUPP allows you to suppress the printing of all bar codes on a
particular label when using the $all function. This would be used to prevent
attempted reordering of a discontinued item or attempted ordering of a
vendor replenished item. When BARSUPP is used as a field name the
absence of a character means print the code. The presence of any
character means suppress the code.
LBLCOUNT allows you to change the default batch size for individual
database records. When LBLCOUNT is used as a field name, the value
stored in this field becomes the default batch size when printing single
database records. LBLCOUNT will not work with the $all function, use
FMTCOUNT if you are using $all.
FMTNAME is the fourth reserved word. FMTNAME prevents you from
printing an incorrect format with a database record. Formats used with
FMTNAME should have the same field names on each of the formats and
contain only ONE database connection. Connecting to more that one
database when using FMTNAME will cause unexpected results. To make
use of FMTNAME, follow these steps:
1) Follow the instructions, above, to add a database and to add new
fields.
2) Make the FMTNAME field as a new field:
The Field Name is FMTNAME.
FMTNAME
The Data Type is Character.
Enter the field length.
Once all new fields are added, click on Create the New
Database.
3) Follow the instructions in Editing a Database, to add records to a
database. The fields in the database record MUST be populated.
Enter the data for each field in the database. The data for the
FMTNAME field is the name of the format in which this database
record will be used. For example, if the database contains information
about parts, and the format name is PARTLBL, then the data for the
FMTNAME field should be PARTLBL.
If the FMTNAME field is left blank for any record, then that particular record can
be printed on any format that makes use of the database.
BACK to TOP
298
Internal dBase Database
Modifying a Database Field
To modify a database field, highlight the field to be modified and then click the
Modify Field icon
or choose Edit | Modify Field from the Database Structure
Management screen.
The data type, field length or number of decimal places is modifiable. The name
of the field cannot be modified. If you need to modify the name of the field, you
must first erase the field then add or insert a new field.
NOTE: If there is database information in this field, it will be lost if you erase the
field.
Erasing a Database Field
To erase a database field, highlight the field to be erased then click on the Erase
Field icon
or choose Edit | Erase Field from the Database Structure
Management screen.
Indexing a Database
To add an index file, click the Add Index File icon
or choose File | Add Index
File from the Database Structure Management screen.
Index File Name
Enter a name for the index file.
Value Indexed
Enter the name of the field to be indexed, or several names joined by the symbol
|.
For example: Field1 | Field2 | Field3
Indexes can be created for the purposes of using the database file in a logical
order rather than a physical order. Physical order is the order in which records
were entered. Logical order is an alphabetical, chronological or numerical order
based on a specified field type.
With the exception of logical and memo fields, any field type can be indexed. An
index may consist of an expression of 2 fields; however, this expression must
consist of only 1 field type.
Because of the software's compatibility with dBASE III, III+ and IV, updating a
database file in dBASE is possible. If an index file exists, but is not updated at the
299
Printed Documentation
same time the database is updated, the first time you access the database in the
software, a Dialog Box will appear stating that the index is out of date. At this time,
you can choose OK to update the index or Cancel (ESC) to continue without
updating the index file. If you choose Cancel, each time you access this database,
the Dialog Box will appear.
BACK to TOP
Adding an Index File
Adding an Index File
To define an index to be associated with a database, click the Add Index File icon
from the menu bar from the Database Structure Management screen or
choose File | Add
Add Index File from the menu bar.
Each database can have up to 7 index files associated with it. Index values may
be composed of a single field or an expression involving several fields.
Example:
Example If your database is a customer database and the structure contains
customer information fields, such as FIRSTNAME, LASTNAME, ADDRESS and
STATE, you may want to organize your data by a certain category. By organizing
the data, quicker and more efficient searches can be done. If you want to
organize all customer records by their last names, the index value would be the
field LASTNAME. If you have several customers with identical last names, you
may want to organize the records by last names as well as first names. The index
value will be the expression: LASTNAME + FIRSTNAME. All customers with the
same last name will be grouped together. Within this grouping, customers are
alphabetically arranged by first name.
The following are two requirements for an index file:
Index File Name
A unique name for the index file. The file name can be up to 255 characters as
supported under Windows 95b and higher.
Embedded blanks are not permitted.
Value Indexed
The name of the field to be indexed. For the purposes of grouping records into
categories.
BACK to TOP
300
Internal dBase Database
Erasing an Index File
To erase an index file, highlight the index file then click the Erase Index File icon
or choose File | Erase Index File from the Database Structure Management
screen.
Updating a Database
To update an existing database, click the Create Database
Database File icon
Database Structure Management screen.
from the
You will be prompted to confirm that you want to Recreate the Database.
Database If you
have made changes that you wish to keep, click OK,
OK if not click Cancel.
Changing a Database Structure
To change the structure of an existing database, click the Database Structure
Management icon
from the Database Records Management screen.
From this screen, you will be able to add, insert, modify or erase fields, or add or
delete index files. After making the desired changes, choose File | Recreate
Database File from the Database Structure Management screen to make
permanent changes to the database structure.
Editing a Database
To edit database records, click the Edit and View Records in Form View
or
Edit and View Records in Datasheet View
icons or choose Edit | Edit and View
Records in Form View or Edit | Edit and View Datasheet from the menu bar.
If a database file is opened by multiple users simultaneously, the first user to
open it will have read/write access. All other users will have read-only access.
Add Records
Mark for Erase
Change Records
Mark for Print
Search
Viewing the Data
Unmark All
Add Records
The highlight bar will move to the first field of a blank record. Field data will be
entered to the right of the field name. The TAB key will move among the fields. If
there are more fields than can be displayed at once, the fields will be displayed in
sets called pages. When the last field data is entered, press ENTER to add the
record. You can change the data and press ENTER to add additional records.
Press ESC to stop adding records. If you did not change any field data, but
301
Printed Documentation
pressed ENTER again, a Dialog Box will be displayed asking whether the record
should be added. Click OK to add the record. This will make a duplicate record in
the database. Click Cancel to not add a duplicate record.
While adding several records to the database, the last record entered is left on
the screen. Similar field data will not have to be retyped for subsequent records.
For example, this allows you the ability to change only a single character in a 10
character part number field without retyping the entire part number.
When entering paragraph information, you can use a text editor. From within the
edit box, you can open and edit an existing text file, save the paragraph data as a
file, cut text to, copy or paste text from the Windows clipboard, or delete text.
Once you have finished modifying the paragraph data, you can return to the
previous screen by selecting File then Exit. While typing the data for your
paragraph, you can select the edit box by pressing ALT+E or by clicking on the
Edit button.
Change Record
This function allows you to update a value in a field. This function applies to the
currently displayed record. Once the current record has been modified, you may
select Add to add additional records. Please refer to Add Records.
NOTE: To edit a memo field, the procedures for typing text, correcting errors and
editing text are the same as those for any standard Windows application.
Search
This function allows you to enter specific values into various fields in order to
locate a specific record. The software allows for multiple search keys. You may
enter data into a single field or several fields in order to reduce the number of
records that satisfy the search criteria. Once you have entered the search data
for any field(s), press ENTER. All records matching the search criteria will be
presented. When the records are displayed, you may use the up/left arrow keys
or the option Search Back to view previous records, if any. To view next records,
if any, you may use the down/right arrow or the option Search Next. Click Quit
Search or press ESC to leave the search subfunction.
The search function will recognize the wildcard characters * and ? if this box is
enabled. If you desire to view all records, for example, in a customer database, in
which last names begin with Mc,
Mc you can use the wildcard *. The * character
substitutes for any and all characters. For the above search, type Mc* in the
LASTNAME field entry prompt. If you desire to view all records in which the last
name is only 6 positions in length and the name begins with Mc,
Mc you can use the
wildcard ?. The ? character substitutes for a single character. For the above
search, type Mc???? in the LASTNAME field entry prompt.
302
Internal dBase Database
Search records can also be modified. Click Change Record to modify the
currently displayed record. Press ENTER or click OK when changes are
completed. Click Quit or press ESC to leave the currently displayed record
unchanged. Click Add Records to add more records to the database. New
records are added to the end of the database.
Unmark All
This function unmarks all records that are marked for printing. The records will
not be unmarked automatically after the database is printed. Therefore, you must
choose to unmark the records after printing. This function applies to the ALL
records that are marked for printing.
Mark for Erase
This function marks the viewed record for erase. Click once on the check box to
place an X in the box. When the Compress function is chosen, all marked
records are erased permanently. Until then, any record can be unmarked.
Mark for Print
This function marks the viewed record for printing. Click once on the check box to
place an X in the box. This function applies to the currently displayed record. To
unmark an individual record that was previously marked for printing, click once on
the check box to remove the X from the box.
VIEWING THE DATA:
Left arrow-Show previous record.
Right arrow-Show next record.
PgUp-Show previous page if any.
PgDn-Show next page if any.
Home-Show first record.
End-Show last record.
BACK to TOP
Form View
303
Printed Documentation
A window that displays one entire record at a time. To open a table in Form
view go to the Database Records Management screen and select the Form view
icon
.
Datasheet View
A window that displays data in a row and column format. In Datasheet view you
can edit fields, add and delete data, and search for data. To open a table in
Datasheet view go to the Database Records Management screen and select the
Datasheet view icon
.
Printing the Database Records
To print the database records, click on the Print All Records icon
or choose
File | Print All Records from the Database Records Management screen.
Printing Records
Printer Setup
Left Margin
Destination
Font Setup
Report Title
Where
Top Margin
Include Fields
Printing Records
If you are printing labels with a thermal/thermal transfer printer, you will need an
ink-jet, laser or dot matrix printer to print a database.
Your printer should be turned on, in the ON-LINE/READY mode and loaded with
paper. The database fields will be printed within the width of the paper.
After selecting to print all records, you will be presented with the Printing Options
specification screen. Once you have entered all items correctly, the information
will be sent to the printer or, as an alternative, the database records can also be
printed to a file.
Each of the Database Print option items are described in the following section.
Destination
Please select the destination for the report. Select Printer to send the report to
the printer, Printer Data File to create a file which includes printer control
characters, or Text File to create a fixed-space ASCII text file.
Where
304
Internal dBase Database
This should be a LOGICAL expression using the field names listed, along with
constants, arithmetic operators, comparison operators and logical operators.
String constants should be enclosed in single quotes. The LIKE comparison
operator can be used to perform pattern matching. A % (percent sign) represents
ANY STRING of characters and an _ (underscore) represents ANY SINGLE
CHARACTER.
Examples:
Examples AISLENUM = 100; COLOR = 'BLUE'; SERIALNUM >= 10001 AND
SERIALNUM <= 10005; UPCCODE LIKE '12130_____7' AND ITEMNUM
<>1000
Printer Setup
Select No to use the current default printer options. Select Yes to change the
printer options for this report. Modified printer settings are specific to the currently
selected report.
Font Setup
Select No to use the default printer font, or Yes to select a different font for this
report.
Top Margin
Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in
hundredths of inches or tenths of millimeters.
Left Margin
Enter the HORIZONTAL OFFSET of the print image area from the left edge of the
paper in hundredths of inches or tenths of millimeters.
Report Title
Enter the Report title that should appear on each page. For the default Report
title, leave BLANK.
Include Fields
Indicate which fields are to be included in the report by choosing from the list
shown. Fields are printed in the sequence that they were chosen.
BACK to TOP
Compressing the Database
305
Printed Documentation
To compress the database, click on the Compress and Reor
Re-index icon
choose File | Compress and ReRe-index from the menu bar from the Database
Records Management screen.
The Compress function will rewrite the database taking out all records marked for
deletion. Also, any index files associated with this database will be completely
rewritten to reflect the changes.
NOTE: THIS FUNCTION WILL PERMANENTLY ERASE ALL MARKED
RECORDS
Sorting the Database
To sort the database click the Sort and ReRe-index Database icon
or choose
File | Sort and ReRe-index Database from the Database Records Management
screen.
You will be presented with the following items.
Sort Key
An index expression to be used as the sort key. This can be a field name or an
expression involving several fields. Available field names will be displayed in the
Dialog Box. If an index file has been created for the database, the index value
expression will be displayed as well.
Sort Sequence
Indicate which order the database is to be sorted. The sort order can be
Ascending or Descending order.
Writing Database Records to a Text File
To write all database information to a text file, click the Write All Records to Text
File icon
or choose File | Write All Records to Text File from the Database
Records Management screen.
This option converts all records in the current database to standard text records.
The resulting file can then be used as input to another program, edited, sent
across communication lines, etc.
When selected, you will be prompted to enter the name of the file to be written.
Choose the path and filename.
306
Internal dBase Database
The resulting file will contain one fixed length line for each database record. Each
line will be terminated by a carriage return - line feed sequence. Within the record,
each field will occupy a fixed number of spaces equal to the field length in spaces
in the database field. There are no separators between fields.
Appending Records to a Database
To append records from an existing text file, click the Append Records from Text
File icon
or choose File | Append Records from Text File from the Database
Records Management screen.
This function allows you to add records from a standard text file to the database
currently selected, such as records that are resident on a host computer system.
Before appending any records, you must first create a database in the software to
accept the data. Make sure that this new database structure is exactly the same
as the one you are appending from. It should contain the same number of fields,
name of fields, field types and field lengths so that no data is lost.
When selected, you will be instructed to enter the name of the file that contains
the records to be read. At the same time, the software displays a list of currently
defined .TXT files in alphabetical order. When entering the file name, you may
include a drive designator, a path and file extension.
For example: C:\datafile.dat. You may select the desired file. Then click OK or
press ENTER when done.
The text file must contain one line for each database record. See Writing
Database Records to a Text File. Within the record, each field should occupy a
fixed number of columns equal to the field length in the database. There should
be no separators between fields. A carriage return - line feed sequence must
terminate each record. If a record contains more data than can fit in a database
record, then data beyond the columns for the last database field will be ignored. If
a record contains less data than required for the database record, then the record
beyond will be padded with blanks to fill the remainder of the database record.
Sample text file to be appended to a database:
John
Smith
Bill Jones
Bob
Cooper
1234 Main Street
Chicago
Illinois
810 West Blvd.
1112 Euclid Avenue
Detroit
Cleveland
Michigan
Ohio
Michael Goldsmith123 North LorainAve.GrandHavenNew York
307
Printed Documentation
The last record in the text file above illustrates the point that the append function
works on columns with no separators between fields.
Erase ALL Records
To erase ALL records from a database, click on the Erase All Records icon
choose Edit | Erase All Records from the menu bar on the Database Records
Management screen.
or
You will be prompted to confirm this action. To proceed with erasing ALL records
in the database, click OK, or click Cancel.
308
Databaseview
Databaseview Functions
Databaseview is a database editor that uses Microsoft OLE DB. This new editor
natively supports the Microsoft Access® structure allowing you to edit and create
Access databases from within the Databaseview software. In addition, with the
appropriate drivers you can view and edit almost any database structure
including dBase®, Paradox®, and Microsoft FoxPro®. Excel and XML tables can
be viewed from within the software however they can not be edited. It is strongly
recommended that you lock the software out of any database that you do not
want to be modified, by using a password or by making it read-only. This will
prevent unauthorized editing by users.
To start Databaseview click on the 'Start
Start the Databaseview'
Databaseview icon
Function Toolbar or select File | Databaseview from the menu bar.
on the
The Databaseview functions include: Creating and Defining a New Access
Database; Adding, Changing or Erasing Records From a Database; Browsing or
Searching the Database; Printing, and Changing a Database Structure.
Data Sources
Provider
Advanced
Connection
All
Establishing an OLE DB connection will enable you to view and edit almost any
database structure. To establish an OLE DB connection click the 'Data
Data Source'
Source
icon
on the Standard toolbar or select File | Connect from the menu
bar. You will then be presented with the Data Link Properties dialog box. Each
tab is described below.
Provider
Use the Provider tab to select the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of
data you want to access. Not all applications allow you to specify a provider or
modify the current selection; this tab is displayed only if your application allows
the OLE DB provider selection to be edited.
Connection
Use the Connection tab to specify how to connect to your data using an OLE DB
provider.
The Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is provider-specific
and displays only the connection properties required by the selected OLE DB
provider. Connection properties allow you to specify where your data is located
and how to connect to the data.
309
Printed Documentation
NOTE: When using the Jet database provider with a single user password
protected database do NOT set the password on the Connection Tab. This
needs to be set on the ALL tab.
Advanced
Use the Advanced tab to view and set other initialization properties for your data.
The Advanced tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is provider-specific and
displays only the initialization properties required by the selected OLE DB
provider.
ALL
Use the All tab to view and edit all OLE DB initialization properties available for
your OLE DB provider. Properties can vary depending on the OLE DB provider
you are using.
NOTE: To set the password for a single user protected MDB database, you need
to enter the password into the "Jet
Jet OLEDB:Database Password"
Password Property on the
ALL tab. Do NOT set any password on the Connection Tab.
BACK to TOP
Cross Reference Wizard
Wizard
Destination Field
Data Source
Data Field
Records
Clauses
Table Name
Available
Records
Example
Search Field
Select Records
Sometimes it is necessary to not only pull in data from one database but from a
second, third or more databases. It is possible in the software to create a
Database Cross Reference and then use it to accomplish this. The Database
Cross Reference acts as a pointer that directs the software to the database
where the data is stored.
To use this function, you must create a Database Cross Reference following
certain rules. A Database Cross Reference is a special text string that can reside
in any database system. The Database Cross Reference’s can also be nested
meaning that one Database Cross Reference can point to another Database
Cross Reference and so on until finally the data field is located.
Click the 'Database
Database Cross Reference'
on the Standard toolbar or select
Reference icon
Edit | Cross Reference from the menu bar to use the software's wizard to create
your Database Cross Reference text string. A description of each option
available in the wizard follows:
Destination Field
310
Databaseview
The field in the database table that will contain the Database Cross Reference
text string.
Data Source
The database that contains the data to be accessed.
Variable Table
This option is to be used when creating hazardous chemical labels with multilingual text. With it enabled, you will be able to choose a table with a specific
language from within Easylabel.
Note: This option has to be enabled in the Cross Reference Wizard and the
corresponding database field on the label format.
Table Name
The table that contains the data to be accessed.
Search Field
The search field is the field within the table that contains data your search will be
performed on.
Data Field
The field that contains the data you want to reference in your Cross Reference.
Records
A listing of all the records selected in the Cross Reference.
Available Records
A snapshot of the database table which only includes the Search Field and the
Data Field.
Select Records
A listing of all the records selected in the Cross Reference.
You can also create your own Database Cross Reference by following the rules
below.
The Database Cross Reference string must start with the ‘>’ character and it
contains the name of the data source (file or system DSN), the name of the table,
the name of the key field, the name of the data field, which record(s) to use as
data, and a divider to separate multiple records. The software sees the text
following the ‘>’ as a command and will only print the command as text if an error
has occurred.
Clauses
NAME (short code N)
The NAME clause is of the form:
NAME=datasourcename or N=datasourcename
311
Printed Documentation
Where datasourcename specifies which existing data source stores the
information about how to connect to the desired database. Either a file DSN or
system DSN can be used.
TABLE (short code T)
The TABLE clause is of the form:
TABLE=tablename or T=tablename
Where tablename specifies the name of the table to retrieve data from. If you
wish to use the Variable Table option, enter "??" for the table name.
KEYFIELD (short code K)
The KEYFIELD clause is of the form:
KEYFIELD=fieldname or K=fieldname
Where fieldname specifies the name of the field to be used as a search key.
DATAFIELD (short code D)
The DATAFIELD clause is of the form:
DATAFIELD=fieldname or D=fieldname
Where fieldname specifies the name of the field to be used as printed data.
RECORD (short code R)
The RECORD clause is of the form:
RECORD=string1,string2,string… or R=string1,string2,string….
RECORD specifies the record(s) searched for within the key field.
DIVIDE (short code V)
The DIVIDE clause is of the form:
DIVIDE=”string” or V=”string”
Or DIVIDE=2 or V=2
Where “string” is a text character string that will separate each record. If DIVIDE
is set equal to a number the software will insert that many blank lines after each
record. If no value for DIVIDE is specified, a carriage return will be added to start
the next record on a new line.
The entire string must be enclosed in braces {} and clauses must be separated by
semi colons (;).
Example
>{N=RISKSAFETY;T=GERMAN;KEY=ID;DATA=PHRASE;R=R2,S17}
For this example the data source name is RISKSAFETY. We are looking in the
GERMAN table under the ID column for R2 and S17. We will then pull out the
data stored in the PHRASE column for those two records. Since we did not
specify a DIVIDER, one carriage return will be added after each record.
Quotes (“”) should be placed around the data source, table, key field, data field,
or record names if they contain any characters other than alphabetic or numeric
characters.
312
Databaseview
For
Example: >{N=”RISK&SAFETY”;T=GERMAN;KEY=ID;DATA=PHRASE;R=R2,S1
7}
The cross reference above is valid because RISK&SAFETY is enclosed in quotes
(“”).
BACK to TOP
Adding an Access Database
Adding a Database
Type
Insert to Table
Move Down
Table Name
Length
Remove
Name
Constraint
Move Up
Adding a Database
To add a new database, click the 'New'
New' icon
which is located on the Standard
toolbar or select File | New from the menu bar. A dialog box will appear, click
Save as Type and verify that Access Database (*.mdb) is selected. Enter a
filename for the database and click Save.
The structure of the database is the same as that used by the program Microsoft
Access®. This makes it possible to use many of the powerful features of Access
on your database or to access a database created by Microsoft Access.
NOTE: When fields are displayed on the screen for purposes of editing or viewing,
only those fields that will fit in one window will be shown. Having a print out of the
structure of your Access fields will serve as a reminder of those fields not seen.
The data from these databases can be included in formats designed with the
software. A format field can be specified so that it contains the value from a
particular database field in a specified database. For each database that will be
used in this way, a particular field must be specified as the search field. When the
field's data is to be retrieved, the database is searched to find a record that
matches the desired value entered by the operator.
The following options will allow you to define new fields for the database:
Table Name
Enter a name that will uniquely identify the contents of the table.
The following selections are available in the Column Definition portion of the
Create a New Table dialog box. In this section you will be prompted to define the
structure of your database.
Name
313
Printed Documentation
The name of the field may be up to 10 characters long. The name must begin
with a letter but may also contain numbers and the underscore character.
Embedded blanks are not permitted..
Type
The data type definitions below are specific to a Microsoft Access Database.
Different database formats will treat some data types in different ways.
Valid field types are as follows:
• Binary
Fixed-length binary data with a maximum length of 8,000 bytes.
•
Bit
Integer data with either a 1 or 0 value
•
Byte
A unit of storage capable of holding a single character.
•
Char
Fixed-length non-Unicode character data with length of n bytes. n must be
a value from 1 through 8,000. Storage size is n bytes.
•
•
Counter
Currency
Monetary data values from -2^63 (-922,337,203,685,477.5808) through
2^63 - 1 (+922,337,203,685,477.5807), with accuracy to a ten-thousandth
of a monetary unit. Storage size is 8 bytes.
•
DateTime
Date and time data from January 1, 1753, through December 31, 9999,
with an accuracy of three-hundredths of a second, or 3.33 milliseconds
•
Double
Stores numbers from
–1.79769313486231E308 to
–4.94065645841247E–324 for negative values and from
1.79769313486231E308 to 4.94065645841247E–324 for positive values.
314
Databaseview
•
Guid
Globally Unique Identifier (GUID)
A 16-byte field used in a Microsoft Access database to establish a unique
identifier for replication.
Note: In an Access database, GUIDs are referred to as Replication IDs.
•
Integer
Integer (whole number) data from -2^31 (-2,147,483,648) through 2^31 - 1
(2,147,483,647). Storage size is 4 bytes.
•
Long Binary
(Default) Stores numbers from –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (no
fractions).
•
•
•
Long Char
Real
SmallInt
Integer data from -2^15 (-32,768) through 2^15 - 1 (32,767). Storage size
is 2 bytes.
•
VarBinar
Variable-length binary data with a maximum length of 8,000 bytes.
•
VarChar
Variable-length non-Unicode character data with length of n bytes. n must
be a value from 1 through 8,000. Storage size is the actual length in bytes
of the data entered, not n bytes. The data entered can be 0 characters in
length.
Length
When defining a variable field the maximum length of the field must be entered.
Constraint
This option determines whether a value is required to be entered for a specific
field. Selecting May Null specifies that the field does not need to have data
entered. Selecting Not Null specifies that the field must have data entered.
The Table Definition portion of the Create a New Table dialog box is used to
insert defined fields into your table and to modify the placement of those fields.
315
Printed Documentation
Insert to Table
After a field has been defined, in the Column Definition section, selecting this
button will insert it sequentially into your database structure.
Remove
Will remove an inserted field from your database structure.
Move Up
Will move an inserted field up the database structure.
Move Down
Will move an inserted field down the database structure.
BACK to TOP
Opening a Table
The Databaseview editor internally supports the following four database file
formats: Access (*.mdb), dBase (*.dbf), Excel (*.xls), and Extensible Markup
Language (*.xml). It is important to note that .xls and .xml files will be in a readonly format. If you require the ability to view and edit other database formats in
the editor an OLE DB connection will have to be established.
To open one of the supported database file formats click the 'Open
Open'
Open icon
on the standard toolbar or select File | Open from the menu bar. You will then be
presented with the Select Database File dialog box at which point you should
browse to the directory where your database files are stored. The supported
database files will appear in alphabetical order. Select the database file you wish
to open and click the Open button.
A Tables dialog box will appear. This dialog box contains a list of all the defined
tables for the chosen database. Select the table you wish to open and click OK.
The table will now be displayed by default in Datasheet View.
If you wish to select a different table from the active database click the 'Select
Select a
Table'
icon on the Edit toolbar or select File | Tables from the menu bar. You
Table
will then be presented with the tables dialog box that lists all of the available
tables for that database. Select the table you wish to view and click OK.
BACK to TOP
Create a New Table
316
Databaseview
Table Name
Length
Remove
Name
Constraint
Move Up
Type
Insert To Table
Table
Move Down
To create a new table for an existing Database click the 'Create
Create a New Table'
Table icon
, which is located on the Standard toolbar or select File | New Table from the
menu bar.
You will then be presented with the Create a New Table dialog box. From here
you need to define the structure of the database table.
The following options will allow you to define new fields for the Table:
Table Name
Enter a name that will uniquely identify the contents of the table.
The following selections are available in the Column Definition portion of the
Create a New Table dialog box. In this section you will be prompted to define the
structure of your database.
Name
The name of the field may be up to 10 characters long. The name must begin
with a letter but may also contain numbers and the underscore character.
Embedded blanks are not permitted..
Type
Valid field types are as follows:
• Binary
Fixed-length binary data with a maximum length of 8,000 bytes.
•
Bit
Integer data with either a 1 or 0 value
•
Byte
A unit of storage capable of holding a single character.
•
Char
Fixed-length non-Unicode character data with length of n bytes. n must be
a value from 1 through 8,000.
•
•
Counter
Currency
Monetary data values from -2^63 (-922,337,203,685,477.5808) through
317
Printed Documentation
2^63 - 1 (+922,337,203,685,477.5807), with accuracy to a ten-thousandth
of a monetary unit. Storage size is 8 bytes.
•
DateTime
Date and time data from January 1, 1753, through December 31, 9999,
with an accuracy of three-hundredths of a second, or 3.33 milliseconds
•
Double
Stores numbers from
–1.79769313486231E308 to
–4.94065645841247E–324 for negative values and from
1.79769313486231E308 to 4.94065645841247E–324 for positive values.
•
Guid
Globally Unique Identifier (GUID)
A 16-byte field used in a Microsoft Access database to establish a unique
identifier for replication.
Note: In an Access database, GUIDs are referred to as Replication IDs.
•
Integer
Integer (whole number) data from -2^31 (-2,147,483,648) through 2^31 - 1
(2,147,483,647). Storage size is 4 bytes.
•
Long Binary
(Default) Stores numbers from –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (no
fractions).
•
•
•
Long Char
Real
SmallInt
Integer data from -2^15 (-32,768) through 2^15 - 1 (32,767). Storage size
is 2 bytes.
•
VarBinar
Variable-length binary data with a maximum length of 8,000 bytes.
318
Databaseview
•
VarChar
Variable-length non-Unicode character data with length of n bytes. n must
be a value from 1 through 8,000.
Length
When defining a variable field the maximum length of the field must be entered.
Constraint
This option determines whether a value is required to be entered for a specific
field. Selecting May Null specifies that the field does not need to have data
entered. Selecting No Null specifies that the field must have data entered.
The Table Definition portion of the Create a New Table dialog box is used to
insert defined fields into your table and to modify the placement of those fields.
Insert to Table
After a field has been defined, in the Column Definition section, selecting this
button will insert it sequentially into your database structure.
Remove
Will remove an inserted field from your database structure.
Move Up
Will move an inserted field up the database structure.
Move Down
Will move an inserted field down the database structure.
BACK to TOP
TOP
Modifying a Field
To modify a field the table must be open and be in Design View. To enter Design
View you can click the 'Design
Design View'
View icon
Design View from the menu bar.
on the Edit toolbar or select View |
The Type and Column Size is modifiable. The name of the field cannot be
modified. If you need to modify the name of the field, you must first delete the
field then add a new field.
NOTE: If there is database information in a field and you erase it all information
that was it this field will be lost.
319
Printed Documentation
Deleting a Field
To erase a field (column), highlight the field to be erased then click on the 'Delete
Delete
a Column'
Column icon
the menu bar.
on the Standard toolbar or choose Edit | Delete Column from
Adding a Field
To add a new field (column) to an existing table click the 'Add
Add a new Column'
Column icon
from the Standard toolbar or select Edit | Add Column from the menu bar.
You will then be presented with the Create a New Column dialog box. From this
dialog box you can give your field a unique name and select which data type the
field will be.
Adding a Record
To add a new record click the 'Add
Add New'
from the Standard toolbar or
New icon
select Edit | Add New Record from the Menu bar. Enter the appropriate data in
the fields and press the tab key on the keyboard to navigate through the data
cells. A new record will automatically be added when the tab key is selected in
the last field of that record.
Deleting a Record
To delete a record in a table first select any data cell in that record then click the
'Delete
Delete'
from the Standard toolbar or select Edit | Delete Record from the
Delete icon
Menu bar. The software will verify with you that it is ok to delete the record, if it is
click 'OK
OK'.
OK
Changing Fonts
Databaseview allows you to specify the Font, Font Style, and Font Size that the
records in your table will be displayed in. The changes will effect the entire table,
it is not possible to change the Font attributes for a specific record.
To specify a Font, Font Style, or Font size select any record in the database table.
To change the font that the records are displayed in select the appropriate font
from the font drop down text box
To make the text bold, click Bold
.
.
To make the text italics, click Italics
To underline the text, click underline.
320
.
Databaseview
Navigating a Database
Database Table
You have the ability to move through records in a table in both Form View and
Datasheet View. The navigation buttons are located on the Navigate toolbar .
You can use these buttons to quickly move between records in a table.
The same functions can also be accessed by selecting Edit | GoTo from the menu
bar.
Editing Table Records
To edit database records, click the 'Form View' icon or the 'Datasheet View' icon on the Edit menu.
You can also select View | Form View or View | Datasheet View from the menu bar.
If a database file is opened by multiple users simultaneously, the first user to
open it will have read/write access. All other users will have read-only access.
Add Records
Edit Records
Deleting Records
Search
Add Records
To add a new record to the active table click the 'Add
Add New'
from the
New icon
Standard or Navigate toolbar.
The highlight bar will move to the blank record. Field data can then be entered
into each field of the record. The TAB key will move among the fields. If there are
more fields than can be displayed at once, the fields will be displayed in sets
called pages.
321
Printed Documentation
Edit Records
To edit a field within a record select the field by clicking on the field with the
mouse or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. That field is now the active
field and is available to have data added, or edited.
Deleting Records
You can delete a single record or a group of records by selecting the record or
records and clicking the 'Delete
Delete'
Delete icon
, which is located on the Standard toolbar.
Search
This function allows you to enter specific values into various fields in order to
locate a specific record. The software allows for multiple search keys. You may
enter data into a single field or several fields in order to reduce the number of
records that satisfy the search criteria. Once you have entered the search data
for any field(s), press ENTER. All records matching the search criteria will be
presented. When the records are displayed, you may use the up/left arrow keys
or the option Search Back to view previous records, if any. To view next records,
if any, you may use the down/right arrow or the option Search Next. Click Quit
Search or press ESC to leave the search subfunction.
The search function will recognize the wildcard characters * and ? if this box is
enabled. If you desire to view all records, for example, in a customer database, in
which last names begin with Mc,
Mc you can use the wildcard *. The * character
substitutes for any and all characters. For the above search, type Mc* in the
LASTNAME field entry prompt. If you desire to view all records in which the last
name is only 6 positions in length and the name begins with Mc,
Mc you can use the
wildcard ?. The ? character substitutes for a single character. For the above
search, type Mc???? in the LASTNAME field entry prompt.
BACK to TOP
Design View
Design View is used to make modifications to a table's structure. To open a table
in Design View select View | Design View from the menu bar or click the 'Design
Design
View'
View icon
on the Edit Toolbar.
After you've created a table in Design view, you can view it in Form View or
Datasheet View.
Form View
A window that displays one entire record at a time. To open a table in Form view
select View | Form View from the menu bar or click the 'Form
Form View ' icon
the Edit Toolbar.
322
on
Databaseview
Datasheet View
A window that displays data in a row and column format. In Datasheet view you
can edit fields, add and delete data, and search for data. To open a table in
Datasheet view select View | Datasheet View from the menu bar or click the
'Datasheet
Datasheet view'
on the Edit toolbar.
view icon
Printing the Entire Table of Records
To print the entire Table of records, click on the 'Print
Print All Records'
Records icon
the Standard toolbar or choose File | Print All Records from the menu bar.
Printing Records
Number of Copies
Name
Collate
on
Print to File
Properties
Printing Records
If you are printing labels with a thermal/thermal transfer printer, you will need an
ink-jet, laser or dot matrix printer to print a database.
Your printer should be turned on, in the ON-LINE/READY mode and loaded with
paper. The database fields will be printed within the width of the paper.
After selecting to print all records, you will be presented with the Print dialog box.
After the appropriate settings have been entered, the information will be sent to
the printer or, as an alternative, the database records can also be printed to a file.
Each of the Database Print options are described in the following section.
Name
From the drop down box select the printer to print the database records.
Print to File
Prints the document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer. The
document is saved with the printer formatting, such as font selection and color
specifications, in a .PRN file.
Number of Copies
Specify the number of copies you want to print.
Collate
If you have selected more than one copy, specifies whether you want the copies
to be collated. Collated copies are in numerical order.
Properties
Click to set up options for the printer. The options available depend on the
printer’s features.
BACK to TOP
323
Printed Documentation
Sorting the Table
You have the ability to sort records in ascending or descending order when your
table is displayed in Datasheet view.
To sort records in Datasheet view click the field you want to act as your sort key
and click either the 'Sort
Sort Ascending'
or the 'Sort
Sort Descending'
on
Ascending icon
Descending icon
the Standard toolbar. The entire table will then be sorted based on your selection.
You may also select Edit | Sort | Sort Ascending or Edit | Sort | Sort Descending
from the menu bar to sort the table.
Writing Database Records to a Text File
To write all database information to a text file, select File | Write All Records to
Text File from the menu bar.
This option converts all records in the current database to standard text records.
The resulting file can then be used as input to another program, edited, sent
across communication lines, etc.
When selected, you will be prompted to enter the name of the file to be written.
Choose the path and filename.
The resulting file will contain one fixed length line for each database record. Each
line will be terminated by a carriage return - line feed sequence. Within the record,
each field will occupy a fixed number of columns equal to the field length in
columns in the database field. There are no separators between fields.
Appending Records to a Table
To append records from an existing text file, select File | Append Records from
Text File from the menu bar.
This function allows you to add records from a standard text file to the database
currently selected, such as records that are resident on a host computer system.
Before appending any records, you must first create a database in the software to
accept the data. Make sure that this new database structure is exactly the same
as the one you are appending from. It should contain the same number of fields,
name of fields, field types and field lengths so that no data is lost.
When selected, you will be instructed to enter the name of the file that contains
the records to be read. At the same time, the software displays a list of currently
defined .TXT files in alphabetical order. When entering the file name, you may
include a drive designator, a path and file extension.
324
Databaseview
For example: C:\datafile.dat. You may select the desired file. Then click OK or
press ENTER when done.
The text file must contain one line for each database record. See Writing
Database Records to a Text File. Within the record, each field should occupy a
fixed number of columns equal to the field length in the database. There should
be no separators between fields. A carriage return - line feed sequence must
terminate each record. If a record contains more data than can fit in a database
record, then data beyond the columns for the last database field will be ignored. If
a record contains less data than required for the database record, then the record
beyond will be padded with blanks to fill the remainder of the database record.
Sample text file to be appended to a database:
John
Smith
Bill Jones
Bob
Cooper
1234 Main Street
Chicago
Illinois
810 West Blvd.
1112 Euclid Avenue
Detroit
Cleveland
Michigan
Ohio
Michael Goldsmith123 North LorainAve.GrandHavenNew York
The last record in the text file above illustrates the point that the append function
works on columns with no separators between fields.
If your database table has a primary key defined any records being appended
with the same primary key will overwrite the existing records in that database.
BACK to TOP
Refresh
Refresh Record
The Refresh Record works like a multi-step undo function. Clicking the 'Refresh
Refresh
Record'
on the Standard toolbar or selecting View | Refresh from the
Record button
menu bar will undo all of the changes that were made to the record that is
currently being edited. Once the data has been saved, Refresh Record will no
longer have an effect.
Tool Bars
325
Printed Documentation
There are three tool bars available within the software that make accessing many
of the functions a one step process. These three tool bars are outlined below.
Standard Tool Bar
The Standard Tool Bar provides the following functions:
• New
• Open
• Create a New Table
• Data Source
• Save
• Print
• Cut
• Copy
• Paste
• Cross Reference Wizard
• Path Browser
• Undo
• Sort Ascending
• Sort Descending
• Find
• Add New
• Delete
• Refresh Record
• Add a Column to Table
• Delete a Column from Table
Edit Tool Bar
The Edit Tool Bar provides the following functions:
• Select a Table
• Design View
• Form View
• Datasheet View
• Font
• Font Size
• Bold
• Italics
• Underline
Navigate Tool Bar
See Navigating a Database Table
Back to Top
Window
The software gives you the ability to view multiple tables, from different
databases, at the same time.
326
Databaseview
If you have multiple tables open within the software you are able to view those
tables in different ways. By selecting Window from the menu bar you will be
presented with the following options:
Tile
Displays all of the open tables in separate window panes.
Cascade
Displays all of the open tables overlapping one another with only the title bars
visible.
New Window
Displays a duplicate window of the active table. This is useful when you are
editing to very large tables.
327
Serial Files
Serial File Functions
The Serial File is used to supply data to a format field. This feature is generally
used in conjunction with the increment or decrement function. After printing a set
of formats using incremented or decremented fields, the serial file is updated to
contain the next logical value in the sequence. This will prevent recurring or
missing serial numbers. A serial number can also be embedded in a database
record.
A serial file may contain up to 20 characters. As with an incremented or
decremented field, only the trailing ten numeric characters will be changed.
The serial file will have a file with extension of .SER.
Creating a Serial File
To add a new serial file, click on the New icon from the tool bar or choose File |
New | Serial File from the menu bar. When the dialog box appears, click on Save
as Type, choose Serial Files (*.ser) and enter a filename, click OK.
You will be presented with the Create Serial Number File Screen. From here you
need to specify the serial number.
Enter the starting value of the serial number. The value can be from 1 to 20
characters in length.
Recent Serial Files
Choose File | Recent Serial Files from the menu bar to display a list of recently
created/edited Serial Files, which can then be opened.
Viewing/Changing a Serial File
To view or change an existing serial file, click the Open icon
or select File |
Open from the menu bar then select Serial File (*.ser) from the list of file
types. Finally, select the existing .ser file and click Open.
Erasing a Serial File
329
Printed Documentation
To erase a serial file, choose File | Erase from the menu. Locate the directory of
the file, click on Files of Type and choose Serial Files (*.ser). The available serial
files are listed. Choose the correct one and click Erase.
You will be prompted to confirm that you want to erase the serial file. Click OK to
erase the file or Cancel to not erase it.
330
Reports
Creating a Report
NOTE: The Report function is provided for Legacy Support. It is recommended
recommended
that new users who want to log printed label data use the options on the History
tab instead.
The values for a text or barcode field can be recorded to a Format Tracking
Report by choosing the Report Data function from the field parameters dialog box.
The data in this field will be stored each time the format is printed, thereby
creating a report (.rpt) file. If no fields are specified with this option, no Format
Tracking Report will be created.
Recent Reports
Reports
Choose File | Recent Reports from the menu bar to display a list of recently
created/edited reports, which can then be opened.
Printing the Format Tracking Report
To print a tracking report, click the Open icon
or choose File | Open from
the menu. Then click Report File (*.rpt). Locate the report, select it and click
Open. Once the report is open, click on the Printer icon
from the menu.
Printing the
Report
Top Margin
Sort Key
Field Width
or choose File | Print
Destination
Printer Setup
Font Setup
Left Margin
Report Title
Include Fields
Print All
Daily Subtotals
Combine Reports
Field Heading
Printing the Report
When you define a format, you can record the value of the bar code or text fields
in a data file. The report function allows you to output the accumulated data to
your ink-jet, laser or dot matrix printer or to a file.
The available functions are: Print the Report, Test Print the Report, Change
Report Parameters, Write all records to a Text file, Erase Format Tracking Data,
and Erase ALL Tracking Data. A sample report listing will be displayed.
331
Printed Documentation
The printer should be on and in the ON-LINE/READY mode prior to selecting a
report to print. You may use the test print function to assure that the paper is
properly loaded.
After selecting to print the report, you will be presented with the tracking report
specification screen.
Destination
Please select the destination for the report. The selections are:
•Printer, to send report to the printer
•Printer Data File, create a file which includes printer control characters
•Text File, to create a fixed-space ASCII text file.
Printer Setup
Select No to use the current default printer options. Select Yes to change the
printer options for this report. Modified printer settings are specific to the currently
selected report. This allows user to select which printer to print the database
records or reports to, and allows for the printer setup to be changed if necessary.
Font Setup
Select the Font Setup button to choose the font you wish the report to be printed
in.
Top Margin
Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in
inches or millimeters.
Left Margin
Enter the HORIZONTAL OFFSET of the print image area from the left edge of the
paper in inches or millimeters.
Print All
Select to print ALL reports in the directory. Selecting to print ALL reports in a
subdirectory will print ALL field data from each report.
Deselect to print the tracking report for the currently selected format.
Combine Reports
Deselect to print a separate report based on individual formats. Select to combine
all tracking data from all reports into a single report.
Sort Key
Please select one or more fields, from the Available Fields list box, to be used to
sort the report records.
Report Title
332
Reports
Enter the Report title that should appear on each page. For the default Report
title, leave BLANK.
Daily Subtotals
Select to print a daily subtotal based on the date the label was printed. Deselect if
daily subtotals are not needed.
Field Heading
If desired, the column heading for a field may be changed by entering a different
name.
This item appears for each field that is included in the report.
Field Width
If you wish to truncate a field, enter the maximum column width for the field. Enter
ZERO to use the default width of the field.
This item appears for each field that is included in the report.
Include Fields
Indicate which fields are to be included in the report by choosing from the list
shown. Fields are printed in the sequence that they were chosen.
NOTE: The software will print as many of the included fields as possible within
the width of the paper.
BACK to TOP
Test Printing the Format Tracking Report
To test print only the format tracking Header, choose the Test Print icon
choose File | Test Print.
Print Use this command to properly align your forms.
or
This function causes the printer to print the report header and then skip to the
next new page. This allows you to properly position the paper with respect to the
top of form when using a dot matrix printer.
Changing the Report Parameters
To change the report parameters, choose Edit | Change Parameters from the
Print Report screen menu bar.
This function allows you to preview the items included in the report prior to
printing. After choosing the Change Parameters option, you are presented with
the tracking report specification dialog box. From here you can change any of the
report parameters.
333
Printed Documentation
To print your report with the new changes, you must choose File | Print from the
menu bar.
Writing the Report to a Text File
To write all format tracking data to a text file, choose File | Write to Text File from
the menu while viewing the report.
This option converts all records in the current format tracking file to standard text
records. The resulting file can then be used as input to another program, edited,
sent across communication lines, etc.
You will be presented with the report file extract specification screen.
Once you have entered all items correctly, a Dialog Box appears stating the
number of records written to the file. The resulting file will contain one fixed length
line for each record of tracking data. Each line will be terminated by a carriage
return - line feed sequence. Within the record, each field will occupy a fixed
number of columns equal to the field length. There will be no separators between
fields.
Sample report file after being written to a text file:
06-20-93 2:25 SAMPLE 20 data123 12345xyz
06-22-93 4:01 SAMPLE 18 test1111ABCDEFEE
After the report is written, you will be returned to the Print Report display screen.
Each of the report file extract data items are described below.
Output File
Enter the name of the text file you want to create. The name entered can include
a drive designator and path.
For example: C:\textfile.dat. The file will be written to the root of C:
Include Fields
Indicates which fields are to be included in the report by choosing from the list
shown. Fields are printed in the sequence that they were chosen.
Erasing Format Tracking Data
To erase format tracking data from a specific report, choose File | Erase Format
Tracking Data while the report is opened in the Print Report screen.
334
Reports
This function erases all data records in the format tracking data file for the
selected format. You should be sure that the data has been printed before using
this function. Once erased, the data cannot be recovered.
A Dialog Box message will be displayed asking you to confirm that you do want
the data erased. Click OK or press ENTER to confirm. Click Cancel or press ESC
to return to the Print Report screen.
Erasing ALL Tracking Data
To erase format tracking data for all reports in a specific directory, choose File |
Erase All Tracking Data from the Print Report screen.
This function erases ALL data records for the tracking reports in a specific
directory. You should be sure that the data has been printed before using this
function. Once erased, the data cannot be recovered.
A Dialog Box will display a message asking you to confirm that you want to erase
ALL data for ALL reports. Click OK or press ENTER to confirm. Click Cancel or
press ESC to return to the Print Report screen.
335
Advanced
ActiveX
What is Active X?
ELabelPrinter
ELabelJob
ELabelInfo
ELabelBatch
Documentation and
Examples
ActiveX
The software contains a set of ActiveX controls that can be easily embedded into
Visual Basic applications or any other environment that supports ActiveX controls
(such as Visual C++, Microsoft Access, etc.).
The software’s ActiveX controls allow middleware programmers to create
programs that can use the internal functions of the software to print labels, view
job status, preview the label prior to printing and many other features that in the
past were only available from inside the software.
There are four controls available:
ELabelPrinter
The ELabelPrinter control allows for finding out which printers are installed,
reading printer properties (name, model, etc.) and for performing certain
operations on the printers.
ELabelBatch
The ELabelBatch control allows for composing a print job and submitting it to the
print queue. The programmer can simply supply a format name, fill in the fields,
and number of batches and/or batch size to define a job. Once defined, the job
can be created.
Note that there is absolutely no connection between different instances of an
ELabelBatch control: Client1 can set the Format Name property to "nut" and
Client2 can simultaneously set the Format Name of his ELabelBatch instance to
"screw". If 2 clients call the Create Job method simultaneously, then 2 jobs will be
added to printer queue in an unpredictable order.
ELabelJob
The ELabelJob control allows for examining and modifying jobs that are in the
print queue. Jobs that are currently being printed can be queried for current print
status, or the job can be cancelled. Jobs that are not being printed can be
modified to change label counts or the destination printer for example.
337
Printed Documentation
ELabelInfo
The ELabelInfo control allows for read-only access to many of the properties of a
label format. In addition, some of the field properties can be accessed. None of
the properties of the label or its fields can be modified by this control.
Documentation and Examples
For descriptions of the methods and properties available, see the documentation
file ActiveX_Programming_Guide that is installed in Documents folder in the
software's directory.
For more information about the ActiveX documentation and sample programs
please visit our website.
BACK to TOP
Application Programming Interface (API)
What is API?
LabelCommand()
LabelJobCancel()
DDE_PrinterStatus
LabelJobQuery()
Time Test: API vs.
Command File Monitoring
API Examples
The Application Programming Interface is included with the software for legacy
purposes. If you are doing any type of middleware programming, it is strongly
recommended that our ActiveX controls be used.
Application Programming Interface (API)
The software’s Application Programming Interface (API) was called DDE in
earlier documentation. API is a non-interactive printing method in which another
application can use Command File functions to directly communicate with the
software to: initiate label printing, cancel print jobs, query job status, or retrieve
printer status. An application communicating using API functions sends the first
label to the printer more quickly than if running the software with Command File
Monitoring enabled.
The software’s API supports the following functions:
LabelCommand()
LabelCommand()
The LabelCommand() function allows the commands to be entered exactly in the
same format as for a batch command file. The single operand points to a data
string, which may contain line feeds and carriage returns but must be terminated
338
Advanced
by a final NULL character. Keyword operands must be separated by blanks and a
semicolon must terminate each job like in a batch file.
Example:
LabelCommand("formatname=c:\\files\\emerald formatcount=(1,10)
partno=654321 quant=144;");
LabelJobQuery()
The LabelJobQuery() function can be used to obtain the current status of any
active or waiting job using its job number as an argument. The information
displayed in the Print Queue is the information that can be returned with
LabelJobQuery().
Example:
status=LabelJobQuery(jobnumber, name, description, status, &total, &remain);
LabelJobCancel()
The LabelJobCancel() function cancels an active or waiting job in the Print Queue.
Example:
LabelJobCancel(jobnumber);
DDE_PrinterStatus()
The DDE_PrinterStatus() function can be used to retrieve the current status of
any jobs currently printing. A file called n.dat will be written to disk, which will
contain an 8-bit status string and a 4-bit label remaining count. You could then
write a function to read the n.dat file. The DDE_PrinterStatus() function can
retrieve status from Zebra, Datamax and Apollo printers.
Example:
DDE_PrinterStatus(printernumber, printerdata);
Timing Test: API vs. Command File Monitoring
Formats containing fixed fields were tested using two print methods supported by
the software.
Method one used a sample API program. Method two used the Command File
functions with Command File Monitoring enabled. With method one, the time to
339
Printed Documentation
print the first label was 1/2 second. Using method two, the time to print the first
label using was 2 seconds.
If you would like the software to pause before printing a set of formats and allow
you to test print or cancel the set, you would use the Test Print option. With the
Test Print option turned on, when a new set of formats is processed, 3 options
will be presented: Test print the format, Print all formats in the batch, or do not
print any formats in the current batch. When the Print option is chosen, all formats
selected in the current set will be printed.
API Examples
For more examples and further documentation regarding API, please visit our
website.
BACK to TOP
Command Files
What is a Command
File?
Command File Clauses
Clauses
How do I Create a
Command File?
Commands and
Switches
Using Command files
Drag and Drop Support
Command File
Monitoring
What is a Command File?
The software provides the ability to print formats using commands contained in a
Command File. This is similar to the DOS batch file facility.
The concept of a Command File is: Anything that can be done on the keyboard
from the Print screen can be done with a Command File. This includes calling in
a specific format for printing, filling in variables and defining a quantity to print.
The purpose of the Command File is to automate tasks, eliminate re-keying of
information already stored on a computer, or shelter the operator from the
software.
How Do I Create a Command File?
Any text editor or word processor can create command Files, or it could be
generated by another computer program.
Using Command Files
To use this function, you must create a Command File following certain rules.
This file can reside on any drive and must have the file extension of .cmd. The file
340
Advanced
contains the name of the format or formats to be printed, the value of any variable
fields, the value of any database search fields, which printer to send the formats
to and the quantity to be printed for each particular set of formats.
Command File Clauses
formatname
singlejob
cancel job/cancel
printername
useprinter
clear printername
jobdescription
sort dbase
append dbase
testprint
fieldvalue
orderby
outputfile
getstatus
printername
close
clear useprinter
eraserecords
dbase
formatcount
where
getstatus
useprinter
printername
displaymsg
formatname
The formatname clause is of the form:
formatname=<name>
<name> specifies which format is to be printed in this set. <name> must be a
valid format name without the .fmt extension. If the format is located in the
software’s default directory only the name of the format excluding the extension is
needed. If the format is not located in the default directory a full path with drive
designator must be included. If the full path is not included in a command record,
formatname will default to the last name used, if any. If used, this clause must be
the first in the command record.
formatcount
The formatcount clause is of the form:
formatcount=<number>,<batchsize>
The <batchsize> parameter is optional. There should be no spaces separating
the 2 parameters from the comma. If the format contains no incremented or
decremented fields, <batchsize> is ignored; if included, <number> represents the
actual number of formats to be printed. If the format contains incremented or
decremented fields, <number> represents the number of batches and
<batchsize> represents the size of the batch. If not included, the default
<batchsize> is 1. This clause must be included in each command record. It must
follow the formatname clause and precede the testprint clause or any fieldvalue
clauses.
341
Printed Documentation
testprint
The testprint option is of the form:
testprint=on
or
testprint=off
For succeeding records, the option retains the value it was last set to. It is initially
set to off.
fieldvalue
The fieldvalue clauses in each command record are in the form:
<fieldname>=<value>
Each variable field or database search field must be specified using one of these
clauses. There should be as many clauses as there are variable fields or
database search fields on your label. <fieldname> is the name of the field on the
format and the same as defined on the Text/Bar Code Field Specification Screen.
<value> is the actual data to be placed in the field. If the data value contains
spaces, the value should be placed within quotes (either single quotes ( ' ) or
double quotes ( " )). If the data is too long to fit in the field, the data will be
truncated to fit. If the data is less than the maximum length, the field will be
padded with blanks. If no clause exists for a given variable field on the format, the
field will be filled with blanks. All fieldvalue clauses must follow both the
formatname and formatcount clauses. Also, each command record should
contain all fieldvalue clauses necessary to produce the desired format.
useprinter
This command is carried forward for legacy applications and has been superceded
by the printername clause
The useprinter clause is of the form:
useprinter=1
342
Advanced
or
useprinter=12
or
useprinter=23
The purpose of useprinter is to select the correct printer for this format if you have
more than one printer connected to the system. The index numbers used in the
useprinter clause are not constant and may change as printers are added or
printer properties are changed. It is better practice to identify a printer using the
printername clause.
printername
printername
The printername clause is of the form:
printername=”Production”
or
printername=”my_Printer”
The purpose of printername is to select the correct printer for this format if you
have more than one printer connected to the system.
displaymsg
The displaymsg clause is of the form
displaymsg="variabletext"
The purpose of displaymsg is to institute a planned pause in a Command File to
display a message on the screen. To restart the Command File you simply press
any key. The "variable text" must be enclosed in single quotes ( ' ) or double
quotes ( " ).
jobdescription
The jobdescription clause is of the form:
343
Printed Documentation
jobdescription="variable text"
The purpose of the jobdescription clause is to include a brief description of the
print job for identification purposes. This is helpful if you need to modify the job
once it is in the print queue. Once the print job is in the print queue, it will be
possible to distinguish one job from another. The "variable text" must be enclosed
in single quotes ( ' ) or double quotes ( " ).
singlejob
The singlejob clause is of the form:
singlejob=on
or
singlejob=off
The purpose of singlejob is to process one command file job at a time. If you
have multiple jobs in a command file, jobs will be released to the print queue one
at a time and sent to the printer much faster if singlejob is turned on. If singlejob
is turned off, jobs in the command file will not be released to the print queue and
sent to the printer until the entire command file is processed. The default value
for the singlejob clause is off.
where
The where clause is of the form:
where=(condition)
The purpose of the where clause is to print database records based on a
condition. The "condition" in the where clause consists of a valid database field
name, one or more comparison or logical operators and a field value.
For example, if you need to print all records where Aisle number is 100, the
where clause in the command file would be:
where=(AISLENUM = 100)
orderby
344
Advanced
The orderby clause is of the form:
orderby=<fieldname>
The purpose of the orderby clause is to print database records in a specific order.
If the order in which records are printed is important, you can select one or more
database fields in which to sort on. The records will be printed based on the
values in the database field(s) chosen. This clause is only valid when using a
format that uses an ODBC data file.
outputfile
The outputfile clause is of the form:
outputfile="filename"
The purpose of the outputfile clause is to print the labels to a file instead of to a
printer. When specifying the outputfile clause, you must provide the name of a file.
Specifying the name of an existing file will append new information to previous
information. Specifying a new file name will create the new file. The outputfile
clause cannot be specified if the useprinter clause is being used in the same
command file record.
For example, if you need to print the labels to a file called control.txt, the
outputfile clause in the command file would be:
outputfile="control.txt"
eraserecords dbase
dbase
The eraserecords dbase clause is of the form:
eraserecords dbase=databasefile;
The purpose of the eraserecords dbase clause is to erase all records in a specific
database file from within a command file. The eraserecords dbase clause must
end with a semicolon (;).
For example, to erase all records from a part number database, the eraserecords
dbase clause in the command file would be:
eraserecords dbase=parts.dbf;
345
Printed Documentation
append dbase
The append dbase clause is of the form:
append dbase=databasefile inputfile=txtfilename;
The purpose of the append dbase clause is to append a text file to an existing
internal database file from within a command file. The append dbase clause must
end with a semicolon (;).
For example, to append a part number text file that was downloaded from a host
computer, the append dbase clause would be:
append dbase=parts.dbf inputfile=parts.txt;
sort dbase
The sort dbase clause is of the form:
sort dbase=databasefile orderby=fieldname;
The purpose of the sort dbase clause is to sort all records in a specific database
file using a specified sorting order. The sort dbase clause must end with a
semicolon (;).
For example, to sort a part number database by part number, the sort dbase
clause would be:
sort dbase=parts.dbf orderby=(partno);
cancel
cancel job and cancel printername
The cancel clause has two forms.
The cancel job clause is of the form:
cancel job=number;
The cancel useprinter clause is of the form:
cancel printername="printer name";
346
Advanced
The purpose of the cancel job clause is to cancel a job based on the job number.
The purpose of the cancel printername clause is to cancel all jobs specific to a
printer. If you do not know the exact number of labels you will need for a specific
job, your command file can send a quantity greater than a desired amount. Then
at the end of the day, when the required number of labels are printed, a cancel
job or cancel printername clause can be sent to cancel the remaining labels in
the job. The cancel job and the cancel uprintername clauses must end with a
semicolon (;). Both cancel job and cancel printername cannot be used in the
same command file record.
For example, if the currently printing job is the first job, the cancel job clause
would be:
cancel job=1;
If you have multiple printers attached to your PC and you would like to cancel all
jobs that are printing to a specific printer, the cancel printername clause should
be used.
For example, if the currently printing job is on a printer named "my printer", the
cancel printername clause would be:
cancel printername="my printer";
NOTE there is also a cancel useprinter command that uses printer number to
identify a specific printer. This command is carried forward for legacy applications
and has been superceded by the cancel printername clause.
getstatus printername
printername
The getstatus printername clause is of the form:
getstatus printername="printer name";
The getstatus printername command can be used to get the current printing
status of the printer. Status returned from the printer will be written to a file called
n.dat, where n represents the printer number of the selected printer.
Letters are used for printer numbers greater than 9. For example 'a' is 10, 'b' is
11 and so on.
If you have multiple printers defined and attached to your PC and you would like
to retrieve the status from the printer in which the jobs are currently
printing,a printer named "line1" for example, the command would be:
347
Printed Documentation
getstatus printername="line1";
If the printer named "line1" is printer number 12, the status will be written to a file
called c.dat.
If the getstatus command is executed prior to printing a label format, the .dat file
will be written to the directory where the label software's executable file is located.
If getstatus is executed after generating a label, the .dat file will now be written to
the directory where that particular label format is stored.
The getstatus printername command can only be used with a Fargo/Datamax,
Zebra, Intermec or an Apollo printer.
getstatus useprinter
This command is carried forward for legacy applications
applications and has been superceded
by the getstatus printername clause
The getstatus useprinter clause is of the form:
getstatus useprinter=number;
The getstatus useprinter command can be used to get the current printing status
of the printer. Status returned from the printer will be written to a file called n.dat,
where n is the number of the printer number defined, and is the number specified
on the getstatus line.
Letters are used for printer numbers greater than 9. For example 'a' is 10, 'b' is
11 and so on.
If you have multiple printers defined and attached to your PC and you would like
to retrieve the status from the printer in which the jobs are currently printing,
printer number 3 for example, the command would be:
getstatus useprinter=3;
The status will be written to a file called 3.dat.
If the getstatus command is executed prior to printing a label format, the .dat file
will be written to the directory where the label software's executable file is located.
If getstatus is executed after generating a label, the .dat file will now be written to
the directory where that particular label format is stored.
The getstatus useprinter command can only be used with a Fargo/Datamax,
Zebra, Intermec or an Apollo printer.
348
Advanced
clear printername
The clear printername clause is of the form:
clear printername="printer name";
The clear printername command can be used to clear the current label format
from the print buffer.
If you have multiple printers defined and attached to your PC and you would like
to clear a label from the print buffer of the printer in which the jobs are currently
printing, printer number 3 for example, the command would be:
clear printername="My Datamax";
The clear printername command can only be used with a Fargo/Datamax printer.
clear useprinter
This command is carried forward for legacy applications and has been superceded
by the clear printername clause
The clear useprinter clause is of the form:
clear useprinter=number;
The clear useprinter command can be used to clear the current label format from
the print buffer.
If you have multiple printers defined and attached to your PC and you would like
to clear a label from the print buffer of the printer in which the jobs are currently
printing, printer number 3 for example, the command would be:
clear useprinter=3;
The clear useprinter command can only be used with a Fargo/Datamax printer.
close
The close clause is of the form:
349
Printed Documentation
close;
When issued, the close command will exit the label software.
Commands and Switches
To run the software using the Command File facility, the command is typed at the
DOS prompt using the following structure: c:\subdirectory\EASY
commandfilename [switch] [starting record] Where: subdirectory is the name of
the directory that contains the program files. - EASY is the command to start the
program. - commandfilename is the name of the Command File you wish to run. [switch] is one of the following:
The program will watch the hard disk for any changes to the specified Command
File. When changes are made, the Command File will be executed within one
quarter of a second. Command File Monitoring can also be set within the
program configuration options.
/W Instructs the program to ENABLE monitoring mode.
/W/W Instructs the program to DISABLE monitoring mode.
If Command File Monitoring was enabled within Program Configuration Options,
this switch parameter will override the current setting.
/D Instructs the program to display the format to the screen.
/S Instructs the program to print one command file job at a time. Subsequent
command file jobs are not read until the current job has completed printing.
/R nnn Allows you to specify a starting record, where nnn is the record number. If
the /R switch parameter is specified on the command line, you will need to give a
starting record number. If the /R switch parameter is not specified on the
command line, starting record is 1.
and
- [starting record number] applies to nnn, above, when a /R switch is specified as
a parameter.
For example, to run the software using the Command File c:\wineasy\store.cmd
(where c:\wineasy is where the software was originally installed) and to start with
the first record, at the DOS prompt, type:
c:\
c:\wineasy\
wineasy\easy store
350
Advanced
To run the same Command File and start at the fifth record, type:
win c:\
c:\wineasy\
wineasy\easy store /R 005
To run the same Command File with monitoring mode enabled, type:
win c:\
c:\wineasy\
wineasy\easy store /W
If the software is configured for User Signon, the /U and the /P switch parameters
can be used to by-pass the Signon dialog box.
/U id Allows you to specify a User Identifier, where id is the user ID as defined in
the Add, Change or Delete Users screen. This switch must be used with the /P
switch parameter.
/P pass Allows you to specify a user password, where pass is the user
PASSWORD as defined in the Add, Change or Delete Users screen for the User
ID specified in the /U switch parameter. This switch must be used with the /U
switch parameter.
For example, if User Signon is required and you want to run the software using
the Command File c:\
c:\wineasy\
wineasy\store.cmd,
store.cmd type the following from the C: prompt:
win c:\
c:\wineasy\
wineasy\easy store /U John /P printing
Where:
John is the User ID and
printing is John's password.
NOTE: A user can also be defined as having a blank PASSWORD. When User
Signon is required, the user must enter the ID. Then, the user can press enter to
by-pass the PASSWORD.
If starting the software from the command line, you will need to enter the
following:
win c:\wineasy\easy commandfile /U id /P
/E can be used to delete a command file that is specified on the command line.
As an example, the command line:
easy label.cmd /e
would delete the file "label.cmd" after it has been processed. The /E switch can
be used in addition to the /W or /M switches to delete the monitored command file.
351
Printed Documentation
Command files that are processed by "drag-and-drop" onto the EASYLABEL
window are NEVER deleted, regardless of the /E switch.
Command File Monitoring Mode
The software can be placed in a command file monitoring mode. The purpose of
the command file mode will be to watch the hard disk for changes in a Command
File and automatically print the specified number of formats. When Command
File Monitoring is enabled, the software will watch for a change in a specified
Command File every quarter second. A Command File will start up the program
either as a minimized icon or as fully maximized. If you would like the software to
start as a minimized icon, you will need to configure the program properties to
Run Minimized. To configure the program this way, follow these steps:
•
•
•
•
•
Highlight the program icon and right-click on it.
Choose Properties from the menu.
Click on the Shortcut tab.
Click on the drop-down menu next to Run.
Choose Run Minimized and click OK.
If the software starts minimized, you can view the Print Queue by clicking on the
minimized icon. Then choose the F2 key from your keyboard.
If the software starts maximized, you can work within the program; however,
Command File monitoring mode is halted until the software is minimized. The
monitor mode is also disabled if you minimize the software while working on a
format or working in a database. When in monitoring mode, the caption on the
Windows Task Bar shows the mode it is in. For example, if in Command File
Monitoring mode, the caption will be Command Monitoring. If minimized while
editing a format, the caption will be Edit Format [formatname].
Drag and Drop
The drag and drop feature supported by Windows is also supported for running
Command Files. You can process a command file by dragging the Command File
icon to the Software's icon (or a shortcut to the Software) and then releasing the
mouse button.
BACK to TOP
Creating a Connection to an External Database
Selecting the External Database within the software
352
Advanced
1. Launch the label software.
2. Create a new format or use an existing format.
3. Add a new field or use an existing field.
4. Edit the field parameters as follows:
•
•
•
•
Enter "Field Name" (optional)
Select Source of Data - "D" for Database, press the tab key
Select Database System - Select 'Other Database System'.
Enter the Connection String - or you can click the 'Prompt' button to be
prompted through the construction of the connection string. The
Connection string is created by first choosing a Database provider and
then creating or choosing a connection to the database. How this is done
will depend on your Database Provider but a walk-through sample can be
found in Appendix I.
•
Select Table Name - Select the table name that you wish to use, press the
tab key.
Enter Search Fields - Enter 1-3 fields to search the database on, press
the tab key. (This option will only appear for the first field that is created
using the external database.)
Enter Search Field Name - Select the field name to be searched on, press
the tab key. (This option will only appear for the first field that is created
using the external database.)
Enter Data Field Name - Select the field name which contains the data
from the external database to be placed on the format.
Complete all other information within the parameter screen and click OK.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more fields that use the external database as
their Source of Data.
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE: If you are using a 16-bit external database, you MUST have the 16-bit
ODBC Administrator installed on your system in addition to the 32-bit ODBC
Administrator. Please refer to that 16-bit database application's documentation
for more information.
Scanning Bar Codes
To scan bar codes, choose Tools | Scan Bar Codes from the print menu.
The screen will show the following lines:
Set up scanner and begin scanning. Data read will appear below.
When finished, click Quit or hit the ESC key.
353
Printed Documentation
NOTE: This function will work with a keyboard wedge scanner, check with your
Reseller for more information.
354
Bar Code Information
Linear
Linear Bar Code
Maybe the oldest of the Automatic Identification and Data Capture (AIDC)
technologies, barcode can be looked upon as the best known and probably most
successful to date of the technologies. We are all familiar with the basic barcode
on our box of cereal, or the jar of honey that we buy in the supermarket. This
barcode is called UPC/EAN and is but one variation of over 250 barcodes that
have been designed over time. Barcodes like this are referred to as linear
barcodes as that are made up off a collection of bars and spaces side by side.
Fortunately many of these barcodes have never gained broad acceptance and
we usually only consider 10-12 linear barcodes. The most common examples in
use today are: UPC/EAN, Code 128, Code 39, Code 93, and Interleaved 2 of 5.
Typical data content capacity varies from 8 to 30 characters with some barcodes
restricted to numerals only, and others using full alphanumeric information.
Linear barcodes are used in many applications where the use of a simple
numeric or alphanumeric code can provide the key to a database of "products."
The most obvious limitation is the amount of data that can be stored in a linear
barcode, though other problems can exist with the substrate that the barcode is
printed on providing insufficient contrast or poor ink receptivity which can cause
the quality of the barcode to be less than ideal.
Codabar
History and Overview
Codabar is a binary level barcode originally developed by Monarch Marking in
1972. It is also called NWNW-7 because all Codabar characters are constructed from
four bars and the three intervening spaces. It is a self-checking, discrete
symbology having 16 characters in its set: the numbers 0 to 9, and the $ : / . + characters. There are four different start/stop characters A, B, C, and D that are
generally used in matching pairs and may not appear elsewhere in the barcode.
Codabar is used in libraries, blood banks, membership cards, the overnight
package delivery industry, and a variety of information processing applications.
The numeric characters each have one wide bar and one wide space within the
group of four bars and three spaces. The alpha start/stop characters are
355
Printed Documentation
constructed with one wide bar and two wide spaces. Quiet zone is 10 times the
width of the narrow bar. There is no checksum defined as part of the Codabar
standard. But when it is used, it is inserted between the last data character and
stop character. Modulus 16 is generally used for the checksum.
Specifications:
Character Set
0 - 9, $, -, :, /, ., +
There are also four unique start/stop characters designated A,B,C and D.
Encodation
Four bars and three spaces are required to encode a character.
Allowable Sizes
Minimum "X" Dimension:
.0075 inches
Wide to Narrow Ratio:
2:1 to 3:1 for "X" Dimension > .020 inches
2.2:1 to 3:1 for "X" Dimension < .020 inches
Allowable Symbol Height:
The greater of .25 inches or 15% of the symbol length.
Code 39
History and Overview
Code 39 is a widely used industrial barcode and is mandated for some
automotive industry and Department of Defense labels, because of its ability to
represent alphanumeric data. Code 39 is defined in American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) standard MG10.8M - 1983, and is also known as 3 of 9. It is
discrete, self-checking, variable length symbology that can be readily printed by a
variety of technologies.
356
Bar Code Information
Every Code 39 character has five bars and four spaces, making a total of 9
elements. Of these nine elements, three are wide and six are narrow, making
Code 39 a two-width code. Whether numeric or alphanumeric data is encoded,
Code 39 requires the same amount of space - substantially longer than ITF or
alphanumeric Code 128. The length of a Code 39 symbol limits its use on
corrugated board because the shipping container is often not large enough for
the amount of space required for a readable code, or the symbol is too large for
scanning equipment to read. Code 39 has historically been found on paper labels
or on documents such as factory work orders, where smaller "X" dimensions are
possible.
The Code 39 character set includes the digits 0-9, the letters A-Z (upper case
only), and the following symbols: space, minus (-), plus (+), period (.), dollar sign
($), slash (/), and percent (%). A Code 39 symbol begins and ends with an
asterisk (*), which is this symbology's start/stop code. It does not require a
checksum, although a modulo 43 check digit may be appended for increased
data integrity.
Each character is separated from its neighbor by a loosely toleranced
intercharacter gap that contains no information. Because of the mirror image
relationship between start/stop character and the letter "P," an upper limit is
specified for the intercharacter gap width in order to prevent short reads,
especially in the case of partial scans.
Although there are only 43 data characters in Code 39's character set, it is
possible to encode all 128 ASCII characters using Code 39's Full ASCII feature. If
a reader is in its Full ASCII mode, the symbol $, /, %, and + are used as
precedence codes with the 26 letters.
Specifications:
Character Set
0-9, A-Z, -, ., %, /, $, space, +, and *
Encodation
Five bars and four spaces are required to encode a character. Three of the nine
bars and spaces are wide while the other six are narrow.
Start/Stop Pattern
Always the asterisk or star character "*".
Code Type
Binary, varying length.
357
Printed Documentation
Human Readable
Optional, although it is typically used.
Check Character
Optional (modulus 43 calculation)
Encoded Information
Contingent upon data requirements.
Allowable Size
Minimum "X" Dimension:
.0075 inches
Wide to Narrow Ratio:
2:1 to 3:1 with "X" Dimension > .020 inches
2.2:1 to 3:1 with "X" Dimension < .020 inches
Allowable Symbol Height:
The greater of .25 inch or 15% of the symbol length.
Code 93
History and Overview
Code 93 was introduced in 1982. It was specifically designed to provide a more
compact version of Code 39 due to its high-density complement. Code 93 is a
variable length, continuous symbology employing four element widths. Each
Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white. Each
character contains three bars and three spaces. Each character begins with a bar
and ends with a space. This is a (9,3) code hence the name.
Code 93 has 47 characters in its character set. The start/stop code is represented
by the symbol ?, and the four unique circle codes, ($), (%), (/), and (+), are used
as precedence characters to unambiguously represent all 128 ASCII characters
in a similar fashion to Code 39's Full ASCII feature. Because the special "circle
358
Bar Code Information
codes" are used for the Full ASCII feature, the ambiguity problem present with
Code 39 is eliminated.
Specifications:
Character Set
47 characters; 0-9, A-Z, -, ., space, $, /, +, %, ($), (%), (/), (+) and ?
Encodation
Three bars and three spaces are required to encode a character.
Start/Stop Pattern
The symbol ? and the four unique circle code, ($), (%), (/) and (+).
Code Type
Binary, varying length.
Human Readable
Optional, although it is typically used.
Check Character
Optional (Modulus 43 calculation)
Encoded Information
Contingent upon data requirements.
Allowable Sizes
Minimum "X" Dimension:
.0075 inches
Wide to Narrow Ratio:
2:1 to 3:1 with "X" Dimension > .020 inches
2.2:1 to 3:1 with "X" Dimension < .020 inches
Allowable Symbol Height:
The greater of .25 inch or 15% of the symbol length.
359
Printed Documentation
Code 128
History and Overview
Code 128 was introduced in 1981 as a very high-density alphanumeric
symbology. Since 1990, it's use has been increasing in a variety of applications. It
has the ability to adapt itself to all-numeric data or to alphanumeric data. This is
done with "start" and "shift" codes specifying that the data following is numeric,
alphanumeric, or special characters. These compression techniques minimize
space while allowing for numeric and alphanumeric data. Because of the
compact symbol, the numeric version is used whenever possible, but even
alphanumeric Code 128 is more compact than Code 39. It is a variable length,
continuous symbology with multiple element width. It is often selected over Code
39 in new applications because of its density and because it offers a much larger
selection of characters.
The Code 128 character set includes the digits 0-9, the letters A-Z (upper and
lower cases), and all standard ASCII symbols and control codes. The codes are
divided into three subsets A, B, and C. There are three separate start codes to
indicate which subset will be used; in addition, each subset includes control
characters to switch to another subset in the middle of a barcode. Subset A
includes the standard ASCII symbols, digits, upper case letters, and control
codes. Subset B includes standard ASCII symbols, digits, upper and lower case
letters. Subset C compresses two numeric digits into each character, providing
excellent density.
Each character consists of 3 bars and 3 spaces, each of which may be 1, 2, 3, or
4 elements wide (1 element = 1/11th of the character width). The bars always use
an even number of elements and the spaces use an odd number of elements.
This provides the basis for a character-by-character consistency check during
scanning. Each Code 128 barcode includes a Modulo 103 checksum.
Specifications:
Character Set
The full ASCII set (128 characters). One of the advantages of this symbology is
the ability to encode all 128 characters of the standard ASCII code chart.
Encodation
360
Bar Code Information
Three bars and three spaces are required to encode a character.
Start/Stop Pattern
One of three start characters A, B, or C shall be used at the beginning of the
symbol to define initial code set. The stop pattern is seven elements comprised of
four bars and three spaces. The Start/Stop pattern shall not be used within the
symbol nor shown in human-readable interpretation.
Code Type
Modular, varying length (UCC/EAN - 128 has several formats defined).
Human Readable
Optional; although it is typically used.
Check Character
Required (Modulus 103 calculation).
Encoded Information
Contingent upon data requirements.
Allowable Sizes
Sizes
Minimum "X" Dimension:
.0075 inches.
Allowable Symbol Height:
The greater of .25 inch or 15% of the symbol length.
EAN/UCC 8
History and Overview
The European Article Numbering system (EAN) is a superset of UPC and was
initially introduced in 1977 by an EAN association of EEC countries that included
France, Germany, England, Belgium, Luxembourg, Denmark, Finland, Norway,
Sweden, Switzerland, Italy, Holland and Austria. In 1978, Japan and Spain joined.
In 1989 Australia also joined .
EAN has two versions, EAN-8 and EAN-13, encoding 8 and 13 digits respectively.
An EAN-13 symbol contains the number of bars as UPC Version A, but encodes
a 13th digit from the character set pattern of the left-hand 6 digits, in the same
manner as the encodation of the check digit in a UPC Version E symbol.
361
Printed Documentation
Specifications
Character Set
0-9
Encodation
Two bars and two spaces are required to encode a character
Start/Stop Pattern
Always starts and stop with 3 elements: a narrow bar, narrow space, and narrow
bar.
Code Type
Modular, fixed length (thirteen digits with EAN-13; eight digits with EAN-8)
Human Readable
EAN-13 all thirteen digits required; EAN-8 eight digits required (the Flag
Character, Numbering System Character, and the Check Digit are implied).
Check Digit
Required (Modulus 10 calculation).
Encoded Information
Flag Character (Country Code) - Two to three digits
Manufacturer Identification Number - Four to five digits
Product Identification Number - Five digits
Check Digit - One digit
Allowable Sizes
Sizes for the EAN-13 are determined by a "magnification" factor which is based
on the "X" dimension size. These magnifications range from 80% to 200% of the
normal size (1.46 inches in width, 1.020 inches in height, "X" dimension - 13 mils).
EAN/UCC 13
362
Bar Code Information
History and Overview
The European Article Numbering system (EAN) is a superset of UPC and was
initially introduced in 1977 by an EAN association of EEC countries that included
France, Germany, England, Belgium, Luxembourg, Denmark, Finland, Norway,
Sweden, Switzerland, Italy, Holland and Austria. In 1978, Japan and Spain joined.
In 1989 Australia also joined . Today many other countries have joined, and EAN13 is used worldwide for marking retail goods. It encodes 13 characters: the first
two to three digits are flag characters which represent a country code, followed
by 10 data digits and a checksum.
EAN has two versions, EAN-13 and EAN-8, encoding 13 and 8 digits respectively.
An EAN-13 symbol contains the number of bars as UPC Version A, but encodes
a 13th digit from the character set pattern of the left-hand 6 digits, in the same
manner as the encodation of the check digit in a UPC Version E symbol.
Specifications:
Character Set
0-9
Encodation
Two bars and two spaces are required to encode a character
Start/Stop Pattern
Always starts and stop with 3 elements: a narrow bar, narrow space, and narrow
bar.
Code Type
Modular, fixed length (thirteen digits with EAN-13; eight digits with EAN-8)
Human Readable
EAN-13 all thirteen digits required; EAN-8 eight digits required (the Flag
Character, Numbering System Character, and the Check Digit are implied).
363
Printed Documentation
Check Digit
Required (Modulus 10 calculation).
Encoded Information
Flag Character (Country Code) - Two to three digits
Manufacturer Identification Number - Four to five digits
Product Identification Number - Five digits
Check Digit - One digit
Allowable Sizes
Sizes for the EAN-13 are determined by a "magnification" factor which is based
on the "X" dimension size. These magnifications range from 80% to 200% of the
normal size (1.46 inches in width, 1.020 inches in height, "X" dimension - 13 mils).
FIM
History and Overview
FIM or Facing Identification Mark is a 9 position bar/no-bar pattern. The FIM
patterns are used by business mailers on preprinted mailing pieces for
compatibility with various United States Postal Service automatic sorting systems.
There are four FIM patterns (A, B, C, D) that can be printed.
FIM A is used on Courtesy Reply Mail, with preprinted Postnet symbology in the
address.
FIM B is used on Business Reply, Penalty and Franked mail with no preprinted
Postnet symbology.
FIM C is used on Business Reply, Penalty and Franked mail with preprinted
Postnet symbology.
FIM D is used for OCR readable mail with no Postnet symbology.
GS1-128 (EAN/UCC-128 SSCC-18/SCC-14)
364
Bar Code Information
History and Overview
One of the symbologies specified for the representation of Application Identifier
data is GS1-128 (previously referred to as EAN/UCC-128 or EAN-128). GS1-128
is a variant of Code 128, exclusively reserved to GS1. It is not intended to be
used for data to be scanned at the point of sales in retail outlets.
GS1-128 offers several advantages. It is one of the most complete, alphanumeric,
one-dimensional symbologies available today. The use of three different
character sets (A, B and C), facilitates the encoding of the full 128 ASCII
character set. Code 128 is one of the most compact linear bar code symbologies.
Character set C enables numeric data to be represented in a double density
mode. In this mode, two digits are represented by only one symbol character
saving valuable space. The code is concatenatable. That means that multiple AIs
and their fields may be combined into a single bar code. The code is also very
reliable. Code 128 symbols use two independent self-checking features which
improves printing and scanning reliability.
GS1-128 (EAN/UCC-128) bar codes always contain a special non-data character
known as function 1 (FNC 1), which follows the start character of the bar code. It
enables scanners and processing software to auto-discriminate between GS1128 (EAN/UCC-128) and other bar code symbologies, and subsequently only
process relevant data.
The GS1-128 (EAN/UCC-128) bar code is made up of a leading quiet zone, a
Code 128 start character A, B, or C, a FNC 1 character, Data (Application
Identifier plus data field), a symbol check character, a stop character, and a
trailing quiet zone.
The purpose of GS1-128 (EAN/UCC-128) is to establish a standard way of
labeling a package with more information than just a product code. It provides
supplemental information such as batch number and "use before" dates.
There are two main components of GS1-128 (EAN/UCC-128): the data with its
Application Identifier and the bar code symbology used to code the data.
GS1GS1-128 (EAN/UCC(EAN/UCC-128) APPLICATION IDENTIFIER (AI)
365
Printed Documentation
An Application Identifier is a prefix code used to identify the meaning and the
format of the data that follows it (data field).
There are AIs for identification, traceability, dates, quantity, measurements,
locations, and many other types of information.
For example, the AI for batch number is 10, and the batch number AI is always
followed by an alphanumeric batch code not to exceed 20-characters.
The GS1 (EAN/UCC) Application Identifiers provide an open standard which can
be used and understood by all companies in the trading chain, regardless of the
company that originally issued the codes.
Identification Numbers
These AIs contain data to identify:
An article, the data field includes the EAN-8, EAN-13 or EAN-14 item
identification number. The AI for an article is 01 plus up to a 14-digit number.
A logistic unit, which must be given a unique serial number called the Serial
Shipping Container Code (SSCC). It provides companies with a facility to identify
logistic units (pallets, drums, rolls) for tracking and tracing purposes. The SSCC
AI is 00 followed by an 18-digit number identifying the individual transport
packages. This code can be used for tracking the packages and used for
reception operations.
A returnable asset, the data field includes the EAN-13 number of the asset plus
an optional serial number.
Traceability Numbers and Dates
These AIs allow data to be encoded that provides traceability of individual
products or dispatch units throughout the supply chain. This category includes
Batch/Lot Number, Serial Number, Production Date, Minimum Durability Date
and Maximum Durability Date.
Measurements and Quantities
These AIs allow quantities and trade measurements to be encoded for items
which may vary in content (quantity, length, weight, etc.) and logistical
measurements for warehouse space management systems and transportation
services. An example is net weight in kilograms. The AI is 3100 to 3109 with the
last digit indicating the placement of the decimal point in the data following. The
data that follows is a 6-digit number.
Transaction References and Location Numbers
366
Bar Code Information
These AIs allow data to be encoded that provide transaction references and
location numbers facilitating the delivery, order, and invoice reconciliation
process. They can also identify shipping origin, and help to sort shipments. These
AIs include Customer's Purchase Order Number, Bill to (invoice to) Location
Number, and Ship to (deliver to) postal code. The "Ship To" AI, for example, is
420 followed by up to 20 alphanumeric characters of data.
The following is a partial list of other AIs. The "Content" column is a description of
the data to be encoded. The "AI" column is the Application Identifier number. The
"Data Structure" column is the structure of the data that follows the AI number.
Please note that some AIs are two digits long while others are three or four digits
long.
GS1 Application Identifier (AI) Chart
367
Printed Documentation
368
Bar Code Information
NOTE: For date fields that only need to indicate a year and a month, the day field
is set to "00".
*Plus one digit for length indication.
**Plus
one digit for decimal point indication.
**
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I2of5)
History and Overview
Overview
Interleaved 2 of 5 is a high-density, self-checking, continuous numeric symbology.
It gets the name "Interleaved" because two numeric digits are interleaved
together, with the bars representing one digit and the spaces representing a
second digit. It is one of the most popular symbologies used by the shipping and
warehouse industries for identification. The binary level barcode is suitable for
printing on rough-surfaced materials, such as corrugated boxes or cardboard.
The Distribution Symbology Study Group has recommended 2 of 5 as the
standard for numeric labeling of corrugated shipping containers. It has been
adopted by the Uniform Product Code Council as the standard symbology for
outer shipping containers in the grocery industry. It is also used in the medical
and automotive fields.
Every Interleaved 2 of 5 character actually encodes two digits; one in the bars,
and one in the spaces. There are five bars, two of which are wide and three of
which are narrow. Similarly, there are five spaces in each character, two of which
are wide and three of which are narrow. Each digit has its own unique 2 out of 5
arrangement.
Unfortunately, a partial scan has a high probability of decoding as a valid, but
shorter Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol. This is due to the simple nature of the start and
stop patterns. Because of this partial scan problem, Interleaved 2 of 5 is best
used in a fixed-length application, with all reading equipment programmed to
accept messages only of the correct length. 14 or 16 digits are generally used for
the distribution industry.
Bearer bars are used to help prevent the partial scan from being decoded as a
valid Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol. They must touch the top and bottom of all of the
data bars. Minimum width of bearer bars should be three times of the narrow bar
width. A partial scan of the symbol will now penetrate one or more bearer bars,
and the resulting apparent arrangement of wide and narrow elements will not
369
Printed Documentation
bear any resemblance to a start or stop character to prevent an erroneous
decode.
An item to note with respect to Interleaved 2 of 5 is that the number of digits in
the barcode must be even. This is due to interleaving (one odd digit for every
even digit). As such, sometimes a zero digit must be added to the beginning of
the barcode to make the total digits an even number. It is recommended to use a
check digit and Modulo 10 is generally used for the checksum.
Specifications:
Character Set
0-9
Encodation
I 2 of 5 pairs characters and encodes the first digit of the pair on five bars and the
second digit of the pair on the five interleaving spaces. Two of the five spaces or
bars used to encode a character are always wide
Start/Stop Pattern
Starts with four narrow elements beginning with a bar, and stops with a wide bar
followed by two narrow elements.
Code Type
Binary, varying length. I 2 of 5 requires an even number of digits to encode
information.
Human Readable
Optional, although it is typically used.
Check Digit
Optional; however, Modulus 10 required when using the SCC-14 specification.
Encoded Information
Contingent upon data requirements although an even number of digits is required.
A leading zero is used if there is an odd number of digits available.
Allowable Size
370
Bar Code Information
Minimum "X" Dimension:
0.075 inches
Wide to Narrow Ratio:
2:1 to 3:1 with "X" Dimension > .020 inches
2.2:1 to 3:1 with "X" Dimension < .020 inches
The SSC-14 specifications outline "magnifications" that are allowable.
Allowable Symbol Height:
The greater of .25 inches or 15% of the symbol length.
MSI
History and Overview
MSI Plessey Code is a pulse-width modulated non-self checking code. Each
character is represented by 4 bars; a narrow bar represents a binary 0 and a wide
bar represents a binary 1. The bars have the binary weights 8-4-2-1. It is possible
to encode the digits 0 through 9 and the letters A through F, although this code is
most often used just for numeric information.
In MSI code the zero bit is a one-unit bar followed by a two-unit space and the
one bit is a two-unit bar followed by a one-unit space. Complete four bit
characters are thus 12 units wide, which is large for a numeric symbology. The
MSI symbol includes a start pattern, data characters, one or two check digits, and
a stop pattern. A MSI Plessey barcode always includes a Modulo 10 checksum
and may include a second checksum.
Typically found on Shelf Pricing Labels in a Retail Store. Different check digit
configurations are available depending on the application. It is numeric only and
variable length, 1 check character.
Plessy
History and Overview
371
Printed Documentation
The Plessey Company in England originally developed Plessey Code with
specifications first dated in 1971. Several variations were created including the
MSI, Anker, and Telxon codes. Of these, the MSI Plessey is still in use in the
United States. It is used in libraries and often for retail grocery shelf marking.
POSTNET
History and Overview
POSTNET is widely used by the U.S. Postal Service to automatically sort mail. It
is a clocked technology in which a scan through the bottom of the bars provides a
timing track. POSTNET is a numeric symbology that uses five bars and four
spaces for each encoded digit. A constant width and spacing of the bars is used
throughout the symbol. In a given character, two of the bars are tall and the
remaining three are short. The tall bars are about 1/10 of an inch high, and the
short bars are about half that height at 1/20 of an inch. The code begins and ends
with a tall bar ("frame bar") and may contain a 5-digit ZIP code, a 9-digit ZIP+4
code, or an 11-digit Delivery Point Code. POSTNET code has a trailing
checksum that is Modulo 10 of the sum of the digits, which is inserted after the
ZIP code and before the ending frame bar.
UPC-A
History and Overview
The Universal Product Code (UPC) has been successfully employed in the retail
industry in the United States and Canada since 1973. UPC is a coding system as
well as a symbology; it is designed to uniquely identify a product and its
manufacturer. There are three versions in UPC code; Version A, Version E and
Version D. Version D was originally defined but never used.
The actual UPC code is a 12-digit code. In February 2000, the UCC (Uniform
Code Council) implemented a change to the UPC-A barcode. If you applied for
and received your UCC Company Prefix before February 2000, the first 6 digits
represent the manufacturer of the labeled item. The next 5 digits will identify the
product and digit 12 is a check digit. If the UCC Company Prefix was assigned to
you after February 2000, it will be variable in length. For example, the
372
Bar Code Information
manufacturer's identification may now be 8 digits and the product identification
would be only 3. The last digit remains a check digit.
The first digit of the UPC-A Code represents the number system as well as being
part of manufacturer's identification. Number systems "0", "6" and "7" are
assigned with the five digits to identify the manufacturer.
UPC A Numbering System
The final digit is a check digit whose value is mathematically calculated based on
the first eleven digits encoded in the symbol. A weighting scheme (the weighting
alternates between 1 and 3) is used in its calculation. So the check digit also
protects against transportation errors if the data is manually entered.
Calculating the Checksum
The checksum is a Modulo 10 calculation.
1) Add the values of the digits in positions 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11.
2) Multiply this result by 3.
3) Add the values of the digits in positions 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10.
4) Sum the results of steps 2 and 3.
5) The check digit is the smallest number which, when added to the result in step
4, produces a multiple of 10.
Checksum Example
Example: Assume the barcode data is 08137919805.
1) 0 + 1 + 7 + 1 + 8 + 5 = 22
373
Printed Documentation
2) 22 x 3 = 66
3) 8 + 3 + 9 + 9 + 0 =29
4) 66 + 29 = 95
5) 95 + X = 100 (next highest number of 10), therefore X = 5 (checksum).
UPC-E0
History and Overview
UPC-E is a variation of the UPC-A symbol that is used for the number system 0.
It has six explicitly encoded data digits, and an implicitly encoded seventh digit
(check character). It is suited for identifying products in small packages.
In addition to the requirement that the first digit of the barcode (number system)
must be zero, there are four rules that determine what UPC codes can be printed
using the compressed UPC-E format:
If the last 3 digits of the manufacturer's number are 000, 100, or 200, the valid
product code numbers are 00000 - 00999 (1,000 numbers).
If the last 3 digits of the manufacturer's number are 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800,
or 900, the valid product code numbers are 00000 - 00099 (100 numbers).
If the last 2 digits in the manufacturer's number are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80,
or 90, the valid product code numbers are 00000 - 00009 (10 numbers).
If the manufacturer's number does not end in zero, the valid product code
numbers are 00005 - 00009 (5 numbers).
Specifications
Character Set
0-9
374
Bar Code Information
Encodation
Two bars and two spaces are required to encode a character
Start/Stop Pattern
Always starts and stop with 3 elements: a narrow bar, narrow space, and narrow
bar.
Code Type
Modular, fixed length (twelve digits with UPC-A, six explicitly encoded but eight
illustrated human readable digits with UPC-E).
Human Readable
UPC-A all twelve digits required. UPC-E six digits required (the Number System
Character and the Check Digit are implied), but the UCC promotes printing all
eight digits.
Check Digit
Required (Modulus 10 calculation)
Encoded Information
Number System Character (one digit)
Manufacturer Identification Number (five digits)
Product Identification Number (five digits)
Check Digit (one digit)
Allowable Sizes
Sizes for the UPC-E are determined by a "magnification" factor which is based on
the "X" dimension size. These magnifications range from 80% to 200% of the
nominal size, or 100% size (1.46 inches in width, 1.020 inches in height, "X"
dimension - 13 mils).
UPC-E1
375
Printed Documentation
History and Overview
Typically used for shelf labeling in the Retail environment. It is numeric only and
fixed length.
2D
2D Bar Code
A newer area in the world of barcode is the two-dimensional versions. Several
variations of 2D are available and as these do not all comprise bars and spaces
the more accurate name of 2D symbologies is used. 2D symbologies provide a
means of storing large amounts of data in a very small space. Whether you
consider stacked symbologies, matrix symbologies, or packet symbologies.
Examples of the three types include PDF417, Code 49, and Code 16K (stacked);
Code One, Maxicode, DataMatrix, Aztec Code, and QR Code (matrix); and Super
Code (packet).
2D symbologies have a major advantage over linear barcode. They can store
vast amounts of data. Individual symbols can store as much as 7000 numeric
only or 4200 alphanumeric characters. Many of the symbologies also have the
ability to use a device called structured append that allows messages to be split
over multiple symbols, providing almost infinite storage space. The disadvantage
of the 2D symbologies is that a special scanner is required. Matrix symbologies
need a vision based scanner to read the data, though some of the stacked
symbologies can be read with a rastering laser scanner. Expect to see many new
scanners with variations in technology in the future.
Aztec Code
History and Overview
Aztec Code was invented by Andy Longacre of Welch Allyn Inc. in 1995 and is in
the public domain. Aztec Code was designed for ease-of-printing and ease-ofdecoding. The symbols are square overall on a square grid with a square central
bullseye finder. The smallest Aztec Code symbol is 15x15 modules square, and
the largest is 151x151. This small version encodes 13 numeric or 12 alphabetic
characters, while the largest Aztec Code symbol encodes 3832 numeric or 3067
alphabetic characters or 1914 bytes of data. No quiet zone is required outside the
376
Bar Code Information
bounds of the symbol . There are 32 sizes in all with user-selected amounts of
Reed-Solomon error encoding from 5% to 95% of data region. The
recommended level is 23% of symbol capacity plus 3 codewords.
All 8-bit values can be encoded. Values 0 - 127 are interpreted as the ASCII
character set while values 128 - 255 are interpreted as ISO 8859-1, Latin
Alphabet No. 1. Two non-data characters can be encoded, FNC1 for compatibility
with some existing applications and ECI escape sequences for the standardized
encoding of message interpretation information.
Specifications:
Character Set
All 8-bit values can be encoded. The default interpretation shall be:
(1) for values 0 - 127, ABSI X3.4 (i.e., ASCII) and
(2) for values 128 - 255, ISO 8859-1: Latin Alphabet No. 1.
This corresponds to ECI 000003.
Two non-data characters can be encoded, FNC1 for compatibility with some
existing applications and ECI escape sequence for the standardized encoding of
message interpretation information.
Representation of Data
A dark module is a binary one (1) and a light module is a binary zero (0).
Symbol Size
a) The smallest Aztec Code symbol is 15x15 modules square, and the largest is
151x 151.
b) No quiet zone is required outside the bounds of the symbol.
c) Data capacity (at recommended error correction level):
1. The smallest Aztec Code symbol encodes up to 13 numeric or 12
alphanumeric characters or bytes of data.
2. The largest symbol encodes up to 3832 numeric or 3067 alphabetic
character or 1914 bytes of data.
Selectable Error Correction
377
Printed Documentation
a) User-selectable, from 5% to 95% of data region
b) Recommended level is 23% of symbol capacity plus codewords.
Code Type
Matrix
Orientation Independent
Yes
CODABLOCK
History and Overview
CODABLOCK was developed as a stacked version of the standard bar codes
Code 39 and Code 128 able to encode the information context when the label is
not wide enough and therefore several shorter bar codes should be printed. Each
row indicator, which shows the orientation of the reading and two check
characters, which guarantee the accuracy of the whole message. There are three
varieties of this code.
CODABLOCK A
Based on the structure of Code 39, it can encode 1 to 61 characters with up to 22
rows (totally maximum 1,340 characters). The check digit over the whole
message is calculated on Modulo 43.
CODABLOCK F
Based on the structure of Code 128, this code can contain 2 to 44 rows, with 4 to
62 characters per row (totalling maximum 2,725 characters). CODABLOCK F is
used in medical areas as HIBC (Health Industry Bar Code) for things such as
labeling blood plasma or implants.
378
Bar Code Information
CODABLOCK 256
This variety has the same structure of CODABLOCK F, but has special start and
stop characters. It can consist of 2 to 44 rows, each containing 4 to 62 characters
(totaling maximum 2,725 characters). Each row contains error correction, so that
minor damage can be repaired.
Advantages
Increased reliability of data of one single CODABLOCK label with respect to
several separate labels to encode one message. Flexibility in adapting the
information to encode to a given area thanks to variable height and information
density. All the reading devices on the market can be used, as the CODABLOCK
is based on already existing bar code symbologies. Re-assembling each line to
reproduce the complete message in the right sequence can also be achieved by
means of an overhead calculation system.
Disadvantages
The stacked structure must be respected during the reading process.
Code 49
History and Overview
Code 49 was developed by David Allais in 1987 at the Intermec Corporation to fill
a need to pack a lot of information into a very small symbol. It is a multiple-row,
continuous, variable symbology encoding the full ASCII 128 character set. Each
row is composed of 18 bars and 17 spaces. There are between two and eight
adjacent rows, each divided by a separator bar. Each row contains a row number,
and the last row contains information indicating how many rows there are in the
symbol.
Code 49 symbols can be read with modified moving-beam laser scanners or
CCD scanners. Labels can be printed by standard printing technologies. A
disadvantage with Code 49 is its structure that requires a large amount of
memory for encoding and decoding tables and algorithms.
Code 49 accomplishes this by using a series of bar code symbols stacked one
on top of another. Each symbol can have between two and eight rows. Each row
consists of a leading quiet zone; a starting pattern; four data words encoding
eight characters, with the last character a row check character; a stop pattern;
379
Printed Documentation
and a trailing quiet zone. Every row encodes the data in exactly 18 bars and 17
spaces, and each row is separated by a one-module high separator bar.
The code is a continuous, variable-length symbology that can encode the
complete ASCII 128-character set. Its structure is actually a cross between UPC
and Code 39. Intermec has put the code in the public domain.
The minimum value of the x-dimension is 7.5 mils for a symbol to be read by an
unknown reader. Assuming an x-dimension of 7.5 mils, and a minimum 8 row
symbol height of .5475 inches, the maximum theoretical density is 170
alphanumeric characters per square inch. For a health industry symbol with a flag
character, a 10-digit NDC number, a 5-digit expiration date, and a 10-character
alphanumeric lot code, the symbol would be .3 inches by .53 inches. A 15-digit
printed circuit board serial number Code 49 symbol would be only .1 inches by .3
inches.
Specifications:
Character Set
All 128 ASCII characters, 3 function characters, 3 shift characters
Symbol Length
70 modules, excluding Quiet Zone
Symbol Height
2 to 8 rows
Maximum Message Length
49 alphanumeric characters or 81 digits
Check Characters
1 per row, plus 4 or 6 per symbol
Net Data Density
Maximum of 93.3 alphanumeric characters per inch or 154.3 numeric digits per
inch when printed using a 7.5 mil X dimension.
Other Features
Concatenation ability, Rows may be scanned in any order.
380
Bar Code Information
DataMatrix
History and Overview
The public domain code DataMatrix was developed by International Data Matrix
(now CiMatrix). DataMatrix is a variable size 2D matrix symbology containing
dark and light square data modules. It has a finder pattern of two solid lines and
two alternating dark and light lines on the perimeter of the symbol for symbol
identification, orientation and cell location. DataMatrix is designed with a fixed
level of error correction capability. It supports industry standard escape
sequences to define international code pages and special encodation schemes.
DataMatrix is used for small item marking applications using a wide variety of
printing and marking technologies. The symbol can contain from 1 to 2000
characters of information. It is also scalable between a 1-mil square to a 14-inch
square. As an example of density, 500 numeric only characters can be encoded
in a 1-inch square using a 24-pin dot matrix printer. It is capable of encoding a
number of different character sets, including all 128 ASCII characters.
The most popular application for this symbology is the marking of small items
such as integrated circuits, printed circuits boards, surgical instruments, lens
identification and other items. The DataMatrix code can be read by CCD video
cameras or CCD scanners, but it cannot be read by using a laser scanner or
ordinary linear barcode scanner.
Data Matrix from CiMatrix is a 2-D matrix code designed to pack a lot of
information in a very small space. A Data Matrix symbol can store between one
and 500 characters. The symbol is also scalable between a 1-mil square to a 14inch square. That means that a Data Matrix symbol has a maximum theoretical
density of 500 million characters to the inch! The practical density will, of course,
be limited by the resolution of the printing and reading technology used.
The code has several other interesting features. Since the information is encoded
by absolute dot position rather than relative dot position, it is not as susceptible to
printing defects as is traditional bar code. The coding scheme has a high level of
redundancy with the data "scattered" throughout the symbol. According to the
company, this allows the symbol to be read correctly even if part of it is missing.
Each Datacode symbol has two adjacent sides printed as solid bars, while the
remaining adjacent sides are printed as a series of equally spaced square dots.
These patterns are used to indicate both orientation and printing density of the
symbol.
381
Printed Documentation
Two main subsets of Datamatrix symbols exists. Those using convolutional
coding for error correction which were used for most of the initial installations of
Datamatrix systems, these versions are referenced as ECC-000 to ECC-140. The
second subset is referenced ECC-200 and uses Reed-Solomon error correction
techniques. ECC-000 to 140 symbols all have an odd number of modules along
each square side. ECC-200 symbols have an even number of modules on each
side. Maximum data capacity of an ECC-200 symbol is 3116 numeric digits, or
2335 alpha numeric characters, in a symbol 144 modules square.
The most popular applications for Datamatrix is the marking of small items such
as integrated circuits and printed circuit boards. These applications make use of
the code’s ability to encode approximately fifty characters of data in a symbol 2 or
3mm square and the fact that the code can be read with only a 20 percent
contrast ratio.
The code is read by CCD video camera or CCD scanner. Symbols between oneeight inch square to seven inches square can be read at distances ranging from
contact to 36 inches away. Typical reading rates are 5 symbols per second.
Specifications
Character Set
All ASCII Characters, All ISO Characters, All EBCDIC Characters
Code Type
Two-Dimensional Matrix
Symbol Size
Data dependent
Data Capacity
1 to 2000 Characters
Symbol Error Detection
16-bit or 32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check
Symbol Error Correction
Convolutional Code Algorithms
382
Bar Code Information
MicroPDF
MicroPDF is derived from PDF417. The code has a limited set of symbol sizes
and a fixed level of error correction for each symbol size. Module dimensions are
user-specified so that the symbol may be printed with a variety of printers. The
symbology allows up to 150 bytes, 250 alphanumeric characters, or 366 numeric
digits to be stored. This is done by specifying one of three compaction modes:
data, text or numeric. Text Compaction mode permits all printable ASCII
characters to be encoded (values 32 to 126 inclusive) as well as selected control
characters. Byte Compaction mode permits all 256 possible 8-bit byte values to
be encoded. This includes all ASCII characters value 0 to 127 inclusive and
provides for international character set support
MicroPDF is designed for applications where the symbol must be smaller than
PDF417 will allow.
MaxiCode
History and Overview
A fixed-sized 2D matrix symbology, MaxiCode (originally called UPS Code), was
developed by United Parcel Service. This public domain code is made up of
offset rows of hexagonal elements arranged around a central, bulls-eye finder
pattern. Hexagonal elements allow dense packing, and provide fixed center-tocenter spacing of all elements. The central finder pattern and fixed symbol size
allow for easy scanning on high-speed conveyors.
MaxiCode is made up of 1- inch by 1-inch array of 866 interlocking hexagons.
This allows the code to be at least 15% denser than a square dot code, but
requires higher resolution printers (thermal direct/transfer or laser) to print it. A
central bulls-eye allows a scanner to locate the label regardless of orientation.
ASCII data is encoded in six-bit symbol characters. There are five different code
sets. A single MaxiCode symbol can encode up to 144 characters of data,
provides two levels of Reed-Solomon error correction and can be read when up
383
Printed Documentation
to 25% of the symbol is destroyed. MaxiCode can be read by CCD camera or
scanners.
Approximately 100 ASCII characters can be held in the 1-inch square symbol.
The symbol can still be read even when up to 25 percent of the symbol has been
destroyed and can be read by CCD camera or scanner.
Specifications:
Character Set
All 256 ASCII Characters
Symbol Size
1.11 inch x 1.054 inch nominal (including Quiet Zone)
Nominal Element Size
0.035 inch x 0.041 inch hexagon
Maximum Data Capacity
93 characters
Check Characters
Two selectable levels of Reed Solomon error correction
Data Sequence
Printer specific. See printer notes for more details.
Other Features
Omni-directionallly scannable and Concatenation capability.
PDF417
History and Overview
384
Bar Code Information
PDF417 is a two-dimensional, stacked, public-domain barcode developed in
1990 by Symbol Technology. It is a multi-row, continuous, variable length
symbology that has high data capacity of storing up to about 1,800 printable
ASCII characters or 1,100 binary character per symbol. The symbol is
rectangular. Its shape can be adjusted to some extent by setting the width and
allowing the height to grow with the data. It is also possible to break large
amounts of data into several PDF417 symbols that can be logically linked.
Each symbol has between 3 and 90 rows. Each row contains a start pattern, a left
row indicator, from 1 to 30 data characters, a right row indicator, and a stop
pattern. Both the number of rows and their length are selectable, allowing the
aspect ratio to be adjusted to particular labeling applications. There are no
separator bars between rows.
Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces in a 17-module structure.
There are three mutually exclusive sets of symbol patterns, or "clusters." Each
cluster has 929 distinct patterns. Adjacent rows use different clusters, so it is
possible for the decoder to tell if the scanning path is crossing row boundaries
without the use of separator bars.
Every symbol includes at least two error-correction codewords. An option permits
up to 510 additional error-correction codewords to be added to the symbol. There
are three different data compaction modes that define the mapping between
codeword values and decoded data.
PDF417 supports industry standard escape sequences to define international
code pages and special encodation schemes. The capacity of PDF417 can be
helpful in applications where the data must travel with the label item, where a
host database is not always available for quick look-up. PDF417 is being used for
hazardous materials labeling; storing technical specifications and calibration data
on electronic instruments; encoding fingerprints and photographs on the back of
drivers' licenses.
PDF417 symbols require a 2D scanner; they cannot be read using an ordinary
linear barcode scanner. A number of scanners are on the market using both laser
and CCD camera technologies. PDF417 symbologies can be printed using most
laser printers or label printers on the market.
Specifications:
Character Set
All 128 ASCII Characters, All 128 Extended ASCII Characters, 8-bit Binary Data,
Up to 811,800 Different Interpretations
Symbol Height
385
Printed Documentation
3 to 90 Rows, Maximum Row Height is 3X
Symbol Width
90X to 583X
Error Correction Characters
2 to 512
Maximum Data Capacity
1850 Text Characters (at error corrections level 0) 2710 digits, 1108 bytes
Other Features
Designed so that cross-row scans can be successfully used. Selectable levels of
error correction.
Options
Concatenation, Global Label Identifiers, Truncated PDF417
QR Code
History and Overview
Denso of Japan developed QR Code (Quick Response Code) as a 2-D matrix
symbology having position detection patterns on its three corners. QR Code
features mass data capacity, high data density and error correction ability, ultra
high speed, omni-directional reading and Japanese Kana-Kanji representation.
QR Code is in the public domain and it is read by using CCD array cameras and
image-processing technology because of the layout of the finder pattern.
QR Code symbols are square in shape and can easily be identified by their finder
pattern of nested alternating dark and light squares at three corners of the symbol.
Maximum symbol size is 177 modules square, capable of encoding 7366 numeric
characters, or 4464 alpha numeric characters. One important feature of the
symbology is its ability to encode directly Japanese Kanji and Kana characters.
QR Code is designed for rapid reading using CCD array cameras and image
processing technology because of the layout of the finder pattern.
386
Bar Code Information
Specifications:
Models
Mode 1: original version
Mode 2: enhanced version
Character Set
1) numeric data (digits 0 - 9)
2) alphanumeric data (digits 0 - 9; upper case letters A - Z; nine other characters:
space, $%*+-./:)
3) 8-bit data (JIS 8-bit character set (Latin and Kana) in accordance with JIS X
0201)
4) Kanji characters (Shift JIS value 8140HEX-9FFCHEX and E040HEXEAA4HEX. These are values shifted from those of JIS X 0208. Refer to JIS X
0208 Annex 1 Shifted Coded Representation for detail.).
Representation of Data
A dark module is a binary one and a light module is a binary zero.
Symbol Size
(not including quiet zone)
Model 1: 21 x 21 modules to 73 x 73 modules (Versions 1 to 14, increasing in
steps of 4 modules per side)
Model 2: 21 x 21 modules to 177 x 177 modules (Versions 1 to 40, increasing in
steps of 4 modules per side).
Data Characters per Symbol
(for maximum symbol size)
Model 1: (Version 14-L)
Model 2 (Version 40-L)
1) numeric data: 1,167 characters, 7,089 characters
2) alphanumeric data: 707 characters, 4,296 characters
387
Printed Documentation
3) 8-bit byte data: 486 characters, 2,953 characters
4) Kanji data: 299 characters, 1,817 characters
Selectable
Selectable Error Correction
Four levels of Reed-Solomon error correction allowing recovery of:
L 7%
M 15%
Q 25%
H 30%
Of the symbol codewords.
Code Type
Matrix
Orientation Independence
Yes
Composite
Composite Bar Code
The Composite Symbology, incorporates a linear component with a twodimensional composite component, this helps address supply chain applications
not being met currently. It will allow for the co-existence of symbologies already
being used and can be supported by both laser - and imaging based scanning
equipment. By using a linear component as a finder pattern for the 2D composite
component, scanning performance can be enhanced.
NOTE: Use a pipe symbol '|' to separate the linear data from the 2D data when
creating Composite Bar Codes in the Software
An EAN.UCC Composite symbol consists of a linear component (encoding the
item’s primary identification) associated with an adjacent 2D Composite
Component (encoding supplementary data, such as a batch number or expiration
388
Bar Code Information
date). The Composite symbol always includes a linear component so that the
primary identification is readable by all scanning technologies, and so that 2D
imagers can use the linear component as a finder pattern for the adjacent 2D
Composite Component. The Composite symbol always includes a multi-row 2D
Composite Component, for compatibility with linear- and area-CCD scanners,
and with linear and rastering laser scanners.
Aztec Mesa
History and Overview
Overview
Aztec Mesas, also referred to as Mesas, are a 2D matrix form of supplemental
field used to form "composite" bar code symbols, wherein a linear primary symbol
is augmented by an attached 2D data field. An Aztec Mesa is a graphical
rearrangement of an Aztec Code symbol into layers of modules lying above, and
possibly also below, the linear host symbol. The entire symbol is referred to as an
Aztec Mesa composite.
Mesas can encode from small to large amounts of data with user-selected
percentages of error correction. The linear host symbol may be one of several
established linear symbologies, and it performs the role of finder, horizontal
metric, and orientation for the attached Mesa as well as encoding primary
"license plate" data that is conventionally scannable. The Aztec Mesa field
includes a Mode Message, reference ladders, and an error corrected sequence
of codewords that closely follow the ISS-Aztec Code model. The supplemental
message that an Aztec Mesa encodes is readable only by an image reader.
When creating a composite Aztec/Mesa, a pipe symbol ( | ) must be used when
separating the data between the linear and 2D components.
Aztec Mesa Examples
Specifications:
Character Set
All 8-bit values can be encoded. The default interpretation shall be (a) for values
0 to 127, ANSI X3.4 (i.e., ASCII) and (b) for values 128 to 255, ISO 8859-1: Latin
Alphabet No. 1. This corresponds to ECI 000003.
389
Printed Documentation
Two non-data characters can be encoded, FNC1 for compatibility with some
applications and an ECI escape character for the standardized encoding of
message interpretation information.
Representation of Data
nominally 2X high by 1X wide modules, with a dark module representing a binary
one and a light module representing a binary zero.
Symbol Size
The width of an Aztec Mesa is approximately the length of its linear host symbol
less quiet zones.
The shortest Aztec Mesa supplement is 2 modules (4X) high, and the tallest is 64
modules (128X) high, in addition to the height of the linear host symbol.
No quiet zone is required on either side of an Aztec Mesa (though quiet zone
requirements of the host symbol must be satisfied). A 1X quiet zone is required
above the upper 2D field, and below the lower 2D field if present, which comprise
the Aztec Mesa.
Data Capacity
(supplementing a 10-digit Code 128 symbol at recommended error correction
level):
The smallest 1-layer Aztec Mesa encodes up to 18 numeric or 15 alphabetic
characters or 8 bytes of data.
The largest 32-layer Aztec Mesa encodes up to 953 numeric or 764 alphabetic
characters or 474 bytes of data.
Wider host symbols support Mesas with larger capacities. The absolute
maximum Mesa capacity is 3070 numeric or 2457 alphabetic characters or 1533
bytes of data, and it requires a host symbol about 500X wide (e.g., 84-digit Code
128).
Selectable Error Correction
Recommended level is 23% of Mesa capacity plus 3 codewords
User-selectable, from 5% to 95% of Mesa capacity
Code Type
Matrix
390
Bar Code Information
Orientation Independent
Yes
Additional Features
a. Choice of Host Symbology: Aztec Mesas may be attached to Code 128, Code
39, Code 93 and 93i, Interleaved 2/5, and UPC-A/EAN-13 host symbols. Printers
or readers may support only a subset of these host symbologies.
b. Two Graphical Configurations, one-sided or two-sided: The layers of data for
an Aztec Mesa may either be attached all on top of its host symbol or divided
between the top and bottom. The two-sided configuration is preferred for larger
messages because it locates the linear "finder" in the middle of the symbol.
c. Extended Channel Interpretation: The ECI protocol enables characters from
various character sets (e.g. Arabic, Cyrillic, Greek, Hebrew) and other data
interpretations or industry-specific requirements to be represented. This optional
feature has NOT been implemented in the Software.
d. Structured Append: Structured Append allows files of data to be represented
logically and continually in up to 26 Aztec Mesas. The symbols may be scanned
in any sequence to enable the original data to be correctly reconstructed. This
optional feature has NOT been implemented in the Software.
EAN/UCC Composite
History and Overview
An EAN.UCC Composite symbol consists of a linear component (encoding the
item’s primary identification) associated with an adjacent 2D Composite
Component (encoding supplementary data, such as a batch number or expiration
date). The Composite symbol always includes a linear component so that the
primary identification is readable by all scanning technologies, and so that 2D
imagers can use the linear component as a finder pattern for the adjacent 2D
Composite Component. The Composite symbol always includes a multi-row 2D
Composite Component, for compatibility with linear- and area-CCD scanners,
and with linear and rastering laser scanners. An EAN.UCC Composite symbol
consists of a linear component associated with an adjacent 2D Composite
Component.
EAN UCC Composite Examples
391
Printed Documentation
Specifications:
Character Set
Both linear and 2D Composite Components encode a subset of ISO 646,
consisting of the upper and lowercase letters, digits, and 21 selected punctuation
characters.
The EAN.UCC function character FNC1 and a Symbol Separator character.
Character Structure
different edge to similar edge decodable symbol characters are used, in
accordance with the selected Linear and 2D Composite Components of the
symbol.
Code Type
Linear component: continuous, linear bar code symbology
2D Composite Component
continuous, multi-row bar code symbology
Maximum Numeric Data Capacity
(including implied application identifiers and calculated check digits where
appropriate, but not including any encoded FNC1 characters):
Linear component:
UCC/EAN-128: up to 48 digits
EAN/UPC: 8 or 13 digits
RSS Expanded: up to 74 digits
Other RSS: 16 digits
2D Composite Component:
CC-A: up to 56 digits
CC-B: up to 338 digits
392
Bar Code Information
CC-C: up to 2 361 digits
Error Detection and Correction
Linear component: one check character for error detection
2D Composite Component: a fixed or variable number of Reed-Solomon error
correction codewords, depending upon the specific 2D Composite Component.
Character SelfSelf-checking
Yes
BiBi-directionally Decodable
Yes
Additional Features
Data compaction: The 2D Composite Components utilize a bit-oriented
compaction mode, designed to encode efficiently data using application
identifiers.
Component linkage: the 2D Composite Component of each EAN.UCC Composite
symbol contains a linkage flag, which indicates to the reader that no data shall be
transmitted unless the associated linear component is also scanned and decoded.
All linear components except EAN/UPC also contain an explicit linkage flag.
UCC/EAN-128 emulation: Readers set to the UCC/EAN-128 emulation mode
transmit the data encoded within the Composite symbol as if the data were
encoded in one or more UCC/EAN-128 symbols.
Composite Component escape mechanism: a mechanism to support future
applications which require data content beyond the ISO 646 subset encodable in
the standard form of the EAN.UCC Composite Symbology.
GS1 DataBar
Formally known as RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Expanded
393
Printed Documentation
GS1 DataBar
Description
Formally known as RSS-14.
There are 17 characters in a GS1 DataBar that make up the linear barcode, but
only 13 are entered data. There is a mandatory Application Identifier of 01 that is
not part of the entered data. The first character after the Application Identifier is
the linkage flag. The linkage flag determines whether there is a Composite 2D
barcode associated with the linear barcode. The linkage flag will either be a 1
(true) or 0 (false). This character is not included in the entered data and will not
appear in the scan.
The next 14 digits will be the entered 13 characters plus a check digit that is
calculated by the software. If less than 13 characters are entered, zeros will be
padded in the data after the linkage character to make up the correct amount of
characters.
Instructions
Thirteen digits must be entered for the linear GS1 DataBar. If thirteen digits are
not entered, leading zeros will be added.
When creating a composite barcode, a pipe symbol ( | ) must be used when
separating the data between the linear and 2D barcodes.
Example
Using the data 2001234567890 will create a linear Standard GS1 DataBar with a
human readable of (01)20012345678909. The 01 is the Application Identifier
and the last digit is the check digit.
(01)20012345678909
When creating a composite barcode, the data such as
2001324567890|0123456789, 0120012345678909 will be encoded in the linear
part of the barcode and 0123456789 will be encoded in the 2D portion of the
composite barcode.
394
Bar Code Information
(01)20012345678909
GS1 DataBar Truncated
Description
Formally known as RSS-14 Truncated.
The GS1 DataBar Truncated barcode is used when size, specifically height might
be an issue. The height of the barcode is set to the GS1 standard of 13 times the
X dimension (the x dimension is the width of the narrow bar element). There are
17 characters in a GS1 DataBar Truncated that make up the linear barcode, but
only 13 are entered data. There is a mandatory Application Identifier of 01 that is
not part of the entered data. The first character after the Application Identifier is
the linkage flag. The linkage flag determines whether there is a Composite 2D
barcode associated with the linear barcode. The linkage flag will either be a 1
(true) or 0 (false). This character is not included in the entered data and will not
appear in the scan.
The next 14 digits will be the entered 13 characters plus a check digit that
is calculated by the software. If less than 13 characters are entered, zeros will be
padded in the data after the linkage character to make up the correct amount of
characters.
Instructions
Thirteen digits must be entered for a linear GS1 DataBar Truncated. If the thirteen
digits are not entered, leading zeros will be added.
When creating a composite barcode, a pipe symbol ( | ) must be used when
separating the data between the linear and 2D barcodes.
Example
A linear barcode with an X dimension of .010 (0.25mm) would be 0.13 (3.25mm)
high.
Using the data 0001234567890 will create a linear GS1 DataBar Truncated with
a human readable of (01)00012345678905. The 01 is the Application Identifier
and the last 5 is the check digit.
395
Printed Documentation
(01)00012345678905
When creating a composite barcode, data such as
1101006414909|372772892887166266377488 the 0111010064149094 will be
encoded in the linear part of the barcode and 372772892887166266377488 will
be in the 2D portion of the composite barcode.
GS1 DataBar Stacked
Description
Formally known as RSS Stacked.
The GS1 DataBar Stacked barcode is used when width might be an issue. The
data is split in half and encoded as a split level barcode. The height of the upper
part of the barcode is 5 times the X dimension. The height of the lower part of the
barcode is 7 times the X dimension. The separator pattern between the upper
and lower part of the barcode contains no data. The GS1 DataBar
Stacked
cked barcode uses a 01 Data Identifier. It also uses a linkage flag which
Sta
would be 0 (false) or 1 (true). A 1 is used only if the barcode has a 2D barcode
attached to the linear barcode. Neither the Data Identifier nor the linkage flag
needs to be entered by the user as part of the data. The linkage flag will not
appear in the scan. There are 17 characters in a GS1 DataBar Stacked that
make up the linear barcode, but only 13 digits are entered data plus a check digit
that is calculated by the software.
Instructions
Thirteen digits must be entered for a GS1 DataBar Stacked. If thirteen digits are
not entered, padded leading zeros will be added.
When creating a composite barcode, a pipe symbol ( | ) must be used when
separating the data between the linear and 2D barcodes.
Example
396
Bar Code Information
Using the data 0001234567890 will create a linear GS1 DataBar Stacked with a
human readable of (01)00012345678909. The 01 is the Application Identifier
and the last 9 is the check digit.
(01)00012345678905
When creating a composite barcode, data entered as 0341234567890|17010200
the 0103412345678900 will be encoded in the linear part of the barcode and
17010200 will be in the 2D portion of the composite barcode.
(01)03412345678900(17)010200
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
Omnidirectional
Description
Formally known as RSS Stacked Omnidirectional.
The GS1 DataBar Stacked OmniOmni-directional barcode is used when width might be
an issue. The data is split in half and encoded as a split level barcode. The
height of the upper part of the barcode is 5 times the X dimension. The height of
the lower part of the barcode is 7 times the X dimension. The separator pattern
between the upper and lower part of the barcode contains no data. The GS1
DataBar Stacked OmniOmni-directional barcode uses a 01 Data Identifier. It also uses
a linkage flag which would be 0 (false) or 1 (true). A 1 is used only if the barcode
has a 2D barcode attached to the linear barcode. Neither the Data Identifier nor
the linkage flag needs to be entered by the user as part of the data. The linkage
flag will not appear in the scan. There are 17 characters in a GS1 DataBar
Stacked OmniOmni-directional that make up the linear barcode, but only 13 digits are
entered data plus a check digit that is calculated by the software.
Instructions
Thirteen digits must be entered for the linear GS1 DataBar Stacked OmniOmnidirectional. If thirteen digits are not entered, leading zeros will be added.
When creating a composite barcode, a pipe symbol ( | ) needs to be inserted
between the data that will be in the linear barcode and the 2D barcode.
397
Printed Documentation
Example
Using the data 0003456789012 will create a linear GS1 DataBar Stacked OmniOmnidirectional with a human readable of (01)00034567890125. The 01 is the
Application Identifier and the last 5 is the check digit.
(01)00034567890125
When creating a composite barcode, data entered as 0341234567890|17010200
the 0103412345678900 will be encoded in the linear part of the barcode and
17010200 will be in the 2D portion of the composite barcode.
(01)03412345678900(17)010200
GS1 DataBar Limited
Description
Formally known as RSS Limited.
The GS1 DataBar Limited barcode is designed for small, items. It uses a 01
Data Identifier. It also uses a linkage flag which would be 0 (false) or 1 (true). A
1 is used only if the barcode has a 2D barcode attached to the linear
barcode. Neither the Data Identifier nor the linkage flag needs to be entered by
the user as part of the data. The linkage flag will not appear in the scan. There
are 17 characters in a GS1 DataBar Limited that make up the linear barcode, but
only 13 digits are entered data plus a check digit that is calculated by the
software.
Instructions
Thirteen digits must be entered for the linear GS1 DataBar Limited. If thirteen
digits are not entered, leading zeros will be added.
398
Bar Code Information
When creating a composite barcode, a pipe symbol ( | ) needs to be inserted
between the data that will be in the linear barcode and the 2D barcode.
Example
DataBar Limited with
Using the data 1501234567890 will create a standard GS1 DataBar
a human readable of (01)15012345678907. The 01 is the Application Identifier
and the last 7 is the check digit.
(01)15012345678907
When creating a composite barcode, data such as
0351234567890|21abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv the 0103512345678907 will be
encoded in the linear part of the barcode and 21abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv will be in
the 2D portion of the composite barcode.
(01)03512345678907
GS1 DataBar Expanded / Expanded Stacked
Description
Formally known as RSS Expanded/Expanded Stacked.
The GS1 DataBar Expanded barcode is a variable length symbology capable of
encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alpha characters. This symbology does allow
for a Data Identifier.
Instructions
All Data Identifiers must be added manually when using the Expanded
symbology. When creating a composite barcode, a pipe symbol ( | ) must be
used when separating the data between the linear and 2D barcodes.
Using a value of 4 or less in the Segments per Row, an Expanded Stacked
barcode will be created.
399
Printed Documentation
Example
Using the data 01906141410000153202000150 will create a linear GS1 DataBar
Expanded with a human readable of 01906141410000153202000150. The 01
is the Application Identifier.
(01)90614141000015(3202)000150
Expanded Stacked
(01)90614141000015(3202)000150
When creating a composite barcode, data entered as
019371234567890|3103001234911A2B3C4D5E the 019371234567890 will be
encoded in the linear part of the barcode and 3103001234911A2B3C4D5E will
be in the 2D portion of the composite barcode.
(01)93712345678904(3103)001234
(91)1A2B3C4D5E
BACK to TOP
400
Bar Code Information
401
Appendices
Appendix A: Error Status Messages
Choose the letter that the error message begins with below:
ACDEFGIMNPQRSTU
A
At least 1 printer must remain defined - You have tried to Delete the ONLY printer
that is defined.
C
Cannot change active or completed job
Cannot change config while jobs are in print queue
Cannot complete requested operation - insufficient memory available
Cannot create - please specify another name
Cannot create field
Cannot UNDO previous change - no action taken
D
Duplicated Keyword - There is a duplicate keyword in the command file.
E
Enter a Valid Field Length - A field length of 0 or a field length greater than 255
was entered.
Erase error
Error reading file
Error Occurred Saving Print Queue
Error writing file - disk may be out of space
Expecting Keyword Directive or Field Name - Check the command file to be sure
that all phrases or fields are correct
403
Printed Documentation
F
Field is too small - not changed
Field is too small - not created
Field Length is Too Large - The field length is greater than 255.
Field Length is Too Small - The field length is zero.
Format request list is full - Cannot add this job
Format Saved With DEMO Version - Cannot do production print - Cannot do a
production print of a format that was saved using the DEMO version.
G
General Protection Fault (GPF)/Application Error
Error - An error has occurred with the
application. Contact your reseller if any such error occurs. You will need to
contact your reseller AFTER recording the information and printing it out.
General Protection Faults can be recorded while running a utility program called
DR. WATSON. Dr. Watson is provided with Windows 98 and higher. If a system
error occurs, Dr. Watson creates a special file called DRWATSON.LOG. Dr.
Watson will prompt you for details about the circumstances under which the
application error occurred. After recording the information, it is recommended that
you exit Windows, then restart Windows and the application. You can print the
contents of the .LOG file and send the results to your reseller. Some General
Protection Faults are not reproducible, therefore, it is also recommended that you
have DR. WATSON running in the background while you are working with the
software or any other application. The location of Dr. Watson can be different
depending on what version of Windows you are using: For Example under
Windows 98 Dr. Watson is located in the Windows subdirectory but Dr. Watson is
located in the Windows\System32 subdirectory when using Windows XP.
To have Dr. Watson running each time Windows is started:
Copy Dr. Watson into the Windows | Start Menu | Programs | Start Up folder.
I
Incorrect User ID - The USER ID was entered incorrectly. Check the proper user
identification spelling and re-enter.
Incorrect Password - The PASSWORD was entered incorrectly. Check the proper
password spelling and re-enter.
404
Appendices
Ineligible Field Name Used - Attempt to use a field name not listed.
Initialization error
Insufficient memory
Invalid Character in Field Name - An invalid character was entered in a field name.
Invalid Command Line Option - Check that the Command Line was typed
correctly, then try again.
Invalid Operand In Clause - An invalid operand was specified in a clause in the
command file.
Invalid Field Length - Contains decimal point.
M
Matching database record cannot be found.
Missing entry.
Missing or
or Invalid Configuration File - Probable Cause: LABEL.CFG is not in the
same directory as EASY.EXE or file is bad - copy file to proper directory or copy
file from backup disk. Cannot proceed with execution of the software.
N
Name already exists - please choose another name.
No existing files
No Fields Specified - No fields specified for an index value.
No printer modules found
No Valid Format Name Found - A valid format name was not found in the
command file.
NonNon-alphabetic characters in field
NonNon-alphanumeric
alphanumeric characters in field
NonNon-numeric characters in field
Not a valid file or directory name
405
Printed Documentation
Not an existing file in directory
P
Picture Error - Cannot read picture or picture too large. Probable Cause: The
specified picture file cannot be found or the size of the picture is too large for the
printer.
Please enter a name that has not already been used
Please enter a valid number
Please enter valid data
Q
Queue Error - Error loading job in queue or cannot read queue file. Probable
Cause: A .job file cannot be found while restoring the Print Queue.
R
Rename failed
S
Software Key Not Responding - The Software Key may be missing/defective or
you may not have the Software Key device drivers installed. Please download the
drivers from out website www.tharo.com and install them.
This condition can be caused by a bad connection to the PC, no Software Key
drivers installed or a Software Key failure. Please press F3 for help in diagnosing
the problem.
Starting Job Number Not Found in Command File - A starting record number,
specified on the command line, was not found in the associated command file.
Syntax Error in Index Expression - An invalid operation in an index expression.
T
The Format Request List is Full. Cannot Add This Job - Cause: EASYLABEL
folder is write protected or 220 jobs in Queue - allow jobs to run and add job later.
The name is reserved - please enter another field name.
The total field height is too large - please change
406
Appendices
The total field width is too large - please change
There is no data required for this
this format
Too large - please reenter
Too small - please reenter
Type Mismatch in Index Expression
U
Unable to find file
Unable to load module
Unbalanced Quote - A phrase in the command file is missing a quote.
Undefined Field Name Used - Attempt to use a field name that is not defined.
Any error message that is not included in the list above indicates an internal
program failure. Please report any such error to your Reseller.
BACK to TOP
Appendix B: Application Notes
Sell By Date
Uploading of Report
Files
TRUEDATE TRUETIME
Formats Printed Report
Advanced Database
Functions
The Save As Function
TRUECOUNT
@USERID
RESERVED WORDS
Sell By Date
Sell by Date can be created on the format by using one of the following 3
methods:
1) The first method will require three fields, of which the first two may be phantom
fields.
Field One, has as its "Source of Date": Print Date. Choose under "Special
Formatting": 1 - Short Date (10-Jan-93) or 3 Julian Date (93010).
407
Printed Documentation
Field Two, is the numeric amount, that when added to Field One will give the 'Sell
by Date.'
Field Three, printed on the format, should have as its "Source of Data": Arithmetic
(add and subtract only). Also, again, under "Special Formatting" for printing
choose: 1 - Short Date or 3 - Julian Date. To have a date printed in any other
format, such as European format, select option 4 - Custom Date. You will then
need to enter the character string for the format you wish.
2) The second method requires only one field.
The field must have a "Source of Data" as 'Arithmetic'. For the screen item
'Calculation', enter an arithmetic expression using the keyword 'DATE'. The
keyword, DATE represents the system date and can be used to calculate a Sell
By date. For more information see Arithmetic Source of Data.
3) The third method also requires only one field
Create a field with a "Source of Data" as 'Print Date'. Then enter a non zero
number into the Year Offset, Month Offset or Day Offset fields to add Years,
Months, or Days to the current date.
NOTE: European Date can also be printed by changing the International Settings
under your Windows Control Panel. Refer to your Microsoft Windows User's
Guide for additional information. If International settings are changed, you need
to exit Windows, then restart. All dates will be printed in the new format.
Formats Printed Report
Many manufacturers of food or pharmaceuticals are mandated by the Federal
Government to account for their printed labels. The format printed reports will
give you an on-going log that will allow you to meet these requirements. It can
also be used to control your label inventory for reordering purposes. Be aware
that since the report is written when the formats first start to print, the report will
be in error if the print run is stopped before all formats have had a chance to print.
The Save As Function
There are many ways to input your variable data into the software. You may have
an operator answer prompted questions at the time of printing, you may call the
information in from a file at the time of printing or you may use the save as
function.
The save as function will allow you to create a format along with the variables in it
and rename and save it repeatedly each time with new values for the variables.
You may do this for the entire product list of your company. Therefore, the only
408
Appendices
operator action required at the time of printing would be to call in a specific format
and request the appropriate quantity be printed.
Uploading of Report Files
In certain situations, it may be beneficial to transfer report files to a host system.
This is accomplished with the 'write text file' function in the report section. After
you have converted the report file to an ASCII text file, any communications
package which allows for file transfer between PC and host will be able to send
this file. A simple routine on the host system can then insert this information into
your host database.
Advanced Database Functions
The advanced database functions provide the ability to embed graphics and text
files specific to a database record. Refer to adding a database for more
information.
Some applications require special files to be part of a specific record. Files such
as graphics and multi-line text files can be defined for a specific record or for
multiple records. This saves time and reduces operator error.
For example, if the database file contains chemical data and the same warning
statement, first aid statement or caution statement is used for more than 1
chemical in the database, the operator can specify the required text file for each
record or database field without having to key repeated information in subsequent
records.
This concept is the same for graphics. Many times, the same graphic is needed
for multiple chemicals. By specifying the correct graphic(s) for a specific chemical,
the operator will not need to worry about printing an incorrect graphic with the
incorrect chemical. By including graphics and text files with specific records, the
data will be merged onto the label at print time.
Here, we will demonstrate how to include a graphic or text file in a database
record.
1. The first step is to create the database with a database field that is a character
data type and is big enough to include a filename and or path statement as the
data. For example, to embed a text file or graphic in a database record, the
database field must be a minimum length of 12. This will be enough space for an
8 character filename, and the file extension. (Ex. DIAGRAM2.PCX) the software
will look for the file in the default directory. If the text file or graphic is stored in a
different location, the length for the field must be long enough to include a drive
designator and a path name. (Ex. C:\WINDOWS\CAUTION1.TXT).
409
Printed Documentation
2. Next, you will need to design the format so that the Source of Data is Database
Indirect, for a text file, or Database, for a graphic. When adding the text field to
the format, the Database Indirect Source of Data means that the software will
look for the text at the location specified in the database record. When adding the
graphic to the format, the Database Source of Data means that the software will
look for the graphic file at the location specified in the database record. Please
refer to Adding a Text or Paragraph Field and Adding a Picture Field for more
information.
3. Once the format is designed, the format can be printed. When printing the
format, the software will merge the correct text file and graphic with the correct
database information when the operator enters a value for the database search
key.
RESERVED WORDS
There are several Reserved Words that have special functionality in the software.
TRUEDATE - TRUETIME
TRUETIME
The TRUEDATE and TRUETIME functions force the software to send the current
system date and time with each format that is sent to the printer. To use the
TRUEDATE function, create a Text field with the data source of "Print Date" and
use the field name TRUEDATE. To use the TRUETIME function, create a Text
field with the data source of "Time" and use the field name TRUETIME.
TRUECOUNT
The TRUECOUNT function tells the software to use the value of this field for the
default value for the number of batches. To use TRUECOUNT, add a text field to
the format named "TRUECOUNT". The value of this field will become the default
number of batches of the label to be printed in the Print Request screen.
It is also possible for batchsize to be specified in a TRUECOUNT field. The
syntax is the same as for the "formatcount" command in a command file: two
numbers separated by commas give the number of batches and the batchsize.
For example, to print 10 batches of 2 labels per batch, use "10,2".
If you want to print the
the number of batches on the label instead,
use @TRUECOUNT in a copied or linked field.
FMTCOUNT BARSUPP LBLCOUNT FMTNAME
These four reserved words have special functionality when used as field names
in a database. Click here for more information.
410
Appendices
@USERID
@USERID
@USERID will print a text field with the name of the current user. This reserved
word can be accessed by creating a text field with the Source of Data option set
to Copied. This will create a text field with the current user name on it, or the
word “default” if the User Signon Required Program Option is set to No.
BACK to TOP
Appendix C: $ALL Function and Tutorial
Accessing Internal or External Databases
Formats may be printed accessing data from either its internal database or an
external ASCII database. An example file is included with the software, store.dbf.
An external ASCII database may not be viewed or modified from within this
software package.
$ALL Tutorial
Printing shelf labels typically means printing out an entire data file. This can be
accomplished through the $ALL command. $ALL is a wild card command that
informs the software that you want to print all the records or a specific range of
records in a database. This database may be either an internally created
database or an external database.
The sample files included with the software, illustrate the use of the $ALL
command.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Click the Printer icon or choose File | Print Batch
Batch of Formats from the menu
bar.
Browse to the directory where the example formats are saved on your PC
and select the "STORE" format.
The prompt that appears on your screen is "ENTER THE BAR CODE
NUMBER FOR THE RECORD OR $ALL FOR ENTIRE DATABASE". Type
$ALL.
The format will appear on your screen filled in with the first record from an
ASCII database named STORE.DBF.
Select option Print a Batch of Formats to print the records and the Print
Request Screen will be displayed:
BATCH SIZE (NUMBER OF IDENTICAL COPIES OF EACH FORMAT):
ENTER "1"
STARTING RECORD NUMBER OR ALL (DATABASE HAS 30
RECORDS): ENTER "ALL"
411
Printed Documentation
If you typed a number instead of "ALL" you would now see the following item:
ENDING RECORD NUMBER
This would give you the ability to print a specific range of records from a data file
if it were required because of a paper jam or some other situation.
The next item is :
•
HOLD JOB
Answer No to begin printing immediately. Enter Yes to store this job in the Print
Queue for printing later. If you answered No,
No shortly labels will start coming out of
the printer. A total of 60 labels will be printed.
Now you may exit the Print screen and enter the Change Format function to
explore some of the attributes of the format named STORE. One item of interest
might be the bar code and how it accesses the database through the use of an
operator prompt.
Once you are through exploring the format, exit the software completely. It's now
time to explore the database that was used to print the labels that came off the
printer.
The name of this file is STORE.DBF. It was created on a mini computer and
downloaded to the PC for use with this software.
Following are the key points that may be viewed on the screen. You may also see:
•
•
•
•
•
•
412
The structure of the file is fixed length fields padded with spaces and a
carriage return-line feed at the end of each record. The file must have the
extension .DBF.
The first 9 lines define the structure of the file by field names and character
positions. This is the header record. There may be up to 32 fields, 80
characters per field.
There must be a blank line between the header record and first data
record.
The first 6 characters are a field called Code. This is the field that the
format called STORE uses as a search field.
FMTCOUNT is a reserved word and allows you to control the number of
labels printed for each record. That is why you wound up with 60 labels
even though there were only 30 records in the database. This option would
be used when multiple locations are used to shelve an item.
BARSUPP is another reserved word. This will allow you to suppress the
printing of all bar codes on a particular label. This would be used to
prevent attempted reordering of a discontinued item or attempted ordering
of a vendor replenished item. When using BARSUPP the absence of a
Appendices
•
•
character means print the code. The presence of any character means
suppress the code.
The last field, called Junk, is there strictly to work around a problem with
many text editors that won't allow a line to end with a space and instead
insert the carriage return-line feed after the last printable character. This
field would not have been needed if we had Code as our last field since
Code always has 6 printable characters.
The last bit of exploration that we will do is of a Command File. To state it
simply, a Command File will allow you to do almost anything with an
external file that you could do from the keyboard at the time of printing.
This function is quite useful if you are printing labels for multiple locations. Key
points on ideas of how to use a Command File are:
•
•
•
•
•
If you serviced 10 locations that needed price update labels you would
have 10 identical Command File records.
You could create a separator to be printed after the database had been
run each time. Each one of these would be a separate Command File
record.
If you use multiple types of stock, you could use DISPLAYMSG to prompt
you to change to a different stock based on the format being printed.
If you were printing location specific replacement labels, our
recommendation would be to use a location specific format that accesses
a location specific replacement database. Then, each week, copy the
location specific replacement database to the one created the previous
week.
Using the ideas listed above it is completely possible to service 50 to 100
locations from one central location printing out your labels in separated
and collated form by typing nothing at the PC except EASY and a
Command File name.
FORMATNAME=STORE
FORMATCOUNT=ALL
BARCODE=$ALL
TESTPRINT=ON
BACK to TOP
Appendix D: File Types
Common
Common File Extensions
.BMP - A bit mapped picture graphic file.
413
Printed Documentation
.CMD - A Command File, created by an external text editor. Similar to the DOS
batch file utility - used to print formats externally.
.DBF - A database file - created by the internal database, dBASE III, III+ or IV
compatible or an ASCII database using the ASCII database attributes.
.EPS - An Encapsulated Postscript graphic file.
.FMT - File extension used to for label formats.
.IXL - Contains a list of index files matched to a database File.
.LOG - A User log file.
.MDB - A database file created with the Microsoft Jet Database engine.
.NDX - 7 possible per database name - file could be created after database is
established.
.PCC - A picture graphic file.
.PCX - A picture graphic file.
.RPT - A report file - added during format printing - dBASE III compatible.
.SER - A serial file. The file is rewritten at the time of format printing with the next
logical value when used with increment or decrement. It prevents duplicate or
missing serial numbers.
.TIFF - A picture graphic file.
.WMF - A Windows MetaFile graphic.
IMPORTANT NOTE: The software can read in pictures that were created under
PC Paintbrush or any other software package that is capable of creating .PCC
or .PCX format files. The purpose is to take advantage of the higher resolution
capabilities of this software. When using a .PCX graphic editor package or when
scanning in a graphic, your best results will occur if the scanner and/or software
package is set to Monochrome (also called Black and White or 2 Color). Avoid
color and shades of gray as these can produce a 'cloudy' looking graphic on your
label format, unless you are printing to a Color printer.
BACK to TOP
414
Appendices
Appendix E: Installing Code Page 850
For additional information on installing Code Page 850 in Windows 95, Windows
98, Windows 2000, Windows NT, or Windows XP please refer to the following
page on our website by clicking HERE.
HERE
Appendix F: Hexadecimal Codes
BACK to TOP
415
Printed Documentation
Appendix G: Labelcom Utility
The LABELCOM utility allows data to be read from an input device, such as a bar
code scanner or a scale. LABELCOM supports serial devices, USB Human
Interface Devices and keyboard wedge devices. LABELCOM can also monitor a
file or a TCP/IP port for input.
Once the data is received, it can then be used to fill in variable data fields on a
label created in EASYLABEL.
1. Running LABELCOM.
LABELCOM is started from the Windows Start Menu. Click the Start button and
navigate to Programs or All Programs -->
--> Tharo -->
--> EASYLABEL and then click
on LABELCOM.
LABELCOM
When LABELCOM starts you will be presented with a list of important information:
Current Configuration:
Configuration This is the configuration file (.lcm) currently being used by
LABELCOM. If it is blank there is no configuration file loaded. If this is the case
you will need to open or create one (see Section 2 below).
Monitor Status: Displays the status of LABELCOM's Monitor. It will either be
Stopped to show that LABELCOM is NOT ready to receive data or Started to
show that LABELCOM is ready to receive data. You can Start or Stop the
Monitor from the Monitor selection in the main menu.
Monitoring Port:
Port Displays the name of the Com port that LABELCOM is
configured for. This is the port that the data will be read from.
Bytes Received: Displays number of bytes contained in the received message.
Messages Received: Shows the number of messages received.
Current Message:
Message Shows the data that is currently being received.
2. SETUP.
The parameters and settings for LABELCOM are stored in a file with the suffix
".lcm". These .lcm files are readable only by the LABELCOM utility. When
LABELCOM is executed for the first time there will be no .lcm file open. You can
verify this by looking at the Current Configuration heading. This heading will be
blank when no configuration is loaded. You will either need to open an
existing .lcm file or create one.
416
Appendices
If you have an existing .lcm file simply click File from the main menu and then
click on Open. You can then browse for your .lcm, once you have selected the
file, click on Open to load it.
Once an .lcm is opened you can view any section of the configuration by
selecting Configure from the main menu and then clicking on the section you
want to change (see section 2. Setup for more information)
To create a new .lcm file, click File from the main menu and then click on
New. You will then be prompted through creating a configuration. What follows is
New
a list of the items you may be prompted for during the configuration:
Data Source...
Select “Serial Port (COMx)” if you are receiving data from a Serial
device.
Select “TCP/IP Port (Network)” if you want LABELCOM to monitor a
TCP/IP port for data.
Select “Data File” if you want LABELCOM to monitor a file for data.
Select “USB HID or Keyboard Wedge Device” if LABELCOM will be
receiving data from a USB Human Interface Device or a Keyboard
Wedge Device.
Port Name: Designates the name of the Com port that LABELCOM is
configured for. This is the port that the data will be read from.
Baud Rate:
Rate Select the baud rate of the input device. This selection must
match the baud rate that the input device is configured for.
Data Bits:
Bits Select a value for Data Bits. Choose a number from 4 to 8. This
selection must match the number of Data Bits your input device is
configured for.
Stop Bits: Select a value for Stop Bits. Choose 1, 1.5 or 2. This selection
must match the Stop Bits your input device is configured for.
Parity: Select a value for Parity from the list. Choices are: None, Odd, Even,
Mark, and Space. This selection must match the Parity your input device is
configured for.
Flow Control: Select the method for input flow control. Choose None if
unknown. Choices are: None, XON/XOFF, DTR, RTS
417
Printed Documentation
NOTE: For information on configuring your input device, please refer to the User's
Manual for your input device.
TCP/IP Port Number:
Number: Enter the TCP/IP Port Number you would like
LABELCOM to monitor for data.
File Path: This is the full pathname of the file you want LABELCOM to
monitor. You can also click the “...” button to browse for the file.
Once you have configured how LABELCOM will be receiving the data,
LABELCOM will now prompt you for a Sample Message so you can choose what
data LABELCOM should extract.
Extract Data...
Sample Message: Click the Get Sample button and then use the input
device to send a sample message now. If this is not possible you can enter
a typical input message using the keyboard (use hexadecimal
representations for control characters. For example, the characters: \x0D
should be used to represent a carriage return). If the Sample Message
contains control characters (such as carriage returns and line feeds) those
control characters are expected to be in each input message.
Extract Data: Insert one or more pairs of square brackets [ ] around the
data to be extracted for printing. For example if the Sample Message is:
ABC1234567
The Extracted data could be: ABC[1234567]
If you have more than one field that needs to be filled in with data, you can
place brackets [ ] around the data to be used for each field. For example, if
there are two fields that need to be filled, the sample message would be as
follows:
Sample Message: 12345\x0D\x0A123456789\x0D\x0A
Extracted Data: [12345]\x0D\x0A[123456789]\x0D\x0A
Next you will be prompted to select the label format you want to print
Label Format...
Label Format: Enter the full pathname for the label format file of the format
to be printed. You can also click the “...” button to browse for the file.
418
Appendices
Receive Field: You will have one Receive Field listed for every set of
brackets [ ] that you used in the Extract Data prompt.
Once the Label Format is selected, you will see a list of named variable
fields from that Label Format.
Format Field: the variable field(s) on the label that can be filled in with the
extracted data stored in the Receive Field.
NOTE: Only NAMED
NAMED variable fields on a format can be filled in by LABELCOM. In
other words, the field(s) must be When Printed or Database fields with a field name
specified.
Click a Format Field Name to select it and then click the Receive Field that
has the extracted data you want to use to populate that field. Click the
“<<<” button to make the association. If you make an incorrect association
you can remove it by highlighting the field and clicking the “>>>” button.
Field Value: If there is any named variable field on the label format that is
not filled in with data from the received message, a value can be specified
for this field here. Simply click on the Field Name to select it and then click
the “Edit Value” button to change the value.
Click OK to move on to the Printer Selection page.
Once the field associations are complete it is time to select which printer will
print the labels generated by LABELCOM.
Printer...
Select Destination Printer: Use the drop down to select the printer you want
to print the labels. Choose “Use Default” to print the selected format on the
printer it was designed for. Select another printer from the list if you wish to
print the selected format to a specific printer.
Duplex to Printer: Check the box to enable Duplex Printing, leave the box
unchecked to print to a single printer. With the box checked you will be able
to select the Duplex printer from the drop-down.
Click OK to move on to the Custom Processing screen
Finish and Custom Processing....
At this point you can click OK to finish the setup. This will cause LABELCOM to
ask you if you would like to start the Monitor. Click Yes to have LABELCOM start
the monitor and wait for incoming data.
419
Printed Documentation
NOTE: You may want to set LABELCOM to automatically start the Monitor each
time LABELCOM
LABELCOM is started. To do this click on Configure from the main menu and
then click on Auto Start.
However, if you do want to use Custom Processing check the box to enable
it. This will allow you to add statements to modify values of format variable fields
(or format name). For example if you want to print a different format based on the
value that was received or if you want to print more than one copy of a label with
each scan. See Section 3 below for details.
3. Custom Processing
With the Custom Processing Box checked, you will be able to write a custom
program sequence.
Expressions using Custom Processing follow the same rules as the software's
arithmetic expressions. Variables can be either format field names, command file
keywords such as "formatname" and "formatcount", and temporary variable
names.
Programs can use the following three types of statements:
1. variable = expression
This can be:
FORMATNAME = to specify a new format
VARIABLENAME = to specify a field value
FORMATCOUNT = to specify the number of labels to print
NOTE: When there is a incrementing/decrementing number on the format,
this value is be the number of batches or the number of times to
increment/decrement the field.
To print multiple copies of the same Serial Number enter
FORMATCOUNT="1,2" for the Procedure. This will print 2 copies of the
same Serial Number for each scan.
2. if ( condition )
{ ...statements }
else
{ ...statements }
420
Appendices
3. while ( condition )
{ ...statements }
String constants must be enclosed in quotes.
For Example: SERIALNUM = "ABC"
The data can also be enclosed using single quotes. If you are using the double
quotes (") to designate the inch mark, you must use single quotes around the
data:
SIZE = '1 1/2" '
If you are using single quotes to designate the foot mark, you must use double
quotes around the data:
SIZE = "1 1/2' "
If you want to print a specific quantity of labels for each message received, you
can specify the quantity as follows:
formatcount = 3
For each scan, there will be 3 labels printed.
If you want to print a different format based on the value received, you can
specify a simple condition using the value received:
if (PARTNO <= 1000)
{formatname = "a.fmt"}
else
{formatname = "b.fmt}
For each input, the variable field, partno will be compared to the value 1000. If
the value for partno is less than or equal to 1000, then the format called a.fmt will
print. If the value for partno is greater than 1000, then the format called b.fmt will
print.
Click OK to save the settings.
4. RUNNING MULTIPLE VERSIONS OF LABELCOM.
421
Printed Documentation
It's possible to run multiple instances of the program by including the name of a
parameter file on the command line, for example:
labelcom.exe \easylabel\com1parm.lcm
labelcom.exe \easylabel\com2parm.lcm
The two parameter files must specify two different ports. If there is no command
line parameter, the file name is taken from label0.ini (the last file used).
BACK to TOP
Appendix H: Advanced Programming Functions
Advanced Programming Functions
Arithmetic/Expression Summary
Calculating a Check Digit
Advanced Programming Functions
422
Appendices
Arithmetic/Expression summary
This is a summary of the operators and functions which can be used in arithmetic
or conditional print expressions.
+
*
/
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
423
Printed Documentation
%
|
<
<=
!= or #
== or =
LIKE
NOT LIKE
>=
>
$
|| or OR
&& or AND
! or NOT
Remainder (Example 16% 7 is 2)
String concatenation
Less than comparison
Less than or equal comparison
NOT equal comparison
Equal comparison
Pattern matching comparison
Negation of LIKE
Greater than or equal comparison
Greater than comparison
Whether or not the first string contains the second
Logical 'OR'
Logical 'AND'
Logical 'NOT'
There is no distinction between numeric and string variables. ALL VALUES ARE
(variable length) STRINGS. Attempting to do arithmetic on non-numeric
variables gives the value "???". Comparison of two values which are valid
numbers is an ordinary numeric comparison. For example "-2" < "0" is TRUE.
If either operand is NOT numeric, then a character string comparison is
performed. Logical true has the value "1" and Logical false has the value "0".
String constants must be in quotes, but numeric constants can be either quoted
or not (since they can't be mistaken for field names/variables):
DATA + 67 and DATA + "67" are indistinguishable.
Calculating a Check Digit
The following example calculates an unsupported MOD 9 check digit:
1. Create a text field and name it "BARDATA"
Choose Fixed for Source of Data
Enter "010583005" for the Fixed Data
NOTE: This is your starting data string. You may want to change the Source of
Data to When Printed or whatever type meets your needs.
2. Create another text field and name it "DIGIT1"
424
Appendices
Choose Arithmetic for Source of Data
Enter "SUBSTRING(BARDATA,1,1)" for Calculation
NOTE: This is selecting the first digit of the starting data and making it its own
field.
3. Create 8 more text fields and name them "DIGIT2" through "DIGIT9"
Choose Arithmetic for Source of Data
Enter "SUBSTRING(BARDATA,x,1)" for Calculation where x = 2 for the second
field and so on up to 9.
NOTE: This is selecting the next 8 fields of the starting data and making them
their own fields.
4. Create another text field and name it "TOTAL"
Choose Arithmetic for Source of Data
Enter
"((DIGIT1*9)+(DIGIT2*8)+(DIGIT3*7)+(DIGIT4*6)+(DIGIT5*5)+(DIGIT6*4)+(DIGI
T7*3)+(DIGIT8*2)+(DIGIT9*1))/9" for Calculation
Enter "2" for Decimal Places
Choose "Custom Numeric/Amount Format" for Special Formatting
Enter "99.99" for Format String
NOTE: Each digit is multiplied by its position weight, then added together and
divided by 9. The result is then forced to have 2 digits past the decimal, the first is
the number that we need as the remainder. The second number is needed to act
as a buffer for rounding of any extra digits past the second. The format string
assures that the data will be 4 digits even if the resulting data is less than 10, i.e.
-5 will be 05.00 not 5.00, this is important for the next step.
5. Create another text field and name it "CHECKSUM"
Choose Arithmetic for Source of Data
Enter "SUBSTRING(TOTAL,4,1) for Calculation
NOTE: The fourth position is selected for use as the remainder. The decimal
occupies a position, so the fourth position is actually the first digit to the right of
the decimal.
425
Printed Documentation
6. Create another text field and name it "DATA"
Choose Link for the Source of Data
Enter "2" for the Number of Fields to Link
Choose "BARDATA" for Link Field 1
Choose "CHECKSUM" for Link Field 2
NOTE: The starting data and the resulting checksum are combined to make the
barcode with the MOD 9 Weighted check digit.
7. Create a Barcode Field and name it "BARCODE"
Choose Copied for Source of Data
Choose "DATA" for the name of the copied field
Any fields that you do not want to print can be made into "phantom" fields.
Steps 2 and 3 were added for explanation purposes. You may eliminate these
two steps by changing step 4 to the following:
4. Create another text field and name it "TOTAL"
Choose Arithmetic for Source of Data
Enter
"((SS(BARDATA,1,1)*9)+(SS(BARDATA,2,1)*8)+(SS(BARDATA,3,1)*7)+(SS(BA
RDATA,4,1)*6)+(SS(BARDATA,5,1)*5)+(SS(BARDATA,6,1)*4)+(SS(BARDATA,7
,1)*3)+(SS(BARDATA,8,1)*2)+(SS(BARDATA,9,1)*1))/9" for Calculation
Enter "2" for Decimal Places
Choose "Custom Numeric/Amount Format" for Special Formatting
Enter "99.99" for Format String
BACK to TOP
Appendix I: Creation of a Connection String
String
Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider Connection
426
OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers
Appendices
Connection
A Jet connection is used to connect to Microsoft Access Databases (.mdb). The
OLEDB Provider for ODBC Driver Connection can be used to connect to almost
any database with an existing data source name (DSN ).
Sample Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider connection
1. On the provider tab select 'Microsoft
Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider'
Provider as your
provider and then click the 'Next
Next'
Next button
2. You are then presented with the connection tab. In section number 1 enter
or browse to the name of the database you want to connect to.
3. If the database is not password protected you can skip to the next step. If
the database is password protected in section number 2 there is a place to
enter a user id and password, fill in this section if your database has
multiple users and passwords.
NOTE: To set the password for a single user protected MDB database, you need
to enter the password into the "Jet
Jet OLEDB:Database Password"
Password Property on the
ALL tab. Do NOT set any password on the Connection Tab.
4. Click the 'test connection' button. You should be presented with a
message box stating that the test connection has succeeded. If the
connection failed you will need to double check the values you entered. If
you need help with establishing a connection you can click on the 'Help
Help'
Help
button in the Data Link Properties dialog box. This will display additional
information from Microsoft on using the dialog box and defining connection
information for each OLE DB provider.
5. Click OK to return to the Software and enter the rest of the prompts for the
field.
Sample Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers connection
1. On the provider tab select 'Microsoft
Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers'
Drivers
as your provider and then click the 'Next
Next'
button
Next
2. You are then presented with the connection tab. You can select:
a. Use Data Source name and then select the ODBC data source
name (DSN) you want to access from the list. You can add more
sources through the ODBC Data Source Administrator. Refresh the
list by clicking Refresh. Choose enter or browse to the name of the
database you want to connect to.
b. Use Connection String this option allows you to type or build an
ODBC connection string instead of using an existing DSN. Clicking
the 'Build
Build'
Build button opens the Select Data Source dialog box. Once
you select a data source, the connection string in that data source
will appear in the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog
box.
427
Printed Documentation
3. If the database is not password protected you can skip to the next step.
Otherwise enter the password here.
Enter the initial catalog to use'
4. In the 'Enter
use prompt, type in the name of the
catalog (or database), or select from the drop-down list.
5. Click the 'test connection' button. You should be presented with a
message box stating that the test connection has succeeded. If the
connection failed you will need to double check the values you entered. If
you need help with establishing a connection you can click on the 'Help
Help'
Help
button in the Data Link Properties dialog box. This will display additional
information from Microsoft on using the dialog box and defining connection
information for each OLE DB provider.
4. Click OK to return to the Software and enter the rest of the prompts for the
field.
BACK to TOP
428
Index
1
sequence 96
161a Cable Configuration 158, 166, 175, 185, 209, 226,
252, 269
string 96
9's 96
16-way Switch 223
A
2
A,B,C 355
232 Communications 147, 162, 171, 181, 191, 201, 207,
214
2D Composite Component 391, 393
3
32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check 381
32-bit ODBC Administrator 352
32-bit Windows application 3
32-layer Aztec Mesa 389
4
41a 158, 166, 175, 185, 209, 226, 252, 269
41a Cable Configuration 226
485 Cable Configuration 145
485 Communications 147
5
5-digit ZIP 372
8
81C 8-way Switch Box 158, 166, 175, 185, 209, 226,
252, 269
81c Cable Configuration 158, 166, 175, 185, 209, 252,
269
AA 122
Abbreviated Name 96
Access
Internal 411
Menu Functions 26
Access 26
Access 411
Accessing Memory Card 150
ActiveX 337
Add
Bar Code Field 61
Box Field 79
Circle 83
Database 295
Index File 300
Line Field 86
New Field 48, 295
New Printer 133
8-way Switch 223
Picture Field 88, 407
9
Printer 133
9-digit ZIP+4 372
Text 96
9's
429
Printed Documentation
Users 26
Add 26
AIDC 355
Align
Add 45
Align Bottom 131
Add 48
Align Down 58, 131
Add 61
Align Left 58, 130
Add 75
Align Right 58, 130
Add 79
Align Top 130
Add 83
Align Up 58, 130
Add 86
Group 52
Add 88
Align 52
Add 96
Align 130
Add 120
Align 130
Add 123
Align 130
Add 133
Align 131
Add 293
ALL Function 75, 93, 117, 276, 411
Add 295
ALL Tracking Data
Add 295
Erasing 335
Add 300
ALL Tracking Data 335
Add 301
Allow Blanks 72, 92, 115
Add 340
Allowable Sizes 355, 356, 358, 360, 361, 362, 369, 374
Add 407
Allowable Symbol Height 355, 356, 358, 360, 369
Additional Features 389, 391, 393
Alphabetic 96
Add-on Characters 61, 96
Alphanumeric 96
Adobe Photoshop® 3, 88
Alt key 10
Advanced Database Functions 407
ALT+E 301
Advanced Functions 416
Alternate Background 19
Advanced Programming Functions 422
Alternate Printer 276, 280, 283
AI 364, 393
AM 122
430
Index
American National Standards Institute 356
Arabic 389
AND 422
Arithmetic 123, 407
And/or 61, 337, 393, 413
Arithmetic/Expression 416, 422
Angled Lines 86
ARROW Keys/ARROW Keys 10
ANSI 10, 18, 356
Article Numbering Association 361, 362
Apollo
AS/400 36
Apollo Cables 145
Ascending 306
Apollo Notes 147
ASCII 36, 129, 290, 295, 304, 331, 356, 358, 360, 364,
376, 381, 383, 384, 389, 407, 411, 413, 416
Apollo Setup 142
ASCII 128 379
printing 61
ASCII Replace file 36
Apollo 34, 36
Auto Field Name 33, 48
Apollo 61
Auto Submit 15
Apollo 142
Auto-Size Input Field 15
Apollo 147
Available Fields 75, 120, 331
Apollo 150
Avery Dennison Cables 135
Apollo 338
Avery Dennison Setup 133
Apollo 413
A-Z 61, 356, 358, 360
Appearance 19
Aztec Code 376, 389
Append Records 307
Aztec Mesa 389
Appendix A 403
B
Appendix B 407
Backfeed 275
Appendix C 75, 93, 117, 411
Backfeed Speed 275
Appendix D 413
Background Color 96
Appendix E 10, 415
Bands
Appendix F 415
Imaging 36
Appendix G 416
Bands 36
Appendix H 422
Bar Codes
Application Identifier 364
Scanning 353
431
Printed Documentation
Bar Codes 48
Box Field 79
Bar Codes 353
Browse 17
Bar/Space Adjustment 34
Browsing 295
Barcode Width Magnification 61
Brunswick 1
Barcodes 33, 276, 355
Bytes Received 416
BARDATA 416, 422
C
BARSUPP 411
C.Itoh
Batch
C.Itoh Cables 158
Number 280
C.Itoh Notes 162
Print 276, 280, 411
C.Itoh Setup 155
Batch 133, 142, 155, 163, 171, 182, 196, 203, 207, 215,
223, 242, 250, 266
C.Itoh 162
Calculating
Batch 276
Check Digit 422
Batch 280
Checksum 372
Batch 280
Sell By 407
Batch 411
Calculating 372
Batch Mode 34
Calculating 407
Batch Size 150, 276, 280, 284, 411
Calculating 422
Batch/Lot Number 364
Calculation 407, 416, 422
Batchsize 340
Cancel 26, 150, 226, 285, 299, 301, 308, 329, 335
Baud Rate 133, 142, 155, 163, 171, 182, 203, 215, 223,
242, 250, 266, 416
Bi-directional 226
BIDIRECTIONAL 223
BLANK 96, 304, 331
Blanks Allowed 72, 92, 115
BMP 413
Box Field
Adding 79
432
Cancel All button 286
Cancel Current Function 56
Cannot Add This Job 403
Cannot Edit 288
Cannot Freeze 288
Cannot Move 288
Cannot UNDO 403
CAS
Index
CAS-161A 158, 166, 175, 185, 209, 226, 252, 269
Change Format Variable Data icon 282
CAS-41 209, 252, 269
Change Mouse Pointer
CAS-41 Code Activated Switch 158, 166, 175, 185,
209, 226, 252, 269
Magnifying 57
Change Mouse Pointer 57
CAS-81c 8-way switchbox 158, 166, 175, 185, 209,
226, 252, 269
CAS 158
CAS 166
CAS 175
CAS 185
CAS 209
CAS 226
CAS 252
CAS 269
CC-A 391
CC-B 391
CC-C 391
CCD 379, 381, 383, 384, 386
Cent Substitute 18
CENTER 79
Center Data 61
Change Parameters 333
Change Records 301
Change Report Parameters 331
Change Setup 416
Character
Leading 61
Trailing 61
Character 61
Character 295
Character 381
Character Formatting 96
Character Height
Specifying 96
type 96
Character Height 96
Character Set 147, 355, 356, 358, 360, 361, 362, 369,
374, 376, 379, 381, 383, 384, 386, 389, 391, 393
Center Horizontally 58, 130
Character Spacing 96
Center Vertically 130
Character Width 96
Center/Justify 96
Check Characters 356, 358, 360, 379, 383
CF1000 413
Check Digit
Change Amount 61, 96
Calculating 422
Change Common Properties on Multiple Fields 51
Check Digit 61, 361, 362, 369, 374
Change Field Specification 56
Check Digit 422
Change Format Specification 47, 56
CHECKSUM
433
Printed Documentation
Calculating 372
Code Height 61
CHECKSUM 96
Code One 376
CHECKSUM 372
Code Page 850
CHECKSUM 416
Installing 415
CHECKSUM 422
Code Page 850 415
Checksum Example 372
Codeword 384
Choose All Fields 49, 53
Codewords 376, 386, 389, 391
Circle/Ellipse 83
COLOR 88, 304, 413
Circular Arc 96
COM 294, 416
Citizen
Combine Reports 331
Citizen Cables 166
Command File
Citizen Notes 171
Command File Clauses 340
Citizen Setup 163
Command File Monitoring 18, 338, 340
Citizen 171
Commandfilename 340
Clipboard 51
Create 340
CMD 340, 413
name 340
Codabar 355
use 411
CODABLOCK
Command File 61
CODABLOCK 256 378
Command File 72
CODABLOCK F 378
Command File 79
CODABLOCK 378
Command File 83
Code 128 barcode 360
Command File 86
Code 128 Version 61
Command File 88
Code 16K 376
Command File 92
Code 39 3, 355, 356, 358, 360, 378, 379, 389
Command File 96
Code 39's Full ASCII 356, 358
Command File 115
Code 49 376, 379
Command File 219
Code 93 355, 358, 389
Command File 338
434
Index
Command File 340
Create Replace File 36
Command File 403
Create Serial Number File Screen 329
Command File 411
Create Shortcut 416
Command File 413
Cross Hairs 58, 130
Composite 391, 393
CTRL 10
Compressing 301, 305
CTRL key 49, 52, 282
Concatenation 383
CTRL+ENTER 72, 92, 96, 115
Concatenation, Global Label Identifiers 384
CTRL-ENTER 72, 92, 115
Concurrent Access 133, 142, 155, 163, 171, 182, 203,
215, 223, 250, 266
CTRL-TAB key 10
CTRL-Z 51
Conditional
Current Message 416
Entering 276
Currently Defined 133
Conditional 276
Custom 19, 96
Control Characters 72, 91, 115
Custom Date 96, 407
Controlled Access Areas 26
Custom Numeric Amount Format 96
COPIED 61
Custom Spacing
Spacing 96
Copy
Customized Reports 3
Field 53
Cut
Copy 10, 49, 51
Cut Offset 40, 147
Copy 53
Cut Options 40, 280
Copy 74
Cutter 40, 147
Copy 96
Cutter Installed 215
Copy 120
Cut 10
Country Code 147, 162, 171, 181, 191, 201, 214, 239,
245, 260, 361, 362
Create Bar Code 61
Create Box Field Specification 79
Create Job 337
Create Line Field Specification 86
Cut 51
Cyrillic 389
D
Daily Subtotals 331
Darkness Adjustment 142, 153, 155, 163, 171, 182, 207,
215, 250
435
Printed Documentation
Data
Data Bits 147, 162, 171, 181, 191, 201, 207, 214, 219,
226, 275, 416
Arithmetic Source 407
Data Capacity 381, 389
Database Indirect Source 407
Data Capture 355
Database Source 407
Data Checking 72, 92, 96, 115
Representation 386
Data Field Name 75, 93, 117
Select Source 352
Data Matrix 381
Source 59, 75, 88, 93, 117, 123, 275, 352, 407, 416,
422
Data Sequence 383
Viewing 301
Data Structure 364
Data 41
Data Type 295
Data 59
Data Type Validation 150
Data 61
Database
Data 75
Adding 295
Data 88
Compressing 305
Data 93
Editing 295, 301
Data 96
Erasing 295
Data 117
Erasing Records From 295
Data 123
Indexing 299
Data 150
Searching 295
Data 275
Sorting 306
Data 301
Updating 301
Data 352
Database 41, 61, 75, 88, 93, 117, 123, 275
Data 364
Database 295
Data 376
Database 295
Data 386
Database 299
Data 389
Database 301
Data 407
Database 301
Data 416
Database 305
Data 422
Database 306
436
Index
Database 307
Database Structure Management 299, 300, 301
Database 352
Database System 41, 75, 93, 117
Database 407
Databasefile 340
Database Field
Databasefile inputfile 340
Erasing 299
Databasefile orderby 340
Modifying 299
DataMatrix 3, 376, 381
Database Field 282
Datamax
Database Field 299
Datamax Cables 175
Database Field 299
Datamax I-Class 61
Database Files 41, 75, 93, 117, 295
Datamax Notes 181
Database Functions 26, 295
Datamax Ovation 175, 185
Database Indirect 96, 124, 407
Datamax Setup 171
Database Print 304
Datamax 181
Database Records
Datamax 338
Printing 304
Datasheet 304
Writing 306
Datasheet View 304
Database Records 304
DATE 123, 407
Database Records 306
Date Format 96
Database Records Management 295, 301, 303, 304,
305, 306, 307, 308
Date/time 3
Day
Database Source
Week Name 96
Data 407
Day 96
Database Source 407
DBASE 295, 299, 340
Database Structure
DBASE III 295, 299, 411, 413
Changing 301
DBASE IV file 411
Modifying 295
Dbf 29, 46, 295, 411, 413
Database Structure 295
DD 96
Database Structure 301
DDD 96
Database Structure Creation 295
437
Printed Documentation
Dd-mm-yy 121
Demand Mode 34
Decimal Places 41, 123, 295, 416, 422
Demo 13, 403
Decrementing 61, 74, 121, 276, 280, 329, 340
Descenders 96, 194, 240, 264
Default 150, 416
Descending 306
Default Command 18
Description 33, 287
Default.lcm 416
Design/Test Value 96
Define
Details 150
Name/Path 129, 290
Device Attached 223, 250
New Database 295
Diagonal 79, 83, 86
Printer Configuration 263
DigiBoards 294
Windows Printer 263
Dimension 355, 356, 358, 360, 369
Define 129
Dip Switches 158, 166, 175, 185, 209, 226, 252, 269
Define 263
Direct Print 142, 153, 155, 163, 171, 182, 192, 196, 207,
215, 223, 250, 266
Define 290
Direct Thermal Printing 34
Define 295
DISABLE 340
Define Search Path 17
Disable Reprint 147
Defined Printers 286
Disable Test Print 18
Delete button 133
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES 4
Delete File 150
Display
Deleting
Display Grid 48, 56, 58
ONLY 403
Display Orientation 33
Printer 133
Drawing Tool Bar Select View 57
User 26
Function Tool Bar Select View 57
User icon 26
Last Update 33
Deleting 26
Print Queue 10
Deleting 133
Standard Tool Bar Select View 56
Deleting 403
Tools Tool Bar Select View 58
Deleting Users 282, 340
Display 10
438
Index
Display 33
EAN-8 361, 362, 364
Display 56
EASY.EXE 403, 413
Display 57
EasyTutor 9
Display 57
ECC-000 381
Display 58
ECC-140 381
DISPLAYMSG 340, 411
ECC-200 381
Dot Expansion 34, 226
Edit Format 340
Double Arrow 86
Edit Job 284
Download Format
EEC 361, 362
Memory Card 150
ELabelBatch 337
PCMCIA Drive 150
ELabelInfo 337
Download Format 150
ELabelJob 337
Downloaded Fonts 36, 181, 194, 240, 252, 264
ELabelOCX.doc 337
Dpi 34
ELabelPrinter 337
Drawing Toolbar 61, 79, 83, 86, 88, 96
Ellipse Field 57, 83
Drivers 7
ENABLE 340
DRWATSON.LOG 403
Enable Printing 61, 79, 83, 86, 88, 96, 416
Duplex Print 276, 280, 283, 416
END 10, 46, 48, 53
Duplex Printer 280
ENDING RECORD NUMBER 411
Duplicate Serial Number 15
Enhanced Image Processing 18, 142
Duplicated Keyword 403
Enter Data Field Name 352
E
Enter Search Field Name 352
EAN 361, 362, 393
Enter Search Fields 352
EAN International 364, 393
EPC 42, 78, 124, 126
EAN/UCC Composite 391
EPS 3, 88, 413
EAN/UPC 391
Erase
EAN-13 361, 362, 364
EAN-14 item 364
Mark 301
Erase 10, 47, 49
439
Printed Documentation
Erase 301
Erasing 335
Erase 329
Erasing 335
Erase ALL Records 308
ERP 3
Erase All Records icon 308
Error 287, 288, 403
Erase All Tracking Data 331, 335
Error Occurred Saving Print Queue 403
Erase Field 53, 56, 299
Error Processing 18
Erase Field icon 299
Error Security Level 61
Erase Format Tracking Data 331, 335
Error Status Messages 403
Erase Index File 301
ESC 10, 26, 43, 276, 299, 301, 335
Erase Index File icon 301
European 121, 142, 407
Eraserecords dbase 340
European Article Numbering 361, 362
Erasing
European Date 407
ALL 308
Excluding
ALL Tracking Data 335
Quiet Zone 379
Database 295
Excluding 379
Database Field 299
Extended Channel Interpretation 389
Field 53
Extended Cross Hairs 48, 130
Format 47
External Database
Format Tracking Data 335
Selecting 352
Index File 301
External Database 352
Serial File 329
External Database 411
Erasing 47
External File 96, 123
Erasing 53
Extract Data 416
Erasing 295
F
Erasing 299
F2 10, 55, 284
Erasing 301
Fargo
Erasing 308
Fargo Cables 185
Erasing 329
Fargo Setup 182
440
Index
Fargo/Datamax 340
Field Heading 331
Fargo 191
Field Height 83, 88
FDA 3
Field Length 295, 403
Federal Government 407
Field List 51, 59
Field
Field Name 61, 79, 83, 86, 88, 96, 295, 403
Copying 53
Field Optimized 275
Erasing 53
Field Position 295
Moving 53
Field Type 59, 150
Number 422
Field Width 79, 83, 88, 331
Placing 48
FieldName 340, 416
Receiving 416
FIELDS 416
Resizing 52
Fields Currently Defined 33
Selecting 49
Fields Specified 403
Viewing/Changing 51
Fieldvalue 340
Field 48
File DSN 352
Field 49
File Menu 29
Field 51
Fill Pattern 79, 83, 86
Field 52
FIM
Field 52
FIM B 364
Field 53
FIM C 364
Field 53
FIM D 364
Field 53
FIM 364
Field 416
Firmware Level 223
Field 422
Fixed 61, 72, 91, 115, 150
Field Color 88
Fixed Data 96, 416, 422
Field Contrast 88, 96
Fixed Fields 282
Field Direction 61, 88, 96, 194, 219, 264
Fixed List 96
Field Fill 96
Flip Format 36
441
Printed Documentation
Flow Control 416
Format 45
Fmt 29, 30, 46, 413
Format 46
FMTCOUNT 411
Format 47
FMTNAME 295
Format 47
FN1Function 61
Format 48
FN2Function 61
Format 133
FN3Function 61
Format 142
FN4Function 61
Format 150
FNC 364
Format 155
FNC1 376, 389, 391, 393
Format 163
Font load/Busy 287
Format 171
Font Number 194, 264
Format 182
Font Setup 129, 290, 304, 331
Format 194
Font Size 96
Format 196
Font Source 194, 264
Format 203
Font Style 96
Format 207
Fonts 59
Format 215
Form View 301, 303
Format 219
Format
Format 223
Creating 45
Format 242
Erasing 47
Format 250
Maximum Fields 47
Format 264
Moving 46
Format 266
Number 150, 276
Format 276
Print Batch 276, 411
Format 280
Saving 30
Format 286
Format 29
Format 411
Format 30
Format Background 19
442
Index
Format Being Added
Format Request Queue 276
Format Tracking Report 331
Format Tracking Report 333
Format Being Added 276
FORMATCOUNT 340, 411, 416
Format Browser 31
FORMATNAME 338, 340, 411, 416
Format Card 150
Formatname HAS BEEN SAVED 30
Format Definition Print 129, 290
Formats Printed Report 407
Format Display 49
Freeze 285, 286
Format File 33
Freeze All 286
Format Name 33, 280, 286, 337, 416
Frozen 226, 285
Format Navigator 58
Frozen Status 226
Format Request List 288, 403
Full ASCII 356, 358
Format Request Queue
Full Justify 96
Format Being Added 276
Format Request Queue 276
Fully Blank 72, 92, 115
Function Tool Bar Select View
Format Saved With DEMO Version 403
display 57
Format Specification 142, 275
Function Tool Bar Select View 57
Format Specification Screen 33, 36, 252
Function Toolbar 9, 57, 133
Format Specifications menu 48
G
Format String 96, 416, 422
Gap 142
Format Tracking Data
Gaps Between Labels 39
Erasing 335
Format Tracking Data 335
Format Tracking Report
Gemini
Gemini Setup 153
Gemini 153
Printing 331
General Information 1
produces 30
General Protection Fault 403
Test Printing 333
Generic/Text Only 293
Format Tracking Report 30
Getstatus 340
Format Tracking Report 331
Getstatus useprinter 340
443
Printed Documentation
Getstatus useprinter Status Messages 201
HIBC 378
GPF 403
Highlighted Text 19
Graphic load/busy 287
Hold
Graphical Configurations 389
CTRL key 49, 282
Gray Level 79, 83, 86
SHIFT key 46, 48
Grid
Snap 48, 56, 58
Hold 46
Hold 48
Grid 48
Hold 49
Grid 56
Hold 282
Grid 56
Hold Job 276, 280, 284, 411
Grid 58
HOME 10, 46, 48, 53
GROUP
HOME key 46, 48
Align 52
HOME/END 10
Choosing 52
Home-Show 301
GROUP 52
HORIZONTAL OFFSET 129, 290, 304, 331
GROUP 61
Horizontal Position 61, 79, 83, 86, 88, 96
GROUP 96
Horizontal Separation 39
H
Horizontal Thickness 79
H key 10
Hot Keys 10
Hardware Reset 201
Hour 122
Header 333
HP
Health Industry Bar Code 378
HP LaserJet 413
Height Magnification 96
HP LaserJet Printer Manual 194, 264
Height Multiplier 61
HP LaserJet Series II 194, 264
Help Language 17
HP Notes 194
Hexadecimal 96
HP Setup 192
Hexadecimal Codes 415
HP 194
HH 61, 122
HP 264
444
Index
Human Readable 61, 96, 356, 358, 360, 361, 362, 369,
374
Indicator 393
Ineligible Field Name Used 403
Human Readable Interpretation 61
Initial Label Feed 155, 163, 171, 182, 196, 207, 250
I
Installing
IBM 15
Code Page 850 415
Identifier 364
Windows Printer 263
Image Processing 18
Installing 153
Imaging
Installing 263
Bands 36
Installing 293
Imaging 36
Installing 415
Incorrect Password 403
Interleaved 2/5 389
Incorrect User ID 403
Interline Spacing 96
Increment/decrement
Intermec
Type 61
Intermec 4100 201
Increment/decrement 61
Intermec 4400 If 201
Increment/decrement 280
Intermec Cables 198
Increment/Decrement Field 61, 96
Intermec Corporation 379
Increment/Decrement Sequence 61
Intermec Notes 201
Indefinite - Printer 150
Intermec Setup 196
Index Case Sensitive Searches 15
Intermec 36
Index Expression 403
Intermec 201
Index File
Intermec 340
Adding 300
Intermec 379
Erasing 301
Internal Time Stamp 226
Index File 300
International Article Numbering Association 361, 362
Index File 301
International Characters 10, 18, 192, 240, 264
Indexing
Interpretations 96, 219, 389
Database 299
Invalid Character 403
Indexing 299
445
Printed Documentation
Invalid Command Line Option 403
JOB file 288
Invalid Configuration File 403
Job List File 288
Invalid Field Length 403
Job Number Not Found 403
Invalid Operand In Clause 403
Job Separator 36
IP Address 291
Job Separator Format File 36
IP Printing 3, 291
Job/cancel useprinter 340
IP-Address/Printer Name 291
Jobdescription 340
ISO 646 391, 393
Jobnumber 338
ISO 8601 15
Julian Date 96, 407
ISO 8859-1 376, 389
K
ISO Week 15
Kana 386
ISS-Aztec Code 389
Kanji 386
ITF 356
L
IXL 413
Label
Rotating 48
J
Japanese 36
Label 48
Japanese Kanji 386
Label Format 45
JIS 386
Label Offset 34
Job
Label Sensor 34
Cannot Edit 288
Label.cfg 403, 413, 416
Cannot Freeze 288
Label0.ini 416
Cannot Move 288
Labelcom Utility 416
Job 25 285
Labelcom.exe 416
Job 133, 142, 155, 163, 171, 182, 196, 203, 207, 215,
223, 242, 250, 266
Language 17
Large Toolbar Icons 19
Job 285
Last Update 33
Job 286
Left Justify 96
Job 287
Left Margin 39, 129, 290, 304, 331
Job 288
446
Index
Letter Day 96
Letter Orientation 96
Maximum Fields
Format 47
LIKE 15, 61, 96, 304, 422
Maximum Fields 47
Limit
Maximum Lines 96
25 47
Maximum Message Length 379
Limit 47
Maximum Numeric Data Capacity 391, 393
Line Field 86
Maximum Row Height 384
Linear barcodes 355
MEMO 75, 93, 117
Linked Field 61, 75, 79, 83, 86, 88, 120, 416, 422
Memory Card
Linked Fields Window 75, 120
Download Format 150
Literal Value 75, 120
Memory Card 150
LOG file 403
Memory Card Downloads 34, 147
Logical 'AND 422
Memory Card Functions 150
Logical 'NOT 422
Memory Card Limitations 150
Logical 'OR 422
Messages Received 416
Long Date 96
Metric 96
M
MG10.8M 356
M/D/Y 96
Micro PDF417 383
Maintain Aspect Ratio 88
Mils 194, 240, 264
Manager Functions 26
Minimum Durability Date 364
Manual Feed 194, 264
Mirror Image 36
MARKED 276
MM 96, 122
MARKED FOR ERASE 301
MM.DD.YY 96
Marked Records 15
Mm-dd-yy 121
MaxiCode 3, 147, 162, 171, 181, 191, 201, 214, 239,
245, 260, 376, 383
MMM 96
MMMMMMMMM 96
Maximum Data Capacity 383, 384
MOD 422
Maximum Durability Date 364
Mod 10 Check Digit 61
Maximum Field Length 41, 72, 92, 96, 115
447
Printed Documentation
Mod 10 Only 61
Move Field 51, 53, 56
Mod 43 Check Digit 61
Move Up 285
Mod 43 Only 61
MSI 371
Modify Field 299
MSI Plessey 371
Modify Field icon 299
Multi-Buffer Settings 226
Modulo 10 369, 371, 372
Multi-Port 294
Modulo 103 360
N
Modulo 43 356, 378
N.NN 96
Modulus 10 361, 362, 369, 374
Name When Printed 96, 124
Modulus 103 360
Narrow Ratio 355, 356, 358, 369
Modulus 16 355
Navigator 58
Modulus 43 356, 358
NDC 96
Monitoring 416
NDX 413
Monochrome 413
NEC 15
Month
Month
Network Printing 293
Abbreviated Name 96
New Database
Month 96
Create 295
Month Name 96
Defining 295
Move
New Database 295
Field 53
New Database 295
Format 46
New Database Structure
Selected 331
Creating 295
Move 46
New Database Structure 295
Move 48
New Field
Move 53
Add 48, 295
Move 86
Insert 295
Move 331
New Field 48
Move Down 285
New Field 295
448
Index
New Format
Printing 280
ODBC
establishing 352
New Format 280
ODBC 17, 41, 75, 93, 117, 340
New Format Name 33
ODBC 352
New Printer
OFF-LINE 287, 403
Add 133
Offset Adjustment 142, 155, 163, 171, 182, 207, 250
New Printer 133
OK button 47, 51
NN 96
Omni-directional 386
NN.N¢ 96
Omni-directionallly 383
NN¢ 96
ON-LINE/READY 13, 276, 283, 304, 331
Nnn 340
Open DataBase Connectivity 3, 352
Nominal Element Size 383
Opening
Non-alphanumeric 403
File 29
NonNon-Numeric Data 96
Opening 29
NOT 17, 416, 422
Opening 46
NOT LIKE 422
Opening 280
Novexx Cables
Opening 329
Novexx Notes 207
Opening 331
Novexx Setup 203
Operator Prompt Line 41, 72, 75, 92, 93, 115, 117
Novexx Cables 205
Operator-entered
Number Across 39
controlling 3
NUMBER OF IDENTICAL COPIES OF EACH FORMAT
411
Operator-entered 3
Optional Fonts 266, 275
Numbering System Character 361, 362, 374
Optional Keyboard 147
Numeric Keypad 10
OR 422
Numeric Month 96
Oracle® 3
NW-7 355
Orderby 340
O
Orientation Angle 86
Octal 96
449
Printed Documentation
Outlined Circle 83
PDF417 3, 376, 383, 384, 413
Outlined Ellipse 83
PDF417 bar 61, 413
Output File 150, 276, 280, 334
Peel-Off 275
Ovation 175, 185
PgDn 10, 33, 282
P
PgUp/PgDn 10
Page Breaks 41
PHANTOM 416
Page Header 41
Phantom Fields 19
Page Layout 39, 47
Pharmaceuticals 407
Paper Motion 33
Picket Fence 36, 219
Paper Size 194, 264
Picture 48
Paragraph 48
Picture Error 288, 403
Paragraph Field 96, 407
Picture Field 88, 407
Parallel 133, 142, 153, 155, 163, 171, 182, 196, 207,
215, 223, 226, 242, 250, 266
Pin Cable Configuration 135, 145, 158, 166, 175, 185,
198, 205, 209, 217, 226, 244, 252, 269
Parity 226, 416
Pitch Sensor 226
Partially Blank 72, 92, 115
Placement Grid 19
Pass Through 36
Placing 48
PASSWORD 340
Plessey Code 371
Passwords 9
PM 122
Paste 51, 53
Port
Path 293
Monitoring 416
Pause 287
Type 133, 142, 155, 163, 171, 182, 196, 203, 207,
215, 223, 242, 250, 266, 291, 293
Pause Option 36
Port 133
PC1 RS ON/OFF 223, 226
Port 142
PC1 RS ON/OFF Protocol 226
Port 155
PCMCIA Drive
Port 163
Downloading 150
Port 171
PCMCIA Drive 150
Port 182
PCX 142, 413
450
Index
Port 196
Print All Records 304
Port 203
Print All Records icon 304
Port 207
Print Area Height 39, 219
Port 214
Print Area Width 39
Port 215
Print Batch 276, 411
Port 223
Print Criterion 61, 96
Port 242
Print Darkness 34
Port 250
Print Date 96, 121, 407
Port 266
Print Format 26
Port 291
Print Format Definition 129, 290
Port 293
Print Head Temperature 219
Port 294
Print ID Label 266
Port 416
Print Job 55, 284
Port Serial Printing 294
Print Mode 34, 142, 201, 275
Position
Print Mode Override 266
Starting 280
Print Queue
Position 280
Change 55, 284
Position Grid 48, 56
commands 276
Position Per
Per Line 96
Displays 10
Postal Service 372
entering 150
POSTNET 372
Print Queue Menu 201
Postscript 3, 88, 413
restoring 288, 403
Postscript Printers 263
save 276
Presentation Position 34
view 340
Price Header 96
View/Changing 284
Primary Background 19
Print Queue 10
Primary Message 389
Print Queue 55
Print All 331
Print Queue 56
451
Printed Documentation
Print Queue 150
Printer Status 201, 286
Print Queue 194
Printername 340
Print Queue 226
Printers
Print Queue 276
Adding 133
Print Queue 284
Deleting 133
Print Queue 284
Installing 293
Print Queue 286
Resetting 201
Print Queue 287
Printers 133
Print Queue 288
Printers 133
Print Queue 338
Printers 147
Print Queue 340
Printers 150
Print Queue 403
Printers 158
Print Queue 411
Printers 162
Print Report 26, 333, 334, 335
Printers 166
Print Request 276, 280
Printers 171
Print Speed 34, 201
Printers 175
Printable Area 194, 264
Printers 181
Printable Characters 194, 219, 240, 264
Printers 185
Printed/Database Fields 282
Printers 201
Printer Address 142, 250, 266
Printers 209
Printer Configuration 57, 133, 263, 291, 293
Printers 223
Printer Data File 129, 290, 304, 331
Printers 226
Printer icon 276, 280, 331, 411
Printers 250
Printer Model 33, 133, 142, 153, 155, 163, 171, 182,
192, 196, 203, 207, 215, 223, 242, 250, 266
Printers 252
Printers 263
Printer Number 150, 276, 283, 416
Printers 269
Printer Prompts 150
Printers 287
Printer RAM 155, 163, 171, 182, 192, 196, 207, 223
Printers 287
Printer Setup 129, 214, 290, 304, 331
452
Index
Printers 293
R
Printers 413
RAM 155, 163, 171, 182, 196, 207, 250
Printer's Internal Calendar 150
Random Weight Check Digit 61
Printer's Internal Clock 150
Range
Printing Options 304
Entering 276
Printing/Busy 287
print 276
Printronix
Range 276
Printronix Cables 209
Raw Data Port Number 291
Printronix Notes 214
Ready/Busy 226
Printronix Setup 207
Receive Buffer Size 226
Printronix 214
Recent Batch Formats 29
Problem Cause Solution 7
Recent Database Files 29
Product Identification Number 361, 362, 374
Recent Edited Formats 29
Program Options 57, 142, 283
Recent Reports 29, 30, 331
Prompt Number 41, 72, 75, 92, 93, 115, 117
Recent Serial Files 29, 30, 329
Prompt Repeats 72, 92, 115
Record Selection 276
Protocol - XON/XOFF 201, 214
Records
Q
Appending 307
QR Code 3, 376, 386
Ending 276
Queue 285, 288, 403
Printing 304
Queue Error 288, 403
Starting 276
Quick Response Code 386
Text file 331
Quiet Zone
Records 61, 96
excluding 379
Records 276
including 383
Records 304
Quiet Zone 379
Records 307
Quiet Zone 383
Records 331
Quit 301, 353
Recreate Database File 301
453
Printed Documentation
Reduced Space Symbology 393
Changing 333
Reed-Solomon
Report Title 304, 331
levels 383, 386
Report Parameters 333
number 391
Reprint 36, 219
Reed-Solomon 376, 381
Re-Send Downloaded Data 18
Reed-Solomon 383
Resizing
Reed-Solomon 386
Fields 52
Reed-Solomon 391
Resizing 52
Reflective Sensor 34
Restore Mouse Pointer 57
Re-index 305
Reverse - Field 96
Re-index Database 306
Reverse Field Adjustment 96
Replace File 36
Reverse Image 36
Report
RFID 42, 78, 124, 125, 126, 127
Creating 331
Ribbon Out 250
Enter 304, 331
Ribbon Saver 34
Printing 331
Right Align 130
Test Print 331
Right Justify 96
Writing 334
Right Mouse Button 10
Report 304
RJS
Report 331
RJS Cables 217
Report 331
RJS Notes 219
Report 334
RJS QualaBar 440 219
Report Data
RJS Qualibar 440 215
choosing 331
Report Data 61, 96
RJS Setup 215
RJS ThermaBar 260 219
Report Data 331
RJS 36
Report File 57, 331, 407
RJS 219
Report Parameters
RJS 413
454
Index
RocketPorts 294
Sato Cables 226
Rotating
Sato Notes 239
Label 48
Sato Setup 223
Rotating 48
Sato 239
Rounded Rectangle 79
Sato 413
Row Size 61
Save
Rows 379, 384
Format 30
Rpl file 36
Print Queue 276
RPS Bar Code Specifications 96
Save 30
Rpt 29, 30, 45, 46, 331, 413
Save 31
RS-232 Communications 162, 171, 181, 191, 201, 219
Save 33
RS-232 Serial Communications 147
Save 45
RS-485 142, 147
Save 276
RSS 393
Save 295
RSS Expanded 391, 393
Save 329
RSS Expanded Stacked 393
Save As Function 407
RSS Limited 393
Save Data 15
RSS-14 393
Scan Bar Codes 353
RSS-14 Stacked 393
Scanning
RSS-14 symbology 393
Bar Codes 353
RTS/CTS 147, 162, 171, 181, 191, 219
Scanning 353
RTS/CTS Standard 207
SCC-14 369
Run Minimized 340
SCx 142
RUNNING MULTIPLE VERSIONS OF LABELCOM 416
Search Field Name 75, 93, 117
S
Search Fields 41, 75, 93, 117
Sample Message 416
Search Next 301
SAP 3, 36
Search Path 17
Sato
Searching
455
Printed Documentation
Database 295
Serial File Name 74, 121
Searching 295
Serial Number 364
Select All 276
Serial Port 214, 287
Select All Records 15
Serial RS-232 Communication 226
Select ANSI 18
Serialized 61, 74, 121
Select Database System 352
SERIALNUM 416
Select Marked Records 15
SETUP 293, 416
Select Memory Card Download 147
Shelf Pricing Labels 371
Select Printer 304
SHIFT 10
Select Standard Code Sizes 142
Shift JIS 386
Selected Fields list 331
SHIFT key 10, 46, 48
Sell By Date 407
SHIFT-TAB 43
Sequence 96, 389
SHIFT-TAB key 10, 282
Ser file 329
Short Date 96, 407
Serial File
Signon dialog 340
Creating 329
Silver 47
Erasing 329
Singlejob 340
path/name 74, 121
SIZE 416
Viewing/Changing 329
Smooth Font 275
Serial File 57
Snap
Serial File 74
Grid 48, 56, 58
Serial File 121
use 56
Serial File 295
Snap 48
Serial File 329
Snap 56
Serial File 329
Snap 56
Serial File 329
Snap 58
Serial File 329
Software Licensing Agreement 4
Serial File Functions 329
Solid 79, 83, 86
456
Index
Solid Circle 83
Space Horizontally 58, 130
Solid Ellipse 83
Space Vertically 58, 131
Solid Polygon 79
Special Effect Character 96
Solid Rectangle 79, 86
Special Formatting 96, 121, 407, 416, 422
Solid Rounded Rectangle 79, 86
Special Options 181
Sort Key 306, 331
Specification Data
Sort Sequence 306
Sorting
Database 306
Sorting 306
Source
Entering 43
Specification Data 43
Specification Screen 10
Specifying
Character Height 96
Choose Arithmetic 422
Format String 96
Choose Copied 422
intercharacter 356
Choose Fixed 422
outputfile 340
Choose Link 422
User Identifier 340
Data 59, 75, 88, 93, 117, 123, 275, 352, 407, 416,
422
Specifying 96
Specifying 252
Date 407
Specifying 340
Source 59
Specifying 356
Source 75
SS 122, 416, 422
Source 88
SSC-14 369
Source 93
SSCC 364
Source 117
SSCC AI 364
Source 123
SSS 147, 162, 171, 181, 191, 201, 214, 239, 245, 260
Source 275
Stacked 96, 219
Source 352
Stacked Down 96
Source 407
Stacked Fields 219
Source 416
Stacked Left 96
Source 422
457
Printed Documentation
Stacked Letter Orientation 219
CODABLOCK F 378
Stacked Right 96
Code 128 378
Stacked Up 96
Code 39 378
Standard Code Size 142
Structure 378
Standard Tool Bar 56, 283
Structured Append 389
Start
Subfunction 301
Job Number Not Found 403
Subfunctions 9
Position 280
Submenu 29, 46
Record 276
Subset B 360
Wizard 293
Subset C 360
Start 9, 12, 263
SUBSTRING 416
Start 276
Subtract 123
Start 280
Super Code 376
Start 293
Superset
Start 403
UPC 361, 362
Start/stop 355, 356, 358, 360
Superset 361
Start/Stop Pattern 356, 358, 360, 361, 362, 369, 374
Superset 362
STARTING RECORD NUMBER OR ALL 411
Supplementing
Status 223, 226, 287
10-digit Code 128 389
Step Ladder 36, 219
Supplementing 389
Stop 276
Support
Stop Bits 147, 162, 171, 181, 191, 201, 207, 214, 219,
226, 275, 416
Code 128 61
UNC 3
Store As 150
Support 3
String
Support 61
9's 96
Switch 250, 340
String 96
Sybase® 3
STRINGS 416, 422
Symbol 386
Structure
458
Index
Symbol Character Structure 393
TAB key 282
Symbol Error Correction 381
TAB key 301
Symbol Error Detection 381
Tabbed Dialog Boxes 19
Symbol Height 379, 384
TABLE 41, 75, 93, 117
Symbol Length 379
Table Name 41, 75, 93, 117
Symbol Separator 391
TABS 10
Symbol Set 194, 264
TCP/IP 291
Symbol Size 376, 381, 383, 386, 389
Tear-Off 142, 275
Symbol Structure 393
Tear-Off Mode 34
Symbol Technology 384
TEC
Symbol Width 384
TEC 416 96
Symbologies 45, 61, 364, 369, 376, 378, 389, 393
TEC Cables 244
Symbology 61, 355, 356, 358, 360, 364, 369, 371, 372,
379, 381, 383, 384, 386, 391, 393
TEC Notes 245
TEC Setup 242
Symbology's start/stop 356
TEC 34
Synergystex Setup 240
TEC 245
Syntax Error 403
Terminal Server 14
System DSN 352
Test Print
T
Disabling 283
TAB key
Format Tracking Report 333
like 15
Report 331
pressing 282
use 338
use 43
Test Print 18, 56
TAB key 10
Test Print 283
TAB key 15
Test Print 331
TAB key 43
Test Print 333
TAB key 72
Test Print 338
TAB key 92
Text
TAB key 115
459
Printed Documentation
Adding 96
Time Format 122
create 407
Time Out 291
generated 48
Time Stamp 122
Text 48
Time Test 338
Text 96
Too Large 403
Text 407
Too Small 403
Text Color 96
Tool menu 48
Text File
Toolbars 19, 56, 57, 58
records 331
Tools
See Writing Database Records 307
choosing 283
Write 334
selecting 52
Write All Records 306
Tools 48
Text File 18, 129, 290, 304
Tools 52
Text File 306
Tools 58
Text File 307
Tools 129
Text File 331
Tools 150
Text File 334
Tools 282
Tharo
Tools 283
Tharo Cables 252
Tools 290
Tharo Notes 260
Tools 353
Tharo Setup 250
Tools Toolbar 58
Tharo 252
Top Margin 39, 129, 290, 304, 331
Tharo 260
TOTAL 288, 411, 416, 422
The New Database Structure 295
Traceability Numbers 364
Thermal Transfer 34
Tracking
THIS FUNCTION WILL PERMANENTLY ERASE ALL
MARKED RECORDS 305
Header 333
Tracking 333
TIFF 413
Tracking Report 30
Time 122, 338, 407
460
Index
Trailer 61
U
Trailing
U.S. 372
Characters 61
UCC 364, 372, 374, 393
Edge 201
UCC Application Identifier 364
Edge Violations 201
UCC Company Prefix 372
Trailing 61
UCC/EAN 360, 393
Trailing 201
UCC/EAN 128 96
Trailing Edge 201
UCC/EAN Application Identifiers 364
Transaction References 364
UCC/EAN-128 3, 364, 391, 393
Translucent Ribbon 250
UCC-128/EAN-128 SSCC-18/SCC-14 364
Transmissive Sensor 34
Unbalanced Quote 403
Transportation
UNC 3, 293
Department 3
Undefined Field Name Used 403
Transportation 3
Undo 51
Trim Trailing Blanks 41, 75, 93, 117
Undo Function 10
True Type 52, 96
UnFreeze 285, 286
True Type Fonts 194, 219, 239
UnFreeze All 286
TRUEDATE 407
Unfrozed 226
TRUETIME 407
Unfrozen 226, 285, 287
TrueType 36, 96, 150, 155, 163, 171, 181, 182, 194,
219, 239, 250, 252
Uniform Code Council 361, 362, 364, 372, 393
Uniform Product Code Council 369
TrueType Fonts 194, 219, 239
United Parcel Service 383
Truncate Symbol 61
United States 361, 362, 371, 372
Truncated PDF417 384
United States Postal Service 364
TXT 307
Universal Naming Convention 3, 293
Txt file 276, 280
Universal Product Code 372
Txtfilename 340
UNIX 36
Type $ALL 411
Unmark 301
Type Mismatch 403
461
Printed Documentation
Unmark All 301
Unmarks 276, 301
Updating
Database 301
Unprinted 153
Updating 301
Unslashed 18
Uploading
Up/left 301
UPC
Report Files 407
Uploading 407
Numbering System 372
Upper Case Alphabetic 72, 92, 96, 115
superset 361, 362
Upper Case Alphanumeric 72, 92, 96, 115
UPC 96, 142, 194, 240, 264
Upper Case Characters 72, 92, 96, 115
UPC 361
Upper Case International 192, 240, 264
UPC 362
UPS Bar Code 61
UPC 372
UPS Bar Code Specifications 61
UPC 374
UPS Code 383
UPC 379
UPS GroundTrac 61
UPC E0 374
USB 292
UPC E1 375
Use Ribbon Saver 34
UPC Version 361, 362
Use Slashed Zero 18
UPC Version E 361, 362
Use Standard Handshake 250
UPC/EAN 61, 355
Useprinter 340
UPC-A 3, 374
User DSN 352
UPC-A barcode 372
User ID 9, 340
UPC-A Code 372
User Identification 26
UPC-A/EAN-13 389
User Identifier 9, 340
UPCCODE 96
User Sign on Required 15
UPCCODE LIKE 96
User Signon 340
UPC-E 374
User Sign-On/Password Protection 26
Update Database 61, 96
Users
Update Format 26, 282
462
Adding 26
Index
Changing 26
Deleting 26
selecting 59
View 10
Users 9
View 41
Users 26
View 47
User-selectable 376, 389
View 55
Using Command Files 340
View 59
Using Normal Labels 34
View 59
Using Preprinted Labels 34
View 59
V
View 284
Valid Field Length
View 301
Enter 403
View 340
Valid Field Length 403
View Datasheet 301
Valid Format Name Found 403
View Field Specifications 51
Validation 72, 92, 96, 115
View menu 48
Value Indexed 299, 300
View Records 301
Variable Data 96
Visual Basic 337
Variable-length symbology 379
Visual C 337
VARIABLENAME 416
Void & Reprint 219
Variabletext 340
W
Vertical Lines 79, 83, 86
W Instructs 340
Vertical Position 61, 79, 83, 86, 88, 96
Week
Vertical Separation 39, 240
Letter Day 96
Vertical Thickness 79
Week 96
View
Week Name
choosing 59
Day 96
Data 301
Week Name 96
Field Specifications 10
Weighted 422
Print Queue 340
Welch Allyn Inc 376
463
Printed Documentation
WESTERN TELEMATIC
Windows Notes 264
Western Telematic 4-way Switch 223
Windows Postscript 263
Western Telematic CAS-161A 16-way 158, 166, 175,
185, 209, 226, 252, 269
Windows Print Setup 129, 290
Windows Printer
Western Telematic CAS-41 4-way 158, 166, 175, 185,
209, 226, 252, 269
Defining 263
Western Telematic CAS-81 8-way 158, 166, 175, 185,
209, 226, 252, 269
Western Telematic Switch 226, 252
Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments
158, 166, 175, 185, 209, 226, 252, 269
Installing 263
Windows Printer 263
Windows Printer 413
Windows Printer Driver 3, 96
Western Telematic Switch Boxes 158, 166, 175, 185,
209, 226, 250, 252, 269
Western Telematic Switchbox 158, 166, 175, 185,
209, 226, 252, 269
Windows Recycle Bin 47
Windows Setup 263
Windows Task Bar 340
WESTERN TELEMATIC 158
Windows XP 415
WESTERN TELEMATIC 166
Wizard 293
WESTERN TELEMATIC 175
WMF 413
WESTERN TELEMATIC 185
Write All Records 306
WESTERN TELEMATIC 209
Writing
WESTERN TELEMATIC 226
Database Records 306
WESTERN TELEMATIC 250
Report 334
WESTERN TELEMATIC 252
Writing 306
WESTERN TELEMATIC 269
Writing 334
When Printed 15, 61, 72, 75, 88, 92, 93, 96, 115, 117,
123, 275, 282, 416, 422
When Printed Fields 282
Where 276, 411
Width 83, 88
Width
Width Magnification 96
Width Multipliers 61, 194, 240, 264
Windows Control Panel 407, 413
464
WW 96
WWW 96
X
X0D 61, 416
X0D/x0A 416
XHH 61
XON/XOFF 133, 201, 203, 219, 250, 275
Index
X's 96
Zebra Setup 266
XXtreme 205
Zebra 266
XXX999999 96
Zebra 275
XXXX's 123
Zebra 340
Y
Zebra 413
Year
Zoom In 48, 59
Digit Day 96
Zoom Level 57, 59
ISO Week 15
Zoom Out 59
Year 15
ZPL 275
Year 96
Z's 96
YY 96
ZZZ9 96
Z
ZZZ999999 96
Zebra
ZZZZZXXXX 147, 162, 171, 181, 191, 201, 214, 239,
260
Zebra Cables 269
ZZZZZZ9 96
Zebra Notes 275
ZZZZZZZZ9 96
Zebra Programming Language 275
ZZZZZZZZZ9
ZZZZZZZZZ9 96
465
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement